User Manual PowerFlex 7S High Performance AC Drive Phase I Control Firmware Versions.xx-.7
Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards. Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice. If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited. Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence. IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions. SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present. BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures. ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Allen-Bradley, DriveLogix, DriveTools SP, PowerFlex, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, and SynchLink are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information. New and Updated Information This table contains the changes made to this revision. Topic Updated the front and inside front covers. Updated the Electronic Motor Overload Protection statement. A-3 Updated the Drive Fusing and Circuit Breaker information and Protection Device tables. Updated the back cover. Page A-6 A-6
soc- Notes:
Table of Contents Important User Information............................................... - Summary of Changes Preface Manual Updates......................................................... i- Overview Who Should Use This Manual............................................. P- What Is Not In This Manual............................................... P- Recommended Documentation............................................. P- Manual Conventions..................................................... P-3 Drive Frame Sizes....................................................... P-3 General Precautions..................................................... P-4 Class LED Product................................................... P-4 Catalog Number Explanation.............................................. P-5
ii Table of Contents Chapter Chapter Installation/Wiring Chapter Objectives....................................................... - Opening the Cover....................................................... - Mounting Clearances..................................................... - Operating Temperatures................................................. -3 AC Supply Source Considerations........................................... -3 Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems............................ -3 Input Power Conditioning............................................... -4 Grounding Requirements.................................................. -4 Recommended Grounding Scheme........................................ -4 Shield Termination - SHLD.............................................. -5 RFI Filter Grounding................................................... -5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers................................................ -5 Power Wiring........................................................... -6 Power Cable Types Acceptable for -6 Volt Installations................... -6 Motor Cable Lengths................................................... -8 Power Terminal Block.................................................. -8 Cable Entry Plate Removal.............................................. -8 Power Wiring Access Panel Removal...................................... -8 Access Panel Removal.................................................. -8 Replace the cover when wiring is complete. AC Input Phase Selection (Frames 5 & 6 Only).............................. -9 Cooling Fan Voltage................................................... -9 Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage (Frames 5 & 6 Only)......................... -9 Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations................................... -4 Using Input/Output Contactors............................................ -5 Using PowerFlex 7S Drives with Regenerative Power Units................... -5 Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections................................... -6 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors.......................... -6 I/O Wiring............................................................ -9 Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals.............................. - Auxiliary Power Supply................................................ - Hard Enable Circuitry................................................. - Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings............................. -3 Connecting SynchLink.................................................. -33 Class LED Product.................................................. -33 CE Conformity......................................................... -35 Low Voltage Directive (73/3/EEC)...................................... -35 EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)........................................... -35 General Notes....................................................... -35 Essential Requirements for CE Compliance................................ -36 Start-Up Prepare for Drive Start-Up................................................. - Before Applying Power to the Drive....................................... - Applying Power to the Drive............................................. - Assisted Start-Up........................................................ -3
Table of Contents iii Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Programming and Parameters About Parameters....................................................... 3- How Parameters are Organized............................................. 3-3 Parameter Data in Linear List Format....................................... 3-6 Parameter Cross Reference By Name....................................... 3-96 Troubleshooting Chapter Objectives...................................................... 4- Faults and Alarms....................................................... 4- Drive Status............................................................ 4- LED Indications...................................................... 4- Precharge Board LED Indications......................................... 4-3 HIM Indication....................................................... 4-4 Manually Clearing Faults................................................. 4-4 Fault Descriptions....................................................... 4-4 Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives...................................................... A- Specifications.......................................................... A- DPI Communication Configurations......................................... A-4 Typical Programmable Controller Configurations............................ A-4 Logic Command Word................................................. A-5 Logic Status Word..................................................... A-6 Output Devices......................................................... A-6 Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings....................................... A-6 Fuse Size............................................................ A-6 Fuse Type........................................................... A-7 AC input Protection Devices............................................... A-8 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings........................... A-7 Spare Connectors...................................................... A-8 Main Control Board.................................................. A-8 High Resolution Encoder Interface Board................................. A-8 Resolver Interface Board............................................... A-8 Dimensions........................................................... A-9 Control Block Diagrams List of Control Block Diagrams............................................ B- Application Notes Input Voltage Range/Tolerance............................................. C- Motor Control Mode..................................................... C- Field Oriented Control................................................. C- Permanent Magnet Control.............................................. C-3 Motor Overload......................................................... C-3 Mtr IT Spd Min...................................................... C-3 Overspeed Limit........................................................ C-4 Stop Dwell Time........................................................ C-5 Setpt Data............................................................ C-6 Setpt Data............................................................ C-6
iv Table of Contents Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Appendix H Appendix I HIM Overview External and Internal Connections........................................... D- LCD Display Elements................................................... D- ALT Functions.......................................................... D- Removing/Installing the HIM.............................................. D-3 PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Chapter Objectives....................................................... E- Specifications........................................................... E- Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications.................. E- Supported Encoders.................................................... E- Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder........... E- Recommended Cables.................................................. E-3 PowerFlex 7S Resolver Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives....................................................... F- Specifications........................................................... F- Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications.............................. F- Compatible Resolvers.................................................. F- Access Procedures Using this Appendix..................................................... G- Removing Cover(s)...................................................... G- Replacing Cover(s)...................................................... G- PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card Specifications........................................................... H- MDI Option Card Specifications.......................................... H- Supported Linear Sensors............................................... H- Supported Rotary Encoders.............................................. H- Recommended Cables.................................................. H- Wiring the MDI Option Card............................................... H-3 PowerFlex 7S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors....................................... I- Index
Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install, start-up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 7S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive, Frames -6. Refer to PFLEX-IN6 for information on installing, starting and troubleshooting the PowerFlex 7S and 7H Adjustable Frequency Drives for Frames 9 -. For information on Who Should Use This Manual What Is Not In This Manual Recommended Documentation Manual Conventions Drive Frame Sizes General Precautions Catalog Number Explanation See page... Preface- Preface- Preface- Preface-3 Preface-3 Preface-4 Preface-5 Who Should Use This Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions. You must also understand programmable controllers for the PowerFlex 7S with DriveLogix. What Is Not In This Manual Since this User Manual is designed to provide only basic start-up information for Frames - 6, the following topics have not been included: Spare parts information Installation instructions for frames 9 - For detailed drive information, please refer to publication PowerFlex 7S with Phase I Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM. This publication is available online at: www.rockwellautomation.com/literature
p- Overview Recommended Documentation The following publications provide general drive information. Title Publication Available Wiring and Grounding for PWM AC Drives DRIVES-IN Safety Guidelines for the Application, SGI-. Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature A Global Reference Guide for Reading -. Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8-4.5. The following publications provide specific PowerFlex drive information. Title Publication Available Installation Instructions - Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option for PowerFlex 7S Drives D-IN Installation Instructions - Resolver Feedback D-IN www.rockwellautomation.com/ Option for PowerFlex 7S Drives literature Firmware Release Notes - PowerFlex 7S Drive (firmware revision.6 &.7) D-RN6 For detailed PowerFlex 7S information: Title Publication Available PowerFlex Reference Manual PFLEX-RM www.rockwellautomation.com/ PowerFlex 7S and 7H Adjustable Frequency PFLEX-IN6 literature Drives for Frames 9 - For Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support: Title Allen-Bradley Drives Technical Support Online at www.ab.com/support/abdrives For Automation and Control Technical Support: Title Online at Rockwell Automation Technical Support http://support.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase The following publications provide necessary information when applying the DriveLogix Controller. Title Publication Available DriveLogix Controller User Manual D-UM Firmware Release Notes - DriveLogix Controller D-RN (firmware revision.5) Firmware Release Notes - DriveLogix Controller D-RN www.rockwellautomation.com/ (firmware revision.6) literature Firmware Release Notes - DriveLogix Controller D-RN3 (firmware revision.4) Logix5 Controllers Common Procedures 756-PM
Overview p-3 Title Publication Available Installation Instructions - DriveLogix Controller for D-IN3 PowerFlex 7S Drives Logix5 Controllers General Instructions 756-RM3 ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 788-IN ControlNet Daughtercard Installation Instructions 788-IN5 www.rockwellautomation.com/ Logix5 Controllers Process Control and Drives 756-RM6 literature Instructions RSLogix 5 Getting Results 9399-RLD3 GR RSNetworx for ControlNet Getting Results 9398-CNETGR RSLinx Getting Results Guide 9399-LINXGR The following publications provide information that is useful when planning and installing communication networks. Title Publication Available ContolNet Coax Tap Installation Instructions 786-5.7 ControlNet Cable System Planning 786-6.. and Installation Manual www.rockwellautomation.com/literature ContolNet Fiber Media Planning CNET-IN and Installation Guide SynchLink Design Guide 756-TD8 Manual Conventions In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 7S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as: drive, PowerFlex 7S or PowerFlex 7S Drive. To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text, the following conventions will be used: Parameter Names will appear in [brackets] after the Parameter Number. For example: Parameter 37 [Output Voltage]. Display text will appear in quotes. For example: Enabled. The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action: Word Can Cannot May Must Shall Should Should Not Meaning Possible, able to do something Not possible, not able to do something Permitted, allowed Unavoidable, you must do this Required and necessary Recommended Not recommended Drive Frame Sizes Similar PowerFlex 7S drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A.
p-4 Overview General Precautions Class LED Product!!!!!!!! ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment. This product emits intense light and invisible radiation. Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors. ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8-4.5., Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook. ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system. ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with the PowerFlex 7S Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC & DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block (refer to Chapter for location). The voltage must be zero. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via cables. Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameters 365 [Encdr Loss Cnfg] - 394 [VoltFdbkLossCnfg] let you determine the action of the drive in response to operating anomalies. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameters 383 [SL CommLoss Data] - 39 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] let you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. You can set these parameters so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Overview p-5 Catalog Number Explanation Important: This table is not intended for ordering. For a full list of current options refer to publication D-PL, PowerFlex 7S/7S DriveLogix USA Price List. Position -3 4 5-7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 D D P A E Y N A N N N N a b c d e f g h i j k l m Code D a Drive b Type PowerFlex 7S Voltage Rating Code Voltage Ph. Prechg. B 4V ac 3 C 4V ac 3 D 48V ac 3 E 6V ac 3 F 69V ac 3 H 54V dc N J 65V dc N N 35V dc Y P 54V dc Y R 65V dc Y T 8V dc Y W 93V dc Y Note: CE Certification testing has not been performed on 6V class drives. Frames 5 & 6 Only. Frames 5 & up. Code c ND Rating 8/4V, 6Hz Input 8V Amps 4V Amps Hp 4P 4.8 4.. 6P8 7.8 6.8. 9P6 9.6 3. 5 7.5 5.3 5. 5.3 7.5 8 3. 8 4 48.3 4 5 5 56 5 7 78. 7 5 8 9 8 3 4 4 4 3 3 3 5 54 77 54 6 9 9 75 c ND Rating 4V, 5 Hz Input Code Amps kw P..75 3P5 3.5.5 5P 5.. 8P7 8.7 4..5 5.5 5 5.4 7.5 3 3 5 37 37 8.5 43 43 56 56 3 7 7 37 85 85 45 5 5 55 5 5 55 4 4 75 7 7 9 5 5 6 6 3 6 6 3 3 3 6 385 385 46 46 5 5 5 5 59 59 35 65 65 355 73 73 4 c3 ND Rating 48V, 6 Hz Input Code Amps Hp P.. 3P4 3.4. 5P 5 3. 8P 8 5. 7.5 4 4 5 7 7 34 34 5 4 4 3 5 5 4 65 65 5 77 77 6 96 96 75 5 5 56 56 5 8 8 5 48 48 6 6 3 3 5 385 385 3 46 46 35 5 5 45 59 59 5 65 65 5 73 73 6 c4 ND Rating 6V, 6Hz Input Code Amps Hp 7 7 5 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 77 77 75 99 99 5 5 5 44 44 5 CE Certification testing has not been performed on 6V class drives.
p-6 Overview Catalog Number Explanation, Cont d c5 ND Rating 69V, 5 Hz Input Code Amps Hp 5 5 45 6 6 55 8 8 75 98 98 9 9 9 4 4 3 CE Certification testing has not been performed on 6V class drives. Enclosure Code Enclosure A IP, NEMA Type N Open/IP Frames 9 & up Only. HIM Code Operator Interface Blank Cover Digital LCD 3 Full Numeric LCD 5 Prog. Only LCD Full Numeric LCD, C Door Mount Frames & up only. d e f Documentation Code Documents E Quick Start Guide N No Documentation Brake Resistor Code w/resistor Y Yes N N o Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger. Emission Code CE Filter CM Choke A Yes Yes B Yes No N No No Frames -6 Only. Frames 9 & up Only. For use on ungrounded distribution systems (Frame 9 drives only). h i j Comm Slot Code Version N None C DPI ControlNet (Coax) D DPI DeviceNet E DPI EtherNet/IP Q DPI ControlNet (Fiber) R DPI RIO S DPI RS-483 DF DriveLogix ControlNet (Coax) DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant (Coax) 3 DriveLogix ControlNet (Fiber) DriveLogix ControlNet Redundant 4 (Fiber) 5 DriveLogix DeviceNet (Open Conn.) 6 DriveLogix EtherNet/IP Code Control Option k Control Options Logic Expansion N Phase I N/A Code N A B C Code N A B l Synch -Link Stand ard Cassette None Feedback Option None Resolver Stegman Hi-Resolution Encoder Multi-Device Interface m Additional Config. Description Phase I Control Phase I DriveLogix57 Phase I DriveLogix57 w/expanded Memory Brake Code w/brake IGBT Y Yes N N o Brake IGBT is standard on Frames -3 and optional on Frames 4-9 ONLY. g
Chapter Installation/Wiring Chapter Objectives This chapter provides the information needed to mount and wire the PowerFlex 7S AC drive for Frames - 6. For installation instructions for the PowerFlex 7S AC drive for Frames 9 -, refer to PFLEX-IN6. For Information on See Page... Opening the Cover - Mounting Clearances - AC Supply Source Considerations -3 Grounding Requirements -4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers -5 Power Wiring -6 Using Input/Output Contactors -5 Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors -6 I/O Wiring -9 Connecting SynchLink -33 CE Conformity -35 Since most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring, take every precaution to assure the wiring is correct. Read and understand all items in this chapter before beginning installation.! ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
S.M.A.R.T. Exit Lang Auto / Man Remove Exp Param # - Installation/Wiring Opening the Cover B Frames -6 DRIVE ENABLE SYNCHLINK Esc Sel Opening Control Assembly 7 8 9 4 5 6 Jog 3 Step A B C Description Loosen captive screw. Push down on cover. Pull cover away from assembly. C Alt. +/- Frames -4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner. Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open. Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive (if present). See page -8 for frame 4 access panel removal. Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up, loosen the right-hand cover screw and remove. See page -8 for access panel removal. A Frame 6 Loosen screws at bottom of drive cover. Carefully slide bottom cover down and out. Loosen the screws at top of cover and remove. Mounting Clearances Frames -6.6mm (4. in.) No Adhesive Label (see below) With Adhesive Label (see below) 5.8mm (. in).6mm (4. in.).6mm (4. in.) Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol. for detailed dimension information 5.8mm (. in).6mm (4. in.)
Installation/Wiring -3 Operating Temperatures PowerFlex 7S drives are designed to operate in surrounding air temperature of to 4 C. To operate the drive in installations with surrounding air temperature between 4 and 5 C, remove the adhesive label affixed to the top of the drive enclosure. Table.A Acceptable Surrounding Air Temperature & Required Actions Required Action... IP, NEMA IP, NEMA Type IP, NEMA Type Open Type Open No Action Required Remove Top Label Remove Top Label & Drive Catalog Number Vent Plate () All Except BC7 4 C 5 C NA BC7 4 C 45 C 5 C () To remove vent plate (see page A- for location), lift top edge of plate from the chassis. Rotate the plate out from the back plate. Important: Removing the adhesive label from the drive changes the NEMA enclosure rating from Type to Open type. AC Supply Source Considerations PowerFlex drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of, rms symmetrical amperes, 6 volts with recommended fuses/circuit breakers. Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol. for actual interrupt ratings based on circuit breaker or fuse choice.! ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers specified in Appendix A. If a Residual Current Detector (RCD) is used as a system ground fault monitor, only Type B (adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping. Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 5% of normal or the supply system is ungrounded, refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM Drives for more information.! ATTENTION: PowerFlex 7S drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. These devices should be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system. See page page -8 for jumper locations.
-4 Installation/Wiring Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life. These conditions are divided into basic categories:. All Drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system, either by the user or by the power company. The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6 volts. These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes. The power source has frequent interruptions.. 5 HP or Less Drives (in addition to above) The nearest supply transformer is larger than kva or the available short circuit (fault) current is greater than,a. The impedance in front of the drive is less than.5%. If any or all of these conditions exist, it is recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source. This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself, the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor. The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in either the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol. or the technical document Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication DRIVES-IN. Grounding Requirements The drive Safety Ground-PE must be connected to system ground. Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked. Recommended Grounding Scheme A single point (PE only) grounding scheme should be used. Some applications may require alternate grounding schemes, refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives, publication number DRIVES-IN for more information. These applications include installations with long distances between drives or drive line-ups, which could cause large potential differences between the drive or line-up grounds. For installations within a cabinet, a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used. All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point/bar.
Installation/Wiring -5 Figure. Typical Grounding R (L) S (L) T (L3) PE U (T) V (T) W (T3) DC DC + BR BR Required Input Fusing Required Branch Circuit Disconnect Shield Termination - SHLD The Shield terminal (see Figure.3 on page -) provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead. The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive (drive end) and the motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect shield to this terminal. RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked. Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The PowerFlex 7S can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker. Local/national electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations. Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses/circuit breakers.! ATTENTION: The PowerFlex 7S does not provide input power short circuit protection. Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A.
-6 Installation/Wiring Power Wiring Power Cable Types Acceptable for -6 Volt Installations! ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, BSI etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment. Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of.3 meters ( foot) for every meters (3.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 5 mils (.4mm/.5 in.). Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire. Unshielded THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 5 Mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity. Shielded/Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable. Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN. Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be included and specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can be greatly improve noise containment.
Installation/Wiring -7 A good example of recommended cable is Belden 95xx (xx determines gauge). This cable has 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a % coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket. Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known. Table.B Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating/Type Description Standard (Option ) Standard (Option ) EMC Compliance 6V, 9 C (94 F) XHHW/RHW- Anixter B95-B957, Belden 95-957, or equivalent Refer to CE Conformity on page -35 for details. Cable Trays and Conduit Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire. PVC jacket. Tray rated 6V, 9 C Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. (94 F) RHH/RHW- 5 mil single helical copper tape (5% overlap min.) with three Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or bare copper grounds in contact with shield. equivalent PVC jacket. Class I & II; Tray rated 6V, 9 C Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Division I & II (94 F) RHH/RHW- impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum armor. Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall. or equivalent Three copper grounds on # AWG and smaller. If cable trays or large conduits are to be used, refer to guidelines presented in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives.! ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads.
-8 Installation/Wiring Motor Cable Lengths Typically, motor lead lengths less than 3 meters ( feet) are acceptable. Motor lead lengths of 3 meters ( feet) to 46 meters (8 feet) require shielded cable. If your application dictates longer lengths, refer to publication D-TD, Technical Data - PowerFlex 7S Drives, for details. Power Terminal Block Figure.3 shows the typical location of the Power Terminal Block in Frame drives. The terminal block is located in the bottom section of the drive on Frame -5 drives. Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed, the Cable Entry Plate on Frame -3 drives can be removed. Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis. The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal. Important: Removing the Cable Entry Plate limits the maximum surrounding air temperature to 4 o C (4 o F). Power Wiring Access Panel Removal Frame Removal Procedure (Replace when wiring is complete), & 6 Part of front cover, see page -. 3 Open front cover and gently tap/slide cover down and out. 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove. 5 Remove front cover (see page -), gently tap/slide panel up and out. Access Panel Removal Frame 3 drives utilize a panel/cover over the power wiring terminals. To remove, simply slide it down and out.
Installation/Wiring -9 Replace the cover when wiring is complete.! ATTENTION: Removing the access panel/cover exposes dangerous voltages on the terminals and negates the enclosure type rating. Replace the access panel/cover when service is complete. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage. AC Input Phase Selection (Frames 5 & 6 Only)! ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following. Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure. will select single or three-phase operation. Remove plastic guard to access jumper. Important: When selecting single-phase operation, input power must be applied to the R (L) and S (L) terminals only. Cooling Fan Voltage Common Bus drives require user supplied or 4V AC to power the cooling fans. Power source is connected between V AC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage (see Figure.4 on page -3). Table.C Fan VA Rating Frame Fan Voltage(V or 4V) 5 VA 6 38 VA Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage (Frames 5 & 6 Only)! ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, ensure that all power to the drive has been removed before performing the following. Frames 5 & 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage. If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate, it may be necessary to change the transformer taps. The taps are shown in the insert of frame 5 below.
7 9 - Installation/Wiring Figure. Frames 5 & 6 Jumper and Transformer Locations (Frame 5 shown) Phase Selection Jumper Optional Communications Module 3-PH -PH LINE TYPE SPARE SPARE POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 4-/ AWG (.5-35 MM ) TORQUE: 3 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.67 IN (7 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) 3 VDC EXT PWR SPLY TERM (PS+, PS-) WIRE RANGE: - AWG (.5-4 MM ) TORQUE: 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.35 IN (9 MM) Fan Voltage WIRE RANGE: 6-/ AWG (6-35 MM ) TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.83 IN ( MM) OUTPUT INPUT AC 69 Volt Tap 6 Volt Tap 48 Volt Tap 4 Volt Tap Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure.. Gain access by releasing the terminal block from the rail. To release terminal block and change tap:. Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block.. Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out. Repeat for next block if desired. 3. Select appropriate transformer tap. 4. Replace block(s) in reverse order. Important Common Bus (DC Input) Application Notes. If drives without internal precharge are used (Frames 5 & 6 only), then: a) precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage, and. disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device.
Installation/Wiring - Table.D Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range () Torque Terminal Bolt Size () No. Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended ➊ Power Terminal Block Input power and motor 4. mm.5 mm.7 N-m.8 N-m connections ( AWG) ( AWG) (5 lb.-in.) (7 lb.-in.) Input power and motor. mm.8 mm.7 N-m.4 N-m connections (6 AWG) (8 AWG) (5 lb.-in.) ( lb.-in.) 3 Input power and motor 5. mm.5 mm 3.6 N-m.8 N-m connections (3 AWG) (4 AWG) (3 lb.-in.) (6 lb.-in.) BR, BR. mm.8 mm.7 N-m.4 N-m (6 AWG) (8 AWG) (5 lb.-in.) ( lb.-in.) 4 Input power and motor 35. mm mm 4. N-m 4. N-m connections (/ AWG) (8 AWG) (4 lb.-in.) (4 lb.-in.) 5 R, S, T, BR, BR, DC+, 5. mm.5 mm (75 HP) (3) DC-, U, V and W (/ AWG) (4 AWG) PE 5. mm 4. mm (/ AWG) ( AWG) 5 R, S, T, DC+, DC-, U, V and 7. mm 6. mm See Note (4) See Note ( HP) (3) W (/ AWG) (6 AWG) (3) BR, BR 5. mm.5 mm (/ AWG) (4 AWG) PE 5. mm 4. mm (/ AWG) ( AWG) 6 Input power and motor connections. mm (4/ AWG).5 mm (4 AWG) 6 N-m (5 lb.-in.) 6 N-m (5 lb.-in.) ➋ SHLD Terminal -6 Terminating point for wiring shields.6 N-m (4 lb.-in.).6 N-m (4 lb.-in.) M ➌ AUX Terminal Block -4 Auxiliary Control Voltage (5).5 mm PS+, PS- (6 AWG) 5-6 4. mm ( AWG) ➍ Fan Terminal Block 5-6 User Supplied Fan Voltage 4. mm (Common Bus Only) V AC, V AC, 4V AC ( AWG). mm (4 AWG).5 mm ( AWG).5 mm ( AWG).6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.).6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.).6 N-m.6 N-m (5.3 lb.-in.) (5.3 lb.-in.) M () Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations. () Apply counter torque to the nut on the other side of terminations when tightening or loosening the terminal bolt in order to avoid damage to the terminal. (3) Not all terminals present on all drives. (4) Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive. (5) Auxiliary power: UL Installation - 3V DC, ±%, Non UL Installation - 7-6V DC, ±%. Frame -6, W
POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 4-/ AWG (.5-35 MM ) TORQUE: 3 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.67 IN (7 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) WIRE RANGE: 6-/ AWG (6-35 MM ) TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.83 IN ( MM) 7 3 VDC EXT PWR SPLY TERM (PS+, PS-) WIRE RANGE: - AWG (.5-4 MM ) TORQUE: 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.35 IN (9 MM) 9 AUX IN+ AUX OUT 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [MM ] Max. WIRE STRIP - AWG 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) AUX IN + BR BR 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [MM ] Max. IN. LBS..4 N-M } TORQUE USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 5 IN-LB (6 N-M) 75C Cu Wire 3 AWG [5MM ] Max. 6 IN. LBS..8 N-M } TORQUE WIRE STRIP - Installation/Wiring Frame Frame Figure.3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location Frame 3 & 4 ➌! DANGER Optional Communications Module ➊ BR Use 75C Wire Only #-#4 AWG Torque to 7 in-lbs Optional Communications Module PE B BR DC+ DC PE U/T V/T W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 BR B V/T W/T3 IN. LBS..4 N-M } TORQUE CONTROL POWER PE R/L S/L T/L3 ➌ PE A CONTROL POWER BR BR DC+ DC- U/T V/T W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 ➊ ➌ SHLD SHLD PE SHLD ➋ ➊ ➋ SHLD Frame 6 ➋ ➋ Frame 5 ➋ Optional Communications Module Optional Communications Module ➍ ➌ ➍ ➌ OUTPUT INPUT AC 4 VAC VAC VAC WIRE STRIP PS+ PS BR BR DC+ DC ➊ Fan Terminal Block ➊ USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 5 IN-LB (6 N-M) T T OUTPUT T3 L L INPUT L3
- AWG 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) Installation/Wiring -3 Figure.4 Power Terminal Block BR BR DC+ DC PE U (T) V (T) W (T3) R (L) S (L) T (L3) Frame BR BR DC+ DC PE BR BR DC+ DC U (T) U V W R S T (T) (T) (T3) (L) (L) (L3) V (T) W (T3) R (L) S (L) T (L3) Frame Frame 3 PS BR BR/ DC+ DC+ DC U/T V/T W/T3 PE PE R/L S/L T/L3 Frame 5-75 HP, Normal Duty 48V AC Input PS+ PS BR BR/ DC+ DC+ DC U/T V/T W/T3 PE PE R/L S/L T/L3 Frame 5 - HP, Normal Duty 48V AC Input PS+ PS BR*/ BR* DC+ DC+ DC U/T V/T W/T3 PE 4 VAC VAC PE Frame 5-75 HP, Normal Duty 65V DC Input PS+ VAC Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP-5A4F (Common Bus Drives w/precharge Only) PS BR*/ BR* DC+ DC+ DC U/T V/T W/T3 4 PEVAC VAC PE Frame 5 - HP, Normal Duty 65V DC Input PS+ Frame 6-5 HP, Normal Duty 65V DC Input VAC Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP-5A4F (Common Bus Drives w/precharge Only) Frame 6-5 HP, Normal Duty 48 V AC Input WIRE STRIP PS+ PS BR BR DC+ DC USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 5 IN-LB (6 N-M) Common Mode Capacitor & MOV Jumpers Input Filter Capacitor Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP-5A4F (Common Bus Drives w/precharge Only) WIRE STRIP PS+ PS - AWG 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) BR BR DC+ DC USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY, TORQUE 5 IN-LB (6 N-M) Common Mode Capacitor & MOV Jumpers Input Filter Capacitor USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY U V TORQUE T 5 IN-LB T (6 N-M) OUTPUT W T3 PE PE VAC VAC 4 VAC - AWG 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) FAN INPUT -PHASE USE 75 C COPPER WIRE ONLY TORQUE 5 IN-LB T VAC (6 N-M) V AC 4V AC OUTPUT Shaded terminals (BR & BR) will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option. U T V W T3 PE PE R L S L INPUT T L3
-4 Installation/Wiring Table.E Terminal Block Descriptions Terminal Description Notes BR DC Brake (+) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection (+) BR DC Brake ( ) Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection ( ) DC+ DC Bus (+) DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper DC DC Bus ( ) DC Input Power or Dynamic Brake Chopper PE PE Ground Refer to Figure.4 for location on 3 Frame drives PS+ Aux + Auxiliary Control Voltage. See Table.D on page - () PS- Aux - Auxiliary Control Voltage. See Table.D on page - () Motor Ground Refer to Figure.3 for location on 3 Frame drives U U (T) To motor V V (T) To motor W W (T3) To motor R R (L) AC Line Input Power S S (L) Three-Phase = R, S & T T T (L3) Single-Phase = R & S () Auxiliary power: UL Installation - 3V DC, ±%, Non UL Installation - 7-6V DC, ±%. -3 Frame - 4 W, 65 ma, 5 Frame - 8 W, 9 ma Dynamic Brake Resistor Considerations! ATTENTION: The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors. A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected. External resistor packages must be self-protected from over temperature or a circuit equivalent to the one shown below must be supplied. Figure.5 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Three-Phase AC Input (Input Contactor) M R (L) S (L) T (L3) Power Off Power On M M Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat
Installation/Wiring -5 Using Input/Output Contactors!! ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor. If an input device is used occasionally, an auxiliary contact on that device should also be wired to a digital input programmed as a Enable function. The input device must not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage will occur. ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solidstate components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. When the AC line is removed, there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present - the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be required.! ATTENTION: To guard against drive damage when using output contactors, the following information must be read and understood. One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor(s) for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors/loads. If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating, power will be removed from the respective motor, but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals. In addition, reconnecting a motor to an active drive (by closing the contactor) could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault. If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe, an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is programmed as Enable. This will cause the drive to execute a coast-to-stop (cease output) whenever an output contactor is opened. Using PowerFlex 7S Drives with Regenerative Power Units If a Regenerative unit (i.e., 336 REGEN) is used as a bus supply or a brake, the common mode capacitors should be disconnected (see Table.F on page -6).
-6 Installation/Wiring Regenerative Unit to Drive Connections Regenerative Brake Mode Frame(s) Terminals 336 Regen PowerFlex 7S - 4 DC+ & DC- BR & DC- 5 & 6 DC+ & DC- DC+ & DC- Regenerative Bus Supply Mode Frame(s) Terminals 336 Regen PowerFlex 7S - 4 DC+ & DC- DC+ & DC- 5 & 6 DC+ & DC- DC+ & DC- of the Common Bus Drives Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors PowerFlex 7S drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground. To guard against drive damage, these devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on a resistive grounded distribution system or an ungrounded distribution system where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 5% of the nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect these devices, remove the jumper(s) listed in Table.F. Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out. See the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives, publication DRIVES-IN for more information on ungrounded system installation.! ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing/ installing jumpers. Measure the DC bus voltage at the +DC & DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block. The voltage must be zero. Table.F Jumper Removal Frames Jumper Component Jumper Location No. PEA Common Remove the Control Assembly and Cassette. ➊ Mode Jumpers are located on the drive Power Board (see Capacitors Figure.6). PEB MOV s ➋ -4 PEA Common Mode Capacitors Jumpers are located above the Power Terminal Block (see Figure.6). PEB MOV s ➍ 5 Wire Common Remove the I/O Cassette. The green/yellow jumper is ➎ Mode located on the back of chassis in the area shown (see Capacitors Figure.6). Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components. MOV s Input Filter Capacitors Note location of green/yellow jumper wire in Figure.6. Disconnect, insulate and secure the wire guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components. ➌ ➏
Installation/Wiring -7 Frames Jumper Component Jumper Location No. 6 Wire Common Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal Please Mode Block. Disconnect the three green/yellow wires from refer to Capacitors the two PE terminals shown in Figure.4. Insulate Power and secure the wires to guard against unintentional Terminal MOV s Blocks, Input Filter contact with chassis or components. Frame 6 Capacitors on page -.! ATTENTION: The disconnecting MOV must be used on a grounded system.
AUX IN + BR BR 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [MM ] Max. IN. LBS..4 N-M } TORQUE 75C Cu Wire 3 AWG [5MM ] Max. 6 IN. LBS..8 N-M } TORQUE WIRE STRIP 7 9-8 Installation/Wiring Figure.6 Typical Jumper Locations Frame (Control Assembly and I/O Cassette Removed) Frame ➌ ➍ PE PE MOV-PE JMPR PE 4 PE 3 DC FILTER CAP-PE JMPR! DANGER Use 75C Wire Only #-#4 AWG Torque to 7 in-lbs 75C Cu Wire 6 AWG [MM ] Max. IN. LBS..4 N-M } TORQUE WIRE STRIP CONTROL POWER AUX IN+ AUX OUT ➊ ➋ BR BR DC+ DC PE U/T V/T W/T3 R/L SHLD SHLD Optional Communications Module PE A PE B CONTROL POWER S/L T/L3 Frame 5 ➎ Frames 3 & 4 ➌ ➍ Optional Communications Module POWER TERMINAL RATINGS WIRE RANGE: 4-/ AWG (.5-35 MM ) TORQUE: 3 IN-LB (3.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.67 IN (7 MM) USE 75 C CU WIRE ONLY GROUND TERMINAL RATINGS (PE) 3 VDC EXT PWR SPLY TERM (PS+, PS-) WIRE RANGE: - AWG (.5-4 MM ) TORQUE: 5.3 IN-LB (.6 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.35 IN (9 MM) WIRE RANGE: 6-/ AWG (6-35 MM ) TORQUE: 44 IN-LB (5 N-M) STRIP LENGTH:.83 IN ( MM) OUTPUT INPUT AC BR BR DC+ DC- U/T V/T W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 PE SHLD SHLD ➏
Installation/Wiring -9 I/O Wiring Important points to remember about I/O wiring: Always use tinned copper wire. Wire with an insulation rating of 6V or greater is recommended. Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least.3 meters ( foot). 4CCF3 Flex I/O cable for use with DriveLogix is 3 ft. maximum length. Important: I/O terminals labeled ( ) or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference. Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise.! ATTENTION: Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when using bipolar input sources. Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction. Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity. Table.G Recommended Control Wire Type Wire Type(s) Description Digital I/O Un-shielded Per US NEC or applicable national or local code Shielded Multi-conductor shielded cable.75 mm (8AWG), 3 such as Belden 877(or equiv.) conductor, shielded. Standard Belden 876/946(or equiv.).75 mm (8AWG), Analog I/O twisted pair, % shield with drain (5). Remote Pot Belden 877(or equiv.).75 mm (8AWG), 3 cond., shielded Encoder/ Combined: Belden 973 (or equivalent) ().96 mm (4AWG), Pulse I/O individually shielded. Less 3.5 m ( ft.) Encoder/ Pulse I/O 3.5 m ( ft.) to 5.4 m (5 ft.) Encoder/ Pulse I/O 5.4 m (5 ft.) to 59. m (85 ft.) EMC Compliance Signal: Belden 973/978 (or equivalent) () Power: Belden 879 () Combined: Belden 989 (3).96 mm (4AWG), individually shielded..75 mm (8AWG).33 mm or.5 mm (3) Signal: Belden 973/978 (or equivalent) ().96 mm (4AWG), individually shielded. Power: Belden 879 ().75 mm (8AWG) Combined: Belden 9773/9774 (or equivalent) (4) Refer to EMC Instructions on page -6 for details..75 mm (8AWG), individually shielded pair. Insulation Rating 3V, 6 o C (4 o F), Minimum 3V, 75-9 ºC (67-94 ºF) () Belden 973 is 3 individually shielded pairs ( channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 978 (or equivalent). () Belden 879 is shielded pair. (3) Belden 989 is 3 individually shielded pairs (3 channel),.33 mm ( AWG) plus shielded pair.5 mm ( AWG) for power. (4) Belden 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs ( channel plus power). If 3 channel is required, use Belden 9774 (or equivalent). (5) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary, but is always recommended.
- Installation/Wiring Wiring the Main Control Board I/O Terminals Terminal blocks TB and TB contain connection points for all inputs, outputs and standard encoder connections. Both terminal blocks reside on the Main Control Board. Remove the terminal block plug from the socket, and make connections. TIP: Remember to route wires through the sliding access panel at the bottom Control Assembly. Reinstall the plug, when wiring is complete. The terminal blocks have keys, which make it difficult to insert a terminal plug into the wrong socket. Table.H Main Control Board I/O Terminal Locations TB - Row T (Top) TB TB - Row B (Bottom) TB - Row T (Top) TB TB - Row B (Bottom) Table.I Main Control Board I/O Terminal Block Specifications Name Frame Description I/O & Encoder -6 Signal & Encoder Blocks power connections Wires Size Range () Torque Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended.5 mm.4 mm.5 N-m. N-m (6 AWG) (8 AWG) (. lb.-in.) (.9 lb.-in.) () Maximum/minimum sizes the terminal block will accepts - these are not recommendations. Auxiliary Power Supply You may use an auxiliary power supply to keep the 7S Control Assembly energized when output power is de-energized. This allows the Main Control Board, DriveLogix controller and any feedback option cards to continue operation. Connect auxiliary power to terminal block. See Table.D on page -. You must set Par 53 [Control Options], bit 7 [Aux Pwr Sply] to enable this feature.
Installation/Wiring - Hard Enable Circuitry A dedicated hardware enable input is provided for applications that require the drive to be disabled without software interpretation. Table.J TB - Row T (Top) Terminals T 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Terminal Signal Description T Power Supply 4V DC Return (-) Power and common for pre charge T Power Supply 4V DC (+) and enable inputs. () Inputs may T9 Logic Common sink or source. () Rating: ma maximum. T8 Digital Input # For common DC bus drives. Must be high, for drive to complete the Default = Precharge pre charge cycle. Load: ma at 4V DC. T7 Enable Input Must be high for drive to run. Load: ma at 4V DC. T6 Digital Output # 4V DC open collector (sinking logic) output. Rating: 5 ma maximum. T5 Digital Output # 4V DC open collector (sinking logic) output. Rating: 5 ma maximum. T4 Digital Output Return Return for Digital outputs and. T3 Thermistor Input Used only in FOC mode with 485 T Thermistor Input Return approved motor for temperature T Thermistor Shield adaptation. Refer to Appendix A, Specifications for approved motors. Related Parameter 84, 86, 87, 88, 89, 838 84, 85 84, 843, 844 84, 845, 846 () The drive s 4V DC power supply supports only on-board digital inputs. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the drive. () Refer to wiring examples of sinking and sourcing outputs.
- Installation/Wiring. Table.K TB - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples The following definitions are used throughout this section: Source A. Apply positive voltage through the device to the input or output. B. Connect the input or output common (return) directly to the power supply common. Sinking A. Apply the positive voltage directly to the input or output common (return). B. Connect the input or output to the power supply common through the device Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Digital Inputs used for enable and precharge control. Note: 4V DC Supply - supports only on-board digital inputs. Do not use for circuits outside the drive. Sourcing Precharge and Enable Inputs - using internal power supply 9 8 7 PRECHARGE Default - If this is not used the drive must be re-programmed or use a jumper between terminal #8 & ENABLE Sourcing Precharge and Enable Inputs - using external power COMMON (RETURN) Fixed - If this is not used a jumper must be used between 7 &. +4V DC Enable - In sourcing configuration. this circuit must connect to 4V DC power for drive to run. Precharge Precharge control is used in common bus configurations and is not required for AC fed drives. If precharge control is not required, reprogram Par 838 [DigIn Sel] to a value of zero or replace the contact shown with a jumper from Terminal 8 to Terminal. If precharge is needed, in sourcing configuration, this circuit must connect to 4V DC power for drive to complete the precharge cycle. 9 8 7 PRECHARGE ENABLE
Installation/Wiring -3 Table.K TB - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Sinking Precharge and Enable Inputs - using internal power supply Enable - In sinking configuration. this circuit must connect to 4V DC return for drive to run. 9 8 7 PRECHARGE ENABLE Precharge Precharge control is used in common bus configurations and is not required for AC fed drives. If precharge control is not required, reprogram Par 838 [DigIn Sel] to a value of zero or replace the contact shown with a jumper from Terminal 8 to Terminal. Sinking Precharge and Enable Inputs - using external power supply +4V DC Common (Return) If precharge is needed, in sinking configuration, this circuit must connect to 4V DC return for drive to complete the precharge cycle. 9 8 7 Precharge Enable Digital Outputs - 4V DC outputs 5 ma maximum per output Digital Output Indicating Alarm and Digital Output Indicating Fault - in sourcing configuration 6 5 4 Link Parameter 55 [Logic Status], the source, to Parameter 843 [DigOut Data], the sink Set Parameter 844 [DigOut Bit] to a value of eight, so that parameter 55 [Logic Status] / bit 8 Alarm will control the output Link Parameter 55 [Logic Status], the source, to Parameter 845 [DigOut Data], the sink Set Parameter 846 [DigOut Bit] to a value of seven, so that Parameter 55 [Logic Status] / bit 7 [Faulted] will control the output Digital Output - 4V DC output 5 ma maximum per output. If one () output is configured in sinking, the other output is not available. Digital Output Indicating Alarm Fault - in sinking configuration 6 Link Parameter 55 [Logic Status], the source, to Parameter 843 [DigOut Data], the sink Set Parameter 844 [DigOut Bit] to a value of 8, so that Parameter 55 [Logic Status] / bit 8 Alarm will control the output 4 Alarm
-4 Installation/Wiring Table.L TB - Row B (Bottom) Terminals B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Terminal Signal Description B Analog Input # (-) +/-.V DC or +/-.V DC bipolar, B Analog Input # (+) differential input. () 3 bit + sign, k ohm input impedance B9 Analog Input Shield Optional connection point for analog input shield. () B8 Analog Input # (-) +/-.V DC or +/-.V DC bipolar, B7 Analog Input # (+) differential input. () 3 bit + sign, k ohm input impedance B6 Analog Output # (+) +/-.V DCDC bipolar, differential B5 Analog Output # Return (-) output, bit + sign, k ohm minimum load B4 Analog Output Shield Optional connection point for analog output shield. () B3 Analog Output # (+) +/-.V DC bipolar, differential B Analog Output # Return (-) output, bit + sign, k ohm minimum load B Analog Output Shield Optional connection point for analog shields. Related Parameter 8, 8, 83, 84, 85 86, 88, 89, 8, 8 8, 84, 85, 87, 88 83, 89, 8, 8, 83, () Refer to Analog Input Settings on page -3 for necessary dip switch settings. () Analog shields should connect to common at the signal source, if possible. Shields for signals from ungrounded devices, such as analog tachometers, should connect to an analog shield terminal point at the drive.
Installation/Wiring -5 Table.M TB - Row B (Bottom) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Analog Inputs +/-V DC or +/-.V DC Analog Inputs for Speed Reference and Speed Trim - shield terminated at source (DIP switch selectable) Terminate shields at the analog - Analog Input # source if analog common is + Speed Common available Reference Used for Speed Reference and Speed Trim Analog Outputs +/-V DC or +/-.V DC Used to drive analog meters displaying speed and current Analog Outputs +/-V DC 8 7 (Return) - + Common (Return) Analog Input # Speed Trim Analog Inputs for Speed Reference and Speed Trim - shield terminated at drive 9 8 7 Analog Outputs Indicating Motor Speed and Motor Current 6 5 4 3 - + - + + - Speed Reference -V dc = -% of Motor Base Speed Speed Trim -V dc = -% Trim Output # Motor Speed + - Output # Motor Current Using Analog In as -V speed reference Adjust Parameter 83 [Anlg In Offset] so that the minimum analog signal creates the minimum speed reference (if the minimum input is V DC and the minimum speed reference is zero, enter a value of zero) Adjust the Parameter 8 [Anlg In Scale] so that the maximum analog signal creates the maximum speed reference (if the maximum input is V DC and the maximum speed reference is motor base speed, enter a value of.) Send the data to the Speed Reference parameter Par [Speed Ref ] (the destination) linked to Par 8 [Anlg In Data] (the source) Select Ref as the active speed ref Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel] = Par 53 [Control Options], bit = Unipolar Speed Reference Using Analog In as - to +V speed trim @ %: Adjust Parameter 89 [Anlg In Offset] so that the minimum analog signal creates the minimum speed trim (if the minimum input is V DC and the minimum trim is zero, enter a value of zero) Adjust Parameter 88 [Anlg In Scale] so that the maximum analog signal creates the maximum speed trim (if the maximum input is V DC and the maximum speed trim is %, enter a value of.) Send the data to the speed Reference parameter Par [Speed Ref ] (the destination) linked to Par 86 [Anlg In Data] (the source) Select Ref as the active speed ref and Ref as trim [Speed Ref Sel] = 3 Using Analog Out, -V to +V to meter Motor RPM and direction: Adjust Parameter 8 [Anlg Out Offset] so that minimum speed creates a minimum signal (if the minimum speed is zero and the minimum signal is zero, enter a zero) Adjust Parameter 87 [Anlg Out Scale] so that the maximum speed creates a maximum signal (if the maximum speed is % of motor base speed and the maximum signal is V DC, enter a value of.) Send the data to the Analog Output Par 85 [Anlg Out ] (the destination) linked to Par 3 [Motor Spd Fdbk] (the source) Using Analog Out, -V to +V to meter Motor Current Adjust Parameter 83 [Anlg Out Offset] so that minimum current creates a minimum signal (if the minimum current is zero and the minimum signal is zero, enter a zero) Adjust Parameter 8 [Anlg Out Scale] so that the maximum current creates a maximum signal (if the maximum current is % of motor NP FLA and the maximum signal is V DC, enter a value of.) Send the data to the Analog Output Par 8 [Anlg Out ] (the destination) linked to Par 38 [Output Current] (the source) Scale the Output to the source parameter Par 8 [Anlg Out Scale] = xx (Par [Motor NP FLA]/V Output
-6 Installation/Wiring Table.N TB - Row T (Top) Terminals T 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Related Parameter Terminal Signal Description T3 Encoder Signal A Primary encoder interface. 5 or V, 3, T Encoder Signal Not A DC switch selectable (), Nominal 3, 3, T Encoder Signal B current draw per channel @ V 33, 34, DC 45 ma, @5V DC 3 ma 35, 36, T Encoder Signal Not B Maximum input frequency for 37, 38 T9 Encoder Signal Z Encoders & is 5 khz. T8 Encoder Signal Not Z T7 Shield Connection point for encoder shield. T6 Digital Input # High speed -4V DC sinking 84, 83, T5 Digital Input # Return digital input. 83, 83, 833, 839 T4 Digital Input #3 High speed -4V DC sinking 84, 834, T3 Digital Input #3 Return digital input. 835, 836, 837, 84 T Power Supply +V DC (A) (+) 5/V DC power supply for primary T Power Supply +V DC Return (A) (-) encoder interface and high speed inputs. Rating 3 ma () (3) () Refer to Encoder Input Settings on page -3 for necessary dip switch settings. () This power supply supports only the primary encoder interface and digital inputs. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the drive. (3) To enable 5V supply, set Jumper J6 (located in the Main Control Board) to positions T and T3. Default V supply is set to T and T.
Installation/Wiring -7 Table.O TB - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Examples Required Parameter Changes Primary Encoder Interface - Supports V DC differential encoders with internal power supply. Primary Encoder - using internal power supply 5V DC differential encoders may require external power supply and special jumper settings. Refer to Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings on page -3 for external power supply and jumper settings. 7 8 9 3 Set the value of Parameter [Motor Fdbk Sel] to a value of - Encoder, so the drive will use this encoder as the primary motor speed feedback device. Set the value of Parameter 3 [Encoder PPR] to match the encoder s resolution. For 5V DC differential encoders with internal power supply, set Jumper J6 to positions T and T3. Power Common (Return) Z Z B Case Ground B A A Primary Encoder - using external power supply Shield 7 8 9 3 Power Common (Return) Power Common (Return) Z Z B Case Ground B A A
-8 Installation/Wiring Table.O TB - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Examples 3-Wire Control Required Parameter Changes High Speed Inputs or 4V DC Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 3 Wire Control - using the internal power supply Set the value of Parameter 839 [DigIn Sel] to a value of - Normal Stop Set the value of Parameter 84 [DigIn3 Sel] to a value of - Start Set Parameter 53 [Control Options] / bit 8 3 4 5 6 7 3WireControl Start Stop Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for 3 Wire Control - using an external power supply EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY POWER COMMON (RETURN) Note: +V and +4V are also available from TB Top &. 3 4 5 6 7 Start Stop
Installation/Wiring -9 Table.O TB - Row T (Top) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Examples -Wire Control Required Parameter Changes High Speed Inputs or 4V DC Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for Wire Control - using the internal power supply Set the value of Parameter 839 [DigIn Sel] to a value of 3 - Run Set Parameter 53 [Control Options], bit 9 W Coast Stop to make the drive coast stop when input goes low 3 5 6 7 Reset Parameter 53 [Control Options], bit 9 W Coast Stop to make the drive ramp stop when input goes low Reset Parameter 53 [Control Options], bit 8 3Wire Control for two wire control Run-Stop Sourcing High Speed Inputs, Used for Wire Control - using an external power supply or 4V DC Power Supply Common Power (Return) Note: +V and +4V are also available from TB Top &. 3 5 6 Run-Stop
-3 Installation/Wiring Table.P TB - Row B (Bottom) Terminals B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Related Parameter Terminal Signal Description B3 Encoder Signal A Secondary encoder interface., 4, B Encoder Signal Not A 5 or V DC switch 4, 4, B Encoder Signal B selectable (), Nominal 43, 44, current draw per channel @ 45, 46, B Encoder Signal Not B V DC 45 ma, @5V DC 3 47, 48 B9 Encoder Signal Z ma B8 Encoder Signal Not Z Maximum input frequency for Encoders & is 5 khz. B7 Shield Connection point for encoder shield. B6 Unused B5 Relay Output Relay contact output. 84, 84, B4 Relay Output Return Rating: 5A @ 4V DC 84 Resistive, A 4V DC Inductive B3 Unused B Power Supply +V DC (B) (+) 5/V DC power supply for B Power Supply +V DC Return (B) (-) secondary encoder interface. Rating 3 ma () (3) () Refer to Encoder Input Settings on page -3 for necessary dip switch settings. () This power supply supports only the secondary encoder interface. Do not use it to power circuits outside of the drive (3) To enable 5V supply, set Jumper J6 (located in the Main Control Board) to positions T and T3. Default V supply is set to T and T.
Installation/Wiring -3 Table.Q TB - Row B (Bottom) Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Secondary Encoder Interface Secondary Encoder - using internal power supply - Supports V DC differential encoders with internal power supply. 5V DC differential encoders require external power supply and special jumper settings. Refer to Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings on page -3 for external power supply and jumper settings. 7 8 9 3 Set the value of Parameter [Motor Fdbk Sel] to a value of - Encoder, so the drive will use this encoder as the primary motor speed feedback device Set the value of Parameter 4 [Encoder PPR] to match the encoder s resolution For 5V DC differential encoders with internal power supply, set Jumper J6 to positions T and T3. Power Common (Return) Z Z B Case Ground B A A Secondary Encoder - using external power supply Shield 7 8 9 3 Power Common (Return) Power Common (Return) Z Z B Case Ground B A A Auxiliary Output - Relay contact output Auxiliary Output, Used to Indicate Running EXTERNAL 4V DC COMMON (RETURN) EXTERNAL 4V POWER SUPPLY Link Parameter 55 [Logic Status], the source, to Parameter 84 [Relay Out Data], the sink Set Parameter 84 [Relay Out Bit] to a value of one, so that Parameter 55 [Logic Status] / bit Running will control the output. 4 5 Running
-3 Installation/Wiring Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings Figure 8 Main Control Board Dip Switches SW SIDE VIEW UP = OPEN = OFF FRONT - TOP VIEW DOWN = CLOSED= ON Analog Input # +/-.V DC +/-.V DC Scaling SW- Open Closed Analog Input # +/-.V DC +/-.V DC Scaling SW- Open Closed SW J6 Pin 3 Pin Pin SIDE VIEW UP = OPEN = OFF DOWN = CLOSED= ON FRONT - TOP VIEW OPEN 3 4 5 6 7 8 Encoder Power Supply Voltage Jumper Position 5V DC -3 V DC - Primary Encoder SW- SW-4 SW-6 5V DC Operation Closed Closed Closed V DC Operation Open Open Open Secondary Encoder SW- SW-3 SW-5 5V DC Operation Closed Closed Closed V DC Operation Open Open Open Analog Input Settings Switch SW- configures the scaling of Analog Input #. Switch SW- configures the scaling of Analog Input #. Open the switch for +/-.V DC operation. Close the switch for +/-.V DC operation. Encoder Input Settings Dip switch SW on the main control board configures the encoder inputs for 5V DC or V DC operation. Switches SW-, 4, and 6 are for the primary encoder. Set these switches to match the encoder output specifications. Open these switches for V DC operation, close them for 5V DC operation.
Installation/Wiring -33 Switches SW-, 3, and 5 are for the secondary encoder. Set these switches to match the encoder output specifications. Open these switches for V DC operation, close them for 5V DC operation. Connecting SynchLink SynchLink provides high-speed synchronization and communication between multiple PowerFlex 7S drives (or other products with SynchLink capability). Refer to The SynchLink Design Guide, publication # 756-TD8 when planning and connecting the SynchLink network. Class LED Product! ATTENTION: Hazard of permanent eye damage exists when using optical transmission equipment. This product emits intense light and invisible radiation. Do not look into module ports or fiber optic cable connectors. Figure. SynchLink Connections J8 (Transmit) J9 (Receive) Connect cables to J9 (receive) and J8 (transmit) connectors on the bottom of the Main Control Board. Push the plug into the socket until it produces an audible click. Important: Do not overtighten tie-wraps.
-34 Installation/Wiring Table.S SynchLink Cables and Accessories Description Cat. No. x 5 cm Fiber Optic Link 43-CF x M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF x 3 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF3 x 5 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF5 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF 5 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF5 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF 5 M Fiber Optic Link 43-CF5 5 M Fiber Optic Bulk 43-CFBLK SynchLink Fiber-Hub, input, Base 75-SLBA SynchLink Fiber-Hub, 4 output, Star Splitter 75-SL4SP SynchLink Bypass Switch 75-SLBP/A Table.T Fiber Optic Cable Assembly Specification Connecting Cables Maximum Cable Length Minimum Cable Length Minimum inside bend radius Operating Wavelength Data Rate Maximum Node Count /3 micron HCS (Hard Clad Silica) Versalink V-System Lucent Technologies, Specialty Fibers Technology Division 3 meters with no more than one splice or one adapter meter 5.4mm ( in.) Any bends with a shorter inside radius can permanently damage the fiber optic cable. Signal attention increases with decreased inside bend radius. 65 nm (Red) 5 Mbps - Daisy Chain 56 - Star Configuration
Installation/Wiring -35 CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities. PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manual. Declarations of Conformity are available online at: http://www.ab.com/certification/ce/docs. Low Voltage Directive (73/3/EEC) EN578 Electronic equipment for use in power installations. EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) EN68-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods. General Notes If the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive, the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than.5 mm (.5 in.) and top openings less than. mm (.4 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV Directive. The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents. Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended. PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in addition to the essential requirements for CE compliance listed below, if necessary. Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance. PowerFlex drives can generate conducted low frequency disturbances (harmonic emissions) on the AC supply system. More information regarding harmonic emissions can be found in the PowerFlex Reference Manual Vol..
-36 Installation/Wiring Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions -6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN68-3. 3. Standard PowerFlex 7S CE compatible Drive. 4. Review important precautions/attentions statements throughout this document before installing drive. 5. Grounding as described on page -4. 6. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shield cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or equivalent attenuation. 7. All shielded cables should terminate with proper shielded connector. 8. Conditions in Table.U on page 36 Table.U PowerFlex 7S EN68-3 EMC Compatibility () Second Environment First Environment Restricted Distribution Restrict Motor Cable to 3 m (98 ft.) Restrict Motor Cable to 5 m (49 ft.) Any Drive and Option Any Drive and Option External Filter Required - 6 Frame(s) () External filters for First Environment installations and increasing motor cable lengths in Second Environment installations are available. Roxburgh models KMFA (RF3 for UL installations) and MIF or Schaffner FN358 and FN58 models are recommended. Refer to http://www.deltron-emcon.com and http://www.mtecorp.com (USA) or http://www.schaffner.com, respectively.
Chapter Start-Up This chapter describes how you start-up the PowerFlex 7S Drive. Refer to Appendix D for a brief description of the HIM (Human Interface Module). For Information on See Page... Prepare for Drive Start-Up - Assisted Start-Up -3! ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove Power including user supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive. Correct the malfunction before continuing. Prepare for Drive Start-Up Before Applying Power to the Drive Important: If you have a DriveLogix application, you must first connect the battery before starting this section.. Confirm that motor wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. Confirm Frame 5 transformer connections (refer to page -9).. Confirm that encoder wires are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. 3. Confirm that all control inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. 4. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive. 5. Verify that control power voltage is correct. The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed. If an operator interface is not available, remote devices should be used to start-up the drive.
- Start-Up Applying Power to the Drive 6. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. Examine the Power (PWR) LED. Steady Green Power has been applied to the drive and no faults are present. 7. Examine the Status (STS) LED. Verify that it is flashing green. If it is not in this state, check the following possible causes and take the necessary corrective action. Flashing Yellow A run inhibit exists in the drive. Refer to Table 4.B on page 4-3 to correct the problem. Flashing Red A fault has occurred. Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4-4 for drive faults and actions to correct the problem. If any digital input is configured to Stop CF (CF = Clear Fault) or Enable, verify that signals are present or the drive will not start. Refer to Table 4.B on page 4-3 for a list of potential digital input conflicts. If a fault code appears, refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4-4. If the STS LED is not flashing green at this point, refer to the Status Indicators descriptions in Table 4.A on page 4-. 8. Proceed to Assisted Start-Up on page -3.
Start-Up -3 Assisted Start-Up This routine prompts you for information needed to start-up a drive for most applications, such as line and motor data, commonly adjusted parameters and I/O. Important: This start-up routine requires a HIM. If the drive is configured for -wire control, the HIM installed on the drive will also act as a -wire device. In -wire mode, the drive will start when the HIM Start is pressed and stop when the HIM Start is released. The recommended mode of use for the Start-Up Routine is 3-wire control, Parameter 53 [Control Options], Bit 8 set to. The assisted start-up routine asks simple yes or no questions and prompts you to input required information. Access Assisted Start-Up by selecting Start-Up from the Main Menu. Step Key(s) Example LCD Displays. To exit the User Display screen, Press Esc.. In the Main Menu, use the Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up. Press Enter. TIP: Throughout the Start-Up Routine many screens have more selection than shown. Use the arrow keys to scroll through all the menu options.. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the Start-Up. Esc F F Stopped... Stopped Auto RPM DC Bus V Output C. Main Menu: Diagnostics. Parameter Device Select Auto RPM PowerFlex 7S The Start-Up routine sets up Diagnostics the drive. for basic operation. Push Enter. Start-Up Important: If using a HIM the following functions are not available. Alt-Man Alt-Lang Alt-SMART
-4 Start-Up PowerFlex 7S Start-Up Esc Table.A Start-Up Menu Down level or Select Back level or selection Scroll all choices Motor Control Motor Data Feedback Configuration Power Circuit Test Direction Test Select Motor Control Mode Select DB Resistor Enter Motor NP Data Power & Units FLA Volts Hertz RPM Poles Setup / Select Encoder Resolver Hi-Res Encoder Linear Sensor Diagnostic Check for Drive Power Circuit Verify Direction Motor Tests Inertia Measure Speed Limits Speed Control Start / Stop / I/O Done / Exit Field Oriented Control: Measure Stator Resistance, Leakage Inductance, Magnetizing Inductance PMag Motor: Encoder Offset, Stator Resistance, Stator Inductance, Back EMF Measure System Inertia Select Direction Control Set FWD, REV and ABS Speed Limits Select Sources For All Speed References Configure: Digital Inputs, Digital Outputs, Analog Inputs, Analog Outputs Note: In -wire mode, the drive will start when the HIM Start is pressed and stop when the HIM Start is released. The recommended mode of use for the Start-Up Routine is 3-wire control, Parameter 53 [Control Options], Bit 8 set to.
Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 7S parameters. The parameters can be programmed (viewed/edited) using a HIM (Human Interface Module). As an alternative, programming can also be performed using DriveTools software and a personal computer. For information on... See page About Parameters 3- How Parameters are Organized 3-3 Parameter Data in Linear List Format 3-6 Parameter Cross Reference By Name 3-96 About Parameters To configure a Drive module to operate in a specific way, drive parameters may have to be set. Three types of parameters exist: ENUM Parameters These parameters allow a selection from or more items Bit Parameters These parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions. If the bit is, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the bit is, the feature is on or the condition is true. Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numeric value (i.e.. Volts). The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual.
3- Programming and Parameters ➊ ➋ ➌ Linkable Read-Write Data Type No. Name Description Values 5 Logic Command The controller-drive interface (as defined by the Controller Communication Format) sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms. Bits that are changed here are reflected in Parameter 5 [Applied LogicCmd]. Note: Bits 4 through 9 in Logic Command are NOT recalled from Control EEprom. They will be cleared upon drive power up or following an EEprom recall operation. Options PositionEnbl ProcsTrim En Frict Comp Inertia Comp Sys Inert En Mtr Inert En PM Offset En Dir Sel En Pwr Diag En MC Atune En Time Axis En TachLoss Rst Spd S Crv En SpdRamp Dsbl Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Spd/Torq ModeSel Selects the source for the drive torque reference. 4 Motor NP RPM Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM. = True = False Options: 3 Speed Reg Zero Torque 4 Max Spd/Torq Speed Reg 5 Sum Spd/Torq Torque Ref 6 AbsMn Spd/Tq Min Spd/Torq RPM Calculated /3 Comm Scale: Parameter 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 6-bit No. ➊ Name Description No. - Parameter Number Parameter value cannot be changed until the drive is stopped. ➋ ➌ Name - Parameter name as it appears in DriveExecutive software. Description - Brief description of parameter function. Values - Define the various operating characteristics of the parameter. There are 3 types of Values. ENUM Lists the value assigned at the factory. Options: Displays the selections available. Bit Lists the value assigned at the factory. Options: Displays the selections available. Numeric Default Lists the value assigned at the factory. Min. Displays lowest possible setting. Max. Displays highest possible setting. Type Indicates if parameter is linkable, read-write, read-only, and data type (i.e. integer, floating point, boolean). Comm Value sent from Controller or Comm Device = Drive Parameter Value x Comm Scale Scale:
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Position Control Programming and Parameters 3-3 How Parameters are Organized DriveExecutive programming software displays parameters in Linear List or File Group Parameter format. Viewing the parameters in File Group Parameter format simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions. There are twelve files. Each file is divided into multiple groups of parameters. SynchLink Utility Inputs & Outputs Communication Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Metering 3 7 76 3 37 38 97 3 39 547 36 3 33 345 84 68 8 87 86 8 98 99 Motor Spd Fdbk Scaled Spd Fdbk Mtr Posit Fdbk Output Freq Output Voltage Output Current Output Curr Disp Output Power % Motor Flux Estimated Torque DC Bus Voltage MotorFluxCurr FB Heatsink Temp Drive OL JnctTmp Local I/O Status StdDig I/O State Anlg In Volts Anlg In Volts Anlg Out Volts Anlg Out Volts Elapsed Run Time Elapsed MWHrs Control Status 5 Logic State Mach 55 Logic Status 57 Logic Ctrl State 56 Run Inhibit Stat 66 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 67 Motor Ctrl Ackn 555 MC Status 346 Drive OL Status 59 DigIn ConfigStat 65 Test Status 37 SL System Time Motor Ctrl Data 533 Stator Frequency 534 Iqs Command 434 Mtr Vds Base 435 Mtr Vqs Base 44 Vds Fdbk Filt 44 Vqs Fdbk Filt 54 Vqs Command 54 Vds Command 535 Iqs Command 537 Ids Command 539 Iqs Feedback 54 Ids Feedback Drive Data 4 4 44 69 34 35 57 56 Rated Amps Rated Volts Dead Time DPI Baud Rate VPL Firmware Rev VPL Build Number MC Firmware Rev MC Build Number SynchLink Rev SL System Rev
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-4 Programming and Parameters Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Motor Data 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 336 Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA Motor NP Hertz Motor NP RPM Motor NP Power Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Poles Motor Inertia Total Inertia Service Factor Drive Config 485 Motor Ctrl Mode 4 PWM Frequency 43 Voltage Class 45 Dead Time Comp 49 Line Undervolts 4 PreChrg TimeOut 4 PreChrg Control 5 FOC Mode Config 5 FOC Mode Config 54 Test Mode Config 5 PMag Mode Cnfg 55 PM TestWait Time 56 PM Test Idc Ramp 57 PM Test FreqRamp 58 PM Test Freq Ref 59 PM Test I Ref 44 Flux Ratio Ref Tuning 43 453 454 45 46 443 47 444 5 5 437 438 439 44 469 473 449 45 45 474 475 447 448 446 445 476 47 43 43 433 477 Iqs Rate Limit Iu Offset Iw Offset Flux Rate Limit Flux Satur Coef Flux Reg P Gain Flux Reg P Gain Flux Reg I Gain Bus Util Limit Torque En Dly Vqs Max Vds Max Vqs Min Vds Min StatorInduc Gain Freq Reg FF Gain Freq Reg I Gain Freq Reg P Gain Freq Track Filt Freq Reg We BW Freq Reg Wr BW Slip Reg P Gain Slip Reg I Gain Slip Gain Min Slip Gain Max Slip Gain Comp PreCharge Delay Test Current Ref Test Freq Ref Test Freq Rate Est Theta Delay PM Motor 47 5 5 5 53 Autotune Results 4 Iqs Integ Freq 4 Iqs Reg P Gain 49 Ids Integ Freq 43 Ids Reg P Gain 486 Rated Slip Freq 487 Motor NTC Coef 488 Flux Current 49 StatorInductance 49 StatorResistance 49 Leak Inductance 5 Rotor Resistance 53 Current Reg BW 54 PM AbsEncd Offst PM Mtr CEMF Comp PM Q Inductance PM D Inductance PM Stator Resist PM Mtr CEMF Coef
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3-5 Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Configuration 5 Logic Command 5 Applied LogicCmd 53 Control Options 58 Drive Logic Rslt 6 Zero Speed Lim 335 Abs OverSpd Lim Overload 337 338 339 34 343 344 OL OpnLp CurrLim OL ClsLp CurrLim Drive OL JnctTmp Drive OL Status Drive OL TP Sel Drive OL TP Data Stop/Brake Modes 44 Brake/Bus Cnfg 45 BusReg/Brake Ref 46 Brake PulseWatts 47 Brake Watts 54 Stop Dwell Time Power Loss 46 47 48 Power Loss Mode Power Loss Time Power Loss Level
Speed Control Torque Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-6 Programming and Parameters Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Reference 6 3 4 5 7 8 4 3 3 4 3 33 4 34 43 37 35 36 44 38 46 47 45 6 6 63 56 55 57 58 59 6 4 4 4 43 44 45 Speed Ref Sel Speed Ref Spd Ref Divide Speed Ref Spd Ref Multi Speed Ref 4 Speed Ref 5 Speed Ref DPI Jog Speed Jog Speed Selected Spd Ref Rev Speed Limit Fwd Speed Limit Limited Spd Ref Accel Time Decel Time Ramped Spd Ref S Curve Time S Curve Spd Ref Spd Ref Bypass SpdRef Filt Gain SpdRef Filt BW Filtered Spd Ref Speed Ref Scale Scaled Spd Ref Speed Trim Spd Trim SpdRef Delayed Spd Ref Virt Encoder EPR Virt Encdr Posit Virt Encdr Dlyed Inertia SpeedRef Speed Comp InertiaAccelGain InertiaDecelGain Inertia Torq Add DeltaSpeedScale FricComp Spd Ref FricComp Setup FricComp Stick FricComp Slip FricComp Rated FricComp TorqAdd Regulator 47 5 6 3 4 9 3 3 3 3 93 94 7 89 85 84 8 8 8 87 8 9 9 97 9 9 3 86 95 96 3 Spd Trim SpdRef Speed Trim STrim Filt Gain SpdTrim Filt BW Speed Trim 3 SpdTrim 3 Scale Atune Spd Ref Rev Speed Limit Fwd Speed Limit Motor Speed Ref Motor Spd Fdbk SRegFB Filt Gain SReg FB Filt BW Filtered SpdFdbk Speed Error Spd Err Filt BW Servo Lock Gain SpdReg AntiBckup Speed Reg Ctrl Spd Reg P Gain Spd Reg I Gain SReg Torq Preset Motor Inertia Total Inertia Spd Reg BW Act Spd Reg BW Spd Reg Damping SpdReg P Gain Mx SpdReg Integ Out Spd Reg Pos Lim Spd Reg Neg Lim Spd Reg Droop SRegOut FiltGain SReg Out Filt BW Spd Reg PI Out Setpoint Monitor 7 Set Speed Lim 7 Setpt Data 73 Setpt TripPoint 74 Setpt Limit 75 Setpt Data 76 Setpt TripPoint 77 Setpt Limit
Dynamic Control Speed Control Torque Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3-7 Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Torque 3 59 45 3 4 5 6 9 7 8 36 4 7 8 3 5 6 3 4 33 Spd/Torq ModeSel Spd Reg PI Out Inertia Torq Add FricComp TorqAdd Torque Ref Torq Ref Div Torque Ref Torq Ref Mult Torque Trim Torque Step Atune Torq Ref Notch Filt Mode Notch Filt Freq DC Bus Voltage Rated Volts Mtring Power Lim Regen Power Lim Motor Spd Fdbk Torque Pos Limit Torque Neg Limit Torq PosLim Actl Torq NegLim Actl Motor Torque Ref Current 39 36 36 35 35 343 356 35 33 345 % Motor Flux Min Flux Flx LpassFilt BW Iq Actual Ref Iq Ref Trim OL OpnLp CurrLim Mtr Current Lim Is Actual Lim Heatsink Temp Drive OL JnctTmp
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-8 Programming and Parameters Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Process Config 83 PI Command 8 PI Reference 8 PI Feedback Regulator 84 86 85 87 88 89 9 9 9 8 PI Lpass Filt BW PI Prop Gain PI Preload PI Integ Time PI Integ HLim PI Integ LLim PI Integ Output PI High Limit PI Lower Limit PI Output Limit Generator Time Axis Rate Time Axis Output 4 LimGen Y axis Mx 5 LimGen Y axis Mn 6 LimGen X axis In 7 Limit Gen Hi Out 8 Limit Gen Lo Out
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3-9 Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Position Config 74 Position Control 74 Position Status 74 Posit Ref Sel Interp / Diret 743 Aux Posit Ref 745 PositRef EGR Mul 746 PositRef EGR Div 744 PositRef EGR Out 757 Abs Posit Offset 753 Posit Offset 754 Posit Offset 755 Posit Offset Spd 756 X Offst SpdFilt 747 Position Cmmd 76 Mtr Posit Fdbk 764 Posit Load Fdbk 766 Posit FB EGR Mul 767 Posit FB EGR Div 763 Act Motor Posit 765 Posit Actl Load 769 Position Error 768 PositReg P Gain 77 PositReg Integ 77 XReg Integ LoLim 773 XReg Integ HiLim 774 XReg Integ Out 77 PositReg Droop 775 XReg Spd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim 38 Posit Spd Output Point to Point 758 Pt-Pt Posit Ref 745 PositRef EGR Mul 746 PositRef EGR Div 744 PositRef EGR Out 753 Posit Offset 754 Posit Offset 755 Posit Offset Spd 756 X Offst SpdFilt 747 Position Cmmd 76 Mtr Posit Fdbk 763 Act Motor Posit 769 Position Error 768 PositReg P Gain 76 Pt-Pt Filt BW 759 Pt-Pt Accel Time 76 Pt-Pt Decel Time 775 XReg Spd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim 38 Posit Spd Output Posit Detection 784 Posit Detct In 785 Posit Detct In 78 PositDetct Stpt 78 PositDetct Stpt 769 Position Error 78 In Posit BW 783 In Posit Dwell Sync Generator 786 Xsync Status 787 Xsync Gen Period 37 SL System Time 788 Xsync In 789 Xsync Out 79 Xsync In 79 Xsync Out 79 Xsync Out Dly 793 Xsync In 3 794 Xsync Out 3 Posit Indexer 796 Posit Index Ctrl 797 Posit Index Step 798 PositIndexPreset 799 PositIndexOutput
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3- Programming and Parameters Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Feedback Config 7 Scaled Spd Fdbk 73 Spd Fdbk Scale Motor Fdbk Sel 3 Virtual Edge/Rev 7 Spd Obs Trq Gain Spd Observer BW Load Estimate 3 Motor Spd Fdbk Encoder Port 33 Encdr Config 34 Encdr Error 3 Encoder PPR 3 Encdr Spd Fdbk 3 Encdr Position 36 Port Regis Cnfg 37 Port Regis Ctrl 38 Port Regis Stat 35 Port Regis Ltch Encoder Port 43 Encdr Config 44 Encdr Error 4 Encoder PPR 4 Encdr Spd Fdbk 4 Encdr Position 46 Port Regis Cnfg 47 Port Regis Ctrl 48 Port Regis Stat 45 Port Regis Ltch Feedback Opt 49 Fdbk Option ID 5 FB Opt Posit Calculated Fdbk 548 Est Speed Fdbk 74 Motor Spd Est 6 Virtual Edge/Rev 75 MtrSpd Est Posit 76 MtrSpd Simulated 7 MtrSpd Sim Posit
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3- Inputs & Outputs Communication SynchLink Utility Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Fault/Alm Config 379 Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg 374 Motor Stall Cnfg 373 Motor Stall Time 38 MC Cmd Lim Cnfg 38 PreChrg Err Cnfg 393 BusUndervoltCnfg 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 376 Inv OL Pend Cnfg 377 Inv OL Trip Cnfg 37 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg 37 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 375 Inv OT Pend Cnfg 369 Brake OL Cnfg 365 Encdr Loss Cnfg 366 Encdr Loss Cnfg 39 DPI CommLoss Cfg 39 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 383 SL CommLoss Data 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg 39 SL MultErr Cnfg 385 Lgx CommLossData 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg Peak Detection PeakDtct Ctrl In Peak Ctrl Status PeakDtct In Int 3 PkDtct In 4 PeakDtct Preset 5 PeakDetect Out 6 PeakDtct In Int 7 PkDtct In 8 PeakDtct Preset 9 PeakDetect Out Diagnostics 84 34 3 3 36 37 33 34 36 8 9 3 3 34 3 33 35 55 55 55 553 554 Local I/O Status Limit Status Exception Event Exception Event Alarm Status Alarm Status Fault Status Fault Status SynchLink Status SL Error History SL Error Status SL CRC Err Accum SL CRC Error SL BOF Err Accum SL BOF Error SL CRC Err Limit SL BOF Err Limit MC Diag Status MC Diag Done MC Diag Error MC Diag Error MC Diag Error 3 Peak Detection 85 ParamAccessLevel 396 User Data Int 397 User Data Int 398 User Data Int 3 399 User Data Int 4 3 User Data Int 5 3 User Data Int 6 35 UserData 36 UserData 37 UserData 3 38 UserData 4 39 UserData 5 3 UserData 6 Test Points 6 6 63 64 544 545 546 4 43 347 348 5 5 5 98 99 8 9 3 3 363 364 48 49 77 78 79 39 33 93 94 777 778 779 6 7 Logic TP Sel Logic TP Data Stop Oper TP Sel StopOper TP Data MC TP Select MC TP Value MC TP Bit Power EE TP Sel Power EE TP Data Drive OL TP Sel Drive OL TP Data Spd Ref TP Sel Spd Ref TP RPM Spd Ref TP Data Spd Gain TP Sel Spd Gain TP Data Spd Reg TP Sel Spd Reg TP Data Torq Ref TP Sel Torq Ref TP Data Curr Ref TP Sel Curr Ref TP Data Brake TP Sel Brake TP Data Spd Fdbk TP Sel Spd Fdbk TP RPM Spd Fdbk TP Data Fault TP Sel Fault TP Data PI TP Sel PI TP Data Posit TP Select PositTP Data Int PositTP Data SL Comm TP Sel SL Comm TP Data Trending 5 5 5 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 6 64 65 66 67 68 69 7 7 8 8 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 9 9 Trend Control Trend Status Trend State Trend Rate Trend TrigA Int Trend TrigA Trend TrigB Int Trend TrigB Trend Trig Data Trend Trig Bit Trend PreSamples Trend In Int Trend In Trend In Int Trend In Trend In3 Int Trend In3 Trend In4 Int Trend In4 Trend Marker Int Trend Mark TrendBuffPointer Trend Out Int Trend Out Trend Out Int Trend Out Trend Out3 Int Trend Out3 Trend Out4 Int Trend Out4 User Function 37 Switch Control 37 SW Int NO 37 SW Int NC 373 SW Int Output 374 SW NO 375 SW NC 376 SW Output
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3- Programming and Parameters SynchLink Utility Inputs & Outputs Communication Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Analog Inputs 8 Anlg In Data 8 Anlg In Scale 83 Anlg In Offset 84 AI Filt Gain 85 Anlg In Filt BW 86 Anlg In Data 88 Anlg In Scale 89 Anlg In Offset 8 AI Filt Gain 8 Anlg In Filt BW Analog Outputs 84 AnlgOut 85 Anlg Out 87 Anlg Out Scale 8 Anlg Out Offset 88 Anlg Out Zero 89 AnlgOut 8 Anlg Out 8 Anlg Out Scale 83 Anlg Out Offset 83 Anlg Out Zero Digital Inputs 85 En In Debounce 838 DigIn Sel 89 DigIn Debounce 86 DigIn Data 87 DigIn Bit 88 DigIn User Data 839 DigIn Sel 833 DigIn Debounce 83 DigIn Data 83 DigIn Bit 83 DigIn User Data 84 DigIn3 Sel 837 DigIn3 Debounce 834 DigIn3 Data 835 DigIn3 Bit 836 DigIn3 User Data Digital Outputs () Relay Out Data 843 Relay Out Bit 844 Dig Out Data 845 Dig Out Bit 846 Dig Out Data Dig Out Bit ()
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3-3 Communication SynchLink Utility Inputs & Outputs Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Commands 69 664 DPI Ref Select Lgx Comm Format Masks & Owners 693 Logic Mask 694 Start Mask 695 Jog Mask 696 Direction Mask 697 Fault Clr Mask 7 Stop Owner 7 Start Owner 7 Jog Owner 73 Direction Owner 74 Fault Clr Owner DPI Data Links 77 Data In A Int 78 Data In A 79 Data In A Int 7 Data In A 7 Data In B Int 7 Data In B 73 Data In B Int 74 Data In B 75 Data In C Int 76 Data In C 77 Data In C Int 78 Data In C 79 Data In D Int 7 Data In D 7 Data In D Int 7 Data In D 73 DLink OutDataTyp 74 Data Out A Int 75 Data Out A 76 Data Out A Int 77 Data Out A 78 Data Out B Int 79 Data Out B 73 Data Out B Int 73 Data Out B 73 Data Out C Int 733 Data Out C 734 Data Out C Int 735 Data Out C 736 Data Out D Int 737 Data Out D 738 Data Out D Int 739 Data Out D Logix Inputs 6 In 6 In 6 In 63 In 64 In 65 In 66 In3 67 In3 68 In4 69 In4 6 In5 6 In5 6 In6 63 In6 64 In7 65 In7 66 In8 67 In8 68 In9 69 In9 6 In 6 In 6 In 63 In 64 In 65 In 66 In3 67 In3 68 In4 69 In4 63 In5 63 In5 Logix Outputs 63 Out 633 Out 634 Out 635 Out 636 Out 637 Out 638 Out3 639 Out3 64 Out4 64 Out4 64 Out5 643 Out5 644 Out6 645 Out6 646 Out7 647 Out7 648 Out8 649 Out8 65 Out9 65 Out9 65 Out 653 Out 654 Out 655 Out 656 Out 657 Out 658 Out3 659 Out3 66 Out4 66 Out4 66 Out5 663 Out5
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-4 Programming and Parameters SynchLink Utility Inputs & Outputs Communication Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control SynchLink Config SL Node Cnfg SL Rx Comm Frmt SL Rx DirectSel SL Rx DirectSel 3 SL Rx DirectSel 4 SL Rx DirectSel3 SL Tx Comm Frmt SL Tx DirectSel SL Tx DirectSel 3 SL Tx DirectSel 4 SL Tx DirectSel3 Multiplier 3 3 3 33 34 35 36 SL Mult A In SL Mult B In SL Mult Base SL Mult Out SL Mult State to Int In to Int Out Event Data 4 49 4 4 SL Rcv Events SL Clr Events SL Rx P Regis SL Rx P Regis Direct Data 54 55 56 57 58 59 6 6 4 4 4 43 44 45 46 47 48 SL Dir Int Rx SL Dir Rx SL Dir Int Rx SL Dir Rx SL Dir Int Rx SL Dir Rx SL Dir Int Rx3 SL Dir Rx3 Tx Dir Data Type SL Dir Int Tx SL Dir Tx SL Dir Int Tx SL Dir Tx SL Dir Int Tx SL Dir Tx SL Dir Int Tx3 SL Dir Tx3
Torque Control Speed Control Process Control Position Control Speed/Posit Fdbk Programming and Parameters 3-5 SynchLink Utility Inputs & Outputs Communication Monitor Motor Control Dynamic Control Buffered Data In 73 SL Buf Int Rx 74 SL Buf Rx 75 SL Buf Int Rx 76 SL Buf Rx 77 SL Buf Int Rx 78 SL Buf Rx 79 SL Buf Int Rx3 8 SL Buf Rx3 8 SL Buf Int Rx4 8 SL Buf Rx4 83 SL Buf Int Rx5 84 SL Buf Rx5 85 SL Buf Int Rx6 86 SL Buf Rx6 87 SL Buf Int Rx7 88 SL Buf Rx7 89 SL Buf Int Rx8 9 SL Buf Rx8 9 SL Buf Int Rx9 9 SL Buf Rx9 93 SL Buf Int Rx 94 SL Buf Rx 95 SL Buf Int Rx 96 SL Buf Rx 97 SL Buf Int Rx 98 SL Buf Rx 99 SL Buf Int Rx3 SL Buf Rx3 SL Buf Int Rx4 SL Buf Rx4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 3 3 SL Buf Int Rx5 SL Buf Rx5 SL Buf Int Rx6 SL Buf Rx6 SL Buf Int Rx7 SL Buf Rx7 SL Buf Int Rx8 SL Buf Rx8 SL Buf Int Rx9 SL Buf Rx9 SL Buf Int Rx SL Buf Rx SL Buf Int Rx SL Buf Rx SL Buf Int Rx SL Buf Rx SL Buf Int Rx3 SL Buf Rx3 SL Buf Int Rx4 SL Buf Rx4 SL Buf Int Rx5 SL Buf Rx5 SL Buf Int Rx6 SL Buf Rx6 SL Buf Int Rx7 SL Buf Rx7 SL Buf Int Rx8 SL Buf Rx8 SL Buf Int Rx9 SL Buf Rx9 Buffered Data Out 6 Tx Buf Data Type 6 SL Buf Int Tx 6 SL Buf Tx 63 SL Buf Int Tx 64 SL Buf Tx 65 SL Buf Int Tx 66 SL Buf Tx 67 SL Buf Int Tx3 68 SL Buf Tx3 69 SL Buf Int Tx4 7 SL Buf Tx4 7 SL Buf Int Tx5 7 SL Buf Tx5 73 SL Buf Int Tx6 74 SL Buf Tx6 75 SL Buf Int Tx7 76 SL Buf Tx7 77 SL Buf Int Tx8 78 SL Buf Tx8 79 SL Buf Int Tx9 8 SL Buf Tx9 8 SL Buf Int Tx 8 SL Buf Tx 83 SL Buf Int Tx 84 SL Buf Tx 85 SL Buf Int Tx 86 SL Buf Tx 87 SL Buf Int Tx3 88 SL Buf Tx3 89 SL Buf Int Tx4 9 9 9 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SL Buf Tx4 SL Buf Int Tx5 SL Buf Tx5 SL Buf Int Tx6 SL Buf Tx6 SL Buf Int Tx7 SL Buf Tx7 SL Buf Int Tx8 SL Buf Tx8 SL Buf Int Tx9 SL Buf Tx9 SL Buf Int Tx SL Buf Tx SL Buf Int Tx SL Buf Tx SL Buf Int Tx SL Buf Tx SL Buf Int Tx3 SL Buf Tx3 SL Buf Int Tx4 SL Buf Tx4 SL Buf Int Tx5 SL Buf Tx5 SL Buf Int Tx6 SL Buf Tx6 SL Buf Int Tx7 SL Buf Tx7 SL Buf Int Tx8 SL Buf Tx8 SL Buf Int Tx9 SL Buf Tx9
3-6 Programming and Parameters Parameter Data in Linear List Format Name No. Description Motor NP Volts Set to the motor nameplate rated volts. Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps. Range limited by three-second inverter rating. 3 Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency. 4 Motor NP RPM Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM. 5 Motor NP Power Set to the motor nameplate rated power. 6 Mtr NP Pwr Units The power units shown on the motor nameplate. Values Options: 7 Motor Poles Set to the number of motor poles indicated on the motor nameplate. Only even numbers are allowed. 8 Motor Inertia Time, in seconds, for an uncoupled motor to accelerate from zero to base speed, at rated motor torque. Calculated during autotune. 9 Total Inertia Time, in seconds, for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed, at rated motor torque. Calculated during autotune. Speed Ref Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel]. A value of. represents base speed of the motor. Spd Ref Divide Par [Speed Ref ] is divided by this number. This number can be used to scale the value of Par [Speed Ref ]. Speed Ref Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel]. A value of. represents base speed of the motor. 3 Spd Ref Multi Par [Speed Ref ] is multiplied by this number. This number can be used to scale the value of Par [Speed Ref ]. 4 Speed Ref 4 Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel]. 5 Speed Ref 5 Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected by Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel]. 6 Speed Ref Sel Selects the source of the speed reference to the drive. 7 Jog Speed Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 8 [Jog ] of Par 5 [Applied LogicCmd]. 8 Jog Speed Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when responding to bit 3 [Jog ] of Par 5 [Applied LogicCmd]. 9 Atune Spd Ref Sets the maximum speed of the motor during the Flux current and inertia tests. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Options: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Volt Calculated 75/75 Amps Calculated Calculated/Calculated Hz Calculated./5. RPM Calculated /3 Hp Calculated.5/35. Hp Hp W Pole 4 /4 Sec.4./655. Sec../655.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Par 4[Motor NP RPM] =. 3 Spd Ref 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type Spd Ref DPI Zero Speed 4 Spd Ref 4 Spd Ref 5 Spd Ref 5 Spd Ref 6 Spd Ref DPI RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM 499.4 76.4/764. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-7 Name No. Description Values Speed Ref DPI RPM Sets the speed reference that the drive should use when selected in Par 6 [Speed Ref Sel].. A device communicating on a DPI port (typically a HIM) provides this value. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Speed Trim Provides an additive trim value to Par 46 [Scaled Spd Ref]. Speed Trim Provides an additive speed trim value to Par 47 [Spd Trim SpdRef] with a Lead/Lag filter. The Position regulator output is linked to this parameter by default. This speed trim value affects the speed reference input to the speed regulator. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 3 Speed Trim 3 RPM Provides a scalable speed trim value that will be added to Par 47 [Spd Trim SpdRef]. Par 4. [SpdTrim 3 Scale] scales this value prior to the trim value affecting the speed reference. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 4 SpdTrim 3 Scale Par 3 [Speed Trim 3] is multiplied by this number. This number can be used to scale the value of Par 3 [Speed Trim 3]. 5 STrim Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the Par [Speed Trim ] filter. A value greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. A value of will disable the filter. 6 SpdTrim Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Trim filter. 3 Rev Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the negative direction. This value can be entered as a negative value or zero. 3 Fwd Speed Limit Sets a limit on the speed reference in the positive direction. This value can be entered as a positive value or zero. 3 Accel Time Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases, with time in seconds to base speed. Accel Rate = Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] / Par 3 [Accel Time] 33 Decel Time Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases, with time in seconds to base speed. Decel Rate = Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] / Par 33 [Decel Time] Comm Scale: Comm Scale: 34 S Curve Time Sets the S time (Round In and Round Out ) in seconds. Half of the time specified is added to the beginning and half to the end of the applied ramp. The S time is independent of speed and results in a trapezoidal torque profile. For example:. -/+.. -/+5. R/S../. RPM -5. -4./. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM 5../4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Sec../6553.5 Sec../6553.5 Sec.5./4. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Speed Time in Seconds.5 sec..5 sec. Accel Time = 5. seconds S Curve Time =. second Total Ramp Time = 6. seconds 35 SpdRef Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the Speed Reference filter. A value greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. A value of will disable the filter. 36 SpdRef Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Reference filter. 37 Spd Ref Bypass The speed command after the limit, ramp and s-curve blocks. Link a source directly to this parameter to bypass these blocks. Comm Scale: 38 Speed Ref Scale This parameter is multiplied with the value in Par 44 [Filtered Spd Ref] to produce the value in Par 46 [Scaled Spd Ref].. -/+5. R/S../5. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =.. -/+. x
3-8 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 4 Selected Spd Ref Displays the speed command before the speed reference limit block. 4 Limited Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the limit block, limited by Par 3 [Rev Speed Limit] and Par 3 [Fwd Speed Limit]. 4 Ramped Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the linear ramp block, modified by Par 3 [Accel Time] and Par 33 [Decel Time]. 43 S Curve Spd Ref Displays the speed command after the s-curve block, modified by Par 34 [S Curve Time]. 44 Filtered Spd Ref Displays the speed reference value output from the reference Lead/Lag filter. 45 Delayed Spd Ref One sample period delayed output of Par 43 [S Curve Spd Ref]. Used in some applications to synchronize the speed reference value through SynchLink. This master drive [S Curve Spd Ref] would then be transmitted to the slave drives over SynchLink. 46 Scaled Spd Ref Displays the speed command after scaling (the product of Par 44 [Filtered Spd Ref] and Par 38 [Speed Ref Scale]. 47 Spd Trim SpdRef Displays the final speed command used by the Speed Regulator. It is the sum of the Par 46 [Scaled Spd Ref] and Par [Speed Trim]. 5 Spd Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select speed reference data displayed in Par 5 [Spd Ref TP Data] and Par 5 [Spd Ref TP RPM]. 5 Spd Ref TP RPM Displays the value selected by Par 5 [Spd Ref TP Sel] in RPM. This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data. Values RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Options: Comm Scale: 5 Spd Ref TP Data Displays the value selected by Par 5 [Spd Ref TP Sel]. A value of. represents base speed of the motor. 53 Drive Ramp Rslt Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error calculator and speed regulator. Available for use in peer-to-peer data links (DPI interface). This number is scaled so that rated motor speed will read 3768. 55 Speed Comp Displays the derivative or change in Par 56 [Inertia SpeedRef] on a per second basis. Link this parameter to Par 3 [Speed Trim 3] and set Par 4 [SpeedTrim 3 Scale] to. to reduce position error in following applications. 56 Inertia SpeedRef The speed input of the inertia compensator. Link this parameter to the output of an internal ramp or s-curve block. The inertia compensator generates a torque reference that is proportional to the rate of change of speed input and total inertia. Comm Scale: 57 InertiaAccelGain Sets the acceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function. A value of produces % compensation. 58 InertiaDecelGain Sets the deceleration gain for the Inertia Compensation function. A value of produces % compensation. RPM. -/+4. Par 4[Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Zero Zero S Crv Match User Ref 3 S Array Size Logic Select 4 S Array Indx 3 Lgc Sel Ref 5 4 6 Scl Ext Trim 5 Logic En Ref 7 Trim FiltOut 6 Rev Spd Lim 8 Ref w/trim 7 Fwd Spd Lim 9 Amp Lim In 8 Rev Lim Stat Amp LimStat 9 Fwd Lim Stat Amp Lim Out Amp Lim Stat FTD Ramp Out Ramp Match RPM. -/+4. Par 4[Motor NP RPM] =. -/+3768 -/+644/644. -/+. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =.../.../. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-9 Name No. Description 59 Inertia Torq Add The torque reference output generated by the inertia compensator. This torque level is modified by Par 57 [InertiaAccelGain] and Par 58 [InertiaDecelGain]. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. Values 6 DeltaSpeedScale Multiplier in the Inertia Compensation function - affects the value of Par 59 [Inertia Torq Add]. Use in center winder and unwind applications to compensate for roll diameter build-up. 6 Virt Encoder EPR Equivalent Edges Per Revolution (EPR) or line count of a virtual encoder. A virtual encoder is a position reference whose input comes from speed reference. It accumulates pulses at the same rate as a real encoder of identical Pulses Per Revolution (PPR). Enter the equivalent PPR. For example: Enter 4 EPR to match an encoder with 4 PPR. 6 Virt Encdr Posit A 3-bit pulse accumulator of the virtual encoder. The accumulated pulse count is equivalent to the hardware accumulator of a real encoder. It accumulates at a rate of 4x the value placed in Par 6 [Virt Encoder EPR]. The accumulator starts at zero upon position enable. 63 Virt Encdr Dlyed One sample period delayed output of Par 6 [Virt Encdr Posit]. Used in some applications to phase synchronize position reference through SynchLink. The master is delayed one sample while the downstream drives update their position references then all drives sample position simultaneously. The downstream drives do not select a delay. 7 MtrSpd Sim Posit The motor position output of the motor simulator. The simulator provides motor position information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible. To use the motor simulator, enter a value of 4 in Par [Motor Fdbk Sel]. 7 Filtered SpdFdbk Displays the motor speed feedback value output from the feedback Lead/Lag filter. 7 Scaled Spd Fdbk Displays the product of the speed feedback and Par 73 [Spd Fdbk Scale]. This parameter is for display only. 73 Spd Fdbk Scale A user adjustable scale factor (multiplier) for speed feedback. It is multiplied with speed feedback to produce Par 7 [Scaled Spd Fdbk]. 74 Motor Spd Est Displays estimated motor speed, calculated when the selected feedback is sensorless or when encoderless ridethrough is enabled. 75 MtrSpd Est Posit Summation (or integration) of Par 74 [Motor Spd Est] scaled by the value in Par 6 [Virtual Edge/Rev]. 76 MtrSpd Simulated The motor speed output of the motor simulator. The simulator provides motor speed information during setup and troubleshooting when actual motor control is not desired or possible. To use the motor simulator, enter a value of 4 in Par [Motor Fdbk Sel]. 77 Spd Fdbk TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the data displayed in Par 78 [Spd Fdbk TP RPM] and Par 79 [Spd Fdbk TP Data]. P.U.. -/+8.. -/+. EPR 496 /678864 RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Comm Scale:. -/+. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =.. -/+. x RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 78 Spd Fdbk TP RPM Displays the value selected in Par 77 [Spd Fdbk TP Sel] in RPM. This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit Options: Zero Zero E dtime Clock Time E EPR InactvFbkDev E Edge Mode 3 ActiveFbkDev 3 E dtheta 4 MCP Fdbk Dev 4 E Error 5 Observer Err 5 E Qloss pk 6 UnFilt Load 6 E Ploss pk 7 Pri Actl Spd 7 E PlevlHist 8 Alt Actl Spd 8 E Edge Time 9 Pri Actl Pos 9 E dedge Alt Actl Pos 3 E dtime Obser dp in 3 E EPR Obser dp 3 E Edge Mode 3 Obser dperr 33 E dtheta 4 Obser accel 34 E Error 5 Obser K3/S 35 E Qloss pk 6 MCP PPR 36 E Ploss pk 7 MCP ^n 37 E PlevlHist 8 E Edge Time 38 E DeltaErr 9 E dedge 39 E DeltaErr RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =.
3- Programming and Parameters Name Description No. 79 Spd Fdbk TP Data Displays the value selected in Par 77 [Spd Fdbk TP Sel]. This display should only be used if the selected value is integer data. Values -/+3768 8 Speed Reg Ctrl Enter or write a value to configure the speed regulator integrator. Refer to Appendix B, Speed Control, on page B-4. Options Preset Sel Integ Hold Integ Reset Default Bit 3 4 5 6 7 = False = True 8 Spd Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator. It's value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 9 [Spd Reg BW]. Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 9 to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque) / (per unit speed).../6. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit Adjustments to Par 474 [Freq Reg We BW] and Par 475 [Freq Reg Wr BW] may be necessary when using sensorless feedback. 8 Spd Reg I Gain Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator. It's value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth setting in Par 9 [Spd Reg BW]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 9 to a value of zero. Units are (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed). /Sec 5../. Adjustments to Par 474 [Freq Reg We BW] and 4Par 75 [Freq Reg Wr BW] may be necessary when using sensorless feedback. 84 SpdReg AntiBckup By setting this parameter to.3 the drive will not over-shoot to a step response. This parameter has no affect on the drive's response to load changes. Recommended setting is. to.5.../.5 Over-Shoot Error Over-Shoot Reference Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup =. Feedback, SpdReg AntiBckup =.3 Error Under-Shoot 85 Servo Lock Gain Sets the gain of an additional integrator in the speed regulator. The effect of Servo Lock is to increase stiffness of the speed response to a load disturbance. It behaves like a position regulator with velocity feed forward, but without the pulse accuracy of a true position regulator. The units of Servo Lock are rad/sec. Gain should normally be set to less than /3 speed regulator bandwidth, or for the desired response. Set to zero to disable Servo Lock. 86 Spd Reg Droop Specifies the amount of base speed that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque. Use the droop function to cause the motor speed to decrease with an increase in load. The units are per unit speed / per unit torque. 87 SReg Torq Preset When the drive is not enabled, this parameter presets integrator output Par [SpdReg Integ Out] to specified a torque level. This ensures that the torque command will be at the preset value when the drive is enabled and run. Par 8 [Speed Reg Ctrl] bit [Preset Sel] = enables this preset. 89 Spd Err Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a nd order Butterworth low pass filter, which reduces quantization noise. The units are rad/sec. A value of will disable the filter. The value should be greater than 5 times the value of Par 9 [Spd Reg BW]. Under-Shoot /Sec../3. P.U.../.5 P.U.. -/+8. R/S../.
Programming and Parameters 3- Name No. Description Values 9 Spd Reg BW Sets the bandwidth of the speed regulator in rad/sec. Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency. Small signal time response is approximately /BW and is the time to reach 63% of set point. A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Pars 8 [Spd Reg P Gain] and 8 [Spd Reg I Gain]. To disable the automatic gain calculation, set this parameter to a value of zero. R/S../5. Min/Max limited by AutoTune calculations. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Adjustments to Par 474 [Freq Reg We BW] and Par 475 [Freq Reg Wr BW] may be necessary when using sensorless feedback. 9 Spd Reg Damping Sets the damping factor of the drive's characteristic equation and factors in the calculation of the integral gain. A damping factor of. is considered critical damp. Lowering the damping will produce faster load disturbance rejection, but may cause a more oscillatory response. When Par 9 [Spd Reg BW] is set to zero, damping factor has no effect. 9 SpdReg P Gain Mx Places a limit on the maximum value of proportional gain in Par 8 [Spd Reg P Gain]. When gains are automatically calculated, this parameter is necessary to limit the amplification of noise with increased inertia. 93 SRegFB Filt Gain Sets the lead term for the speed feedback filter. A value greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. A value of will disable the filter. 94 SReg FB Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed feedback filter. 95 SRegOut FiltGain Sets the lead term for the Speed Regulator output filter. A value greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. A value of will disable the filter. 96 SReg Out Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Speed Regulator output filter. 97 Act Spd Reg BW Displays the actual speed regulator bandwidth or crossover frequency. The value represents the bandwidth in Par 9 [Spd Reg BW] after the maximum bandwidth limits have been applied. 98 Spd Gain TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the speed gain data displayed in Par 99 [Spd Gain TP Data]. 99 Spd Gain TP Data Displays the value selected by Par 98 [Spd Gain TP Sel]. Speed Error The error (difference) between the motor speed reference (+) and the filtered motor speed feedback (-). SpdReg Integ Out The output value of the Speed Regulator Integral channel...5/3.../6.. -5./. R/S 35../376..7 -/+5. R/S 3../376. R/S../5. Options: Zero Zero I Rate Limit Iq Rate BW 3 I RtLim Stat 4 PGain Max 3 PGain Max BW 5 GnMx LimStat 4 BW Limit 6 Damping 5 InertiaMaxBW 7 Dmp Lim Stat 6 BW Lim Stat 8 7 BW Select 9 Srls KpMxBW 8 Totl Inertia Srls BWLimit 9 TI Lim Stat SrlsInrtMxBW Mtr Inertia SrlsBWSelect M InrtLStat 3 Srls BW Calc 4 Snsr BW Calc../5. RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. P.U.. -/+8. Comm Scale:. PU Torque Spd Reg Pos Lim P.U. Sets the positive limit of the Speed regulator output value. The output of the Speed regulator 3. is limited by adjustable high and low limits. Min.Max:./6. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 3 Spd Reg Neg Lim Sets the negative limit of the Speed regulator output value. The output of the Speed regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits. 4 SrLss Spd Reg Kp Sets the proportional gain of the speed regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. Value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 6 [Srlss Spd Reg BW]. Proportional gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 6 to zero. This gain setting has no units (per unit torque) / (per unit speed error). P.U. -3. -6./. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 8../.
3- Programming and Parameters Name Description No. 5 SrLss Spd Reg Ki Sets the integral gain of the speed regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. This value is automatically calculated based on the bandwidth set in Par 6 [Srlss Spd Reg BW]. Integral gain may be manually adjusted by setting Par 6 to zero. Units are '/Sec' (per unit torque/sec) / (per unit speed error). 6 SrLss Spd Reg BW Sets the bandwidth of the speed regulator when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. Units are in rad/sec. Bandwidth is also referred to as the crossover frequency. Small integral time response is approximately /BW and is the time to reach 63% of set point. A change to this parameter will cause an automatic update of Parameters 4 [SrLss Spd Reg Kp] and 5 [SrLss Spd Reg Ki]. To disable the automatic gain calculation, set this parameter to zero. The maximum limit for this parameter is determined by Par 354 [Iq Rate Limit], the ratio of Par 8 [Motor Inertia] to Par 9 [Total Inertia], and Par 7 [SrLss Kp Max]. Values 7 SrLss Kp Max Places a limit on the maximum value of proportional gain in Par 4 [SrLss Spd Reg Kp], for use when sensorless motor speed feedback is used. When gains are autmatically calculated, this parameter is necessary to limit the amplification of noise with increased inertia. 8 Spd Reg TP Sel Enter or write a value to select speed regulator data displayed in Par 9 [Spd Reg TP Data]. 9 Spd Reg TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 8 [Spd Reg TP Sel]. Spd/Torq ModeSel Selects the source for the drive torque reference. Options: Options: Torque Ref Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive. This parameter is divided by the value in Par [Torq Ref Div]. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. Torq Ref Div Par [Torque Ref ] is divided by this number. Use this parameter to scale the value of Par [Torque Ref ]. 3 Torque Ref Supplies an external motor torque reference to the drive. This parameter is multiplied by the value in Par 4 [Torq Ref Mult]. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. Comm Scale: 4 Torq Ref Mult Par 3 [Torque Ref ] is multiplied by this number. Use this parameter to scale the value of Par 3 [Torque Ref ]. 5 Torque Trim The amount added to the Torque Ref & before the Speed/Torque Mode Selector. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. 6 Torque Step The amount added to the selected Torque Reference before notch filtering or limits are applied. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. 7 Notch Filt Mode Notch enabled. 8 Notch Filt Freq The center frequency for Notch filter. 3 Torq PosLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for positive torque reference values. The positive internal motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. 4 Torq NegLim Actl Sets the internal torque limit for negative torque reference values. The internal negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. /Sec 8../495.8 R/S../3.../35. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Zero Zero SrLss ZeroWe Spd FiltOut I GainParLim Servo Lock 3 P GainParLim 3 Spd+ServLock 4 SrvLck ParLm 4 Prop Output 5 AntiBkup PLm 5 Intg Input 6 Droop ParLim 6 Scld Int Pre 7 Pos Lim Stat 7 Sel Int Pre 8 Neg Lim Stat 8 Droop Output 9 Limiter Out 9 Out Lim Stat Active Pgain Intg Hold Active Igain P.U.. -/+8. Speed Reg Zero Torque 4 Max Spd/Torq Speed Reg 5 Sum Spd/Torq Torque Ref 6 AbsMn Spd/Tq 3 Min Spd/Torq. -/+.. Rated Motor Torque. -/+.. -/+. Comm Scale:. Rated Motor Torque. -/+. P.U.. -/+8. Comm Scale:. Rated Motor Torque P.U.. -/+8. Comm Scale:. Rated Motor Torque Options: No Filter No Filter IIR Notch Hz 35../5. P.U.../8. P.U. -. -8./.
Programming and Parameters 3-3 Name No. Description 5 Torque Pos Limit Sets the external torque limit for positive torque reference values. The external positive motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. Values 6 Torque Neg Limit Sets the external torque limit for negative torque reference values. The external negative motor torque will not be allowed to exceed this value. 7 Mtring Power Lim Sets the maximum motoring (positive) power of the drive. This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed. A value of. = nominal motor power. 8 Regen Power Lim Sets the maximum regenerative (negative) power of the drive. This can be calculated by multiplying the desired maximum motor torque and the maximum motor speed. A value of. = nominal motor power. 9 Atune Torq Ref Sets the motor torque that is applied to the motor during the flux current and inertia tests. 3 Torq Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select torque reference data displayed in Par 3 [Torq Ref TP Data]. 3 Torq Ref TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 3 [Torq Ref TP Sel]. 3 Inert Adapt Sel Configures the Inertia Adaptation Algorithm (IAA Function). Contains the following selections: Bit Name Current Function Inrtia Adapt When set to (on), the IAA function will effect enhanced stability, higher bandwidths and dynamic stiffness. Useful when systems with a gear-box becomes disconnected from the load. Also used with motors that have very little inertia that otherwise lack dynamic stiffness, even at high bandwidths. Load Est When set to (on), the Load Estimate option removes or greatly reduces load disturbances and gives quicker system response. & This mode enhances stability as well as removing load disturbances. P.U.../8. P.U. -. -8./. P.U. 8../8. P.U. -. -8./. P.U..5.5/. Comm Scale:. = P.U. Motor to Torque Zero Options: Zero 6 Neg Lim Src Scale Output 7 MPwr Par Lim Spd Torque 8 RPwr Par Lim 3 TrqModeOut 9 +Torq ParLim 4 Actv rqmode -Torq ParLim 5 Actv Mod Out Nom Bus Volt 6 Torq En In Bus Volt Hys 7 NotchFiltOut 3 Bus Reg Ref 8 NotchFilt In 4 Bus Reg Err 9 Torq Lim In 5 Bus Reg Intg Bus Reg Out 6 BusReg Clamp Pos Pwr Lim 7 BusRegOutput Neg Pwr Lim 8 IAA Filt Out 3 PosAtun Torq 9 IAA dvf/dt 4 NegAtun Torq 3 MC Torq Lim 5 Pos Lim Src 3 Int Torq Lim Comm Scale: P.U.. -/+8.. = P.U. Motor to Torque / Linkable Read-Write Data Type 33 Inert Adapt BW This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Inertia Adaptation function when the IAA function is selected (Par 3 [Inert Adpt Sel], bit [Inrtia Adapt]). Typical IAA bandwidths range from 7 to 5 rad/sec with rad/sec nominal best. R/S../5. If the Load Estimate (Par 3 [Inert Adpt Sel], bit [load Est]) function is selected, then this parameter sets the natural frequency of a filter in rad/sec. Typical values range from to 5 rad/sec with higher values being more responsive to disturbances but with increased system noise. There is no nominal best value, but 4 rad/sec is a suggested starting point. This adjustment may not function well in 'sloppy' geared systems. If both Inertia Adaptation and Load Estimate functions are active, use a bandwidth setting of rad/sec. 34 Inert Adapt Gain This parameter sets a multiplier of system inertia when the Inertia Adaptation function is selected (Par 3 [Inert Adpt Sel], bit [Inrtia Adapt]). Higher values may cause high frequency ringing, while smaller values may cause fundamental load instability. A typical value is.5 This parameter has no affect on the Load Estimate function..5.3/.
3-4 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 4 FricComp Spd Ref RPM Supplies a speed input to the Friction Compensation algorithm. This input is normally a. speed reference from a motion planner or ramped speed reference. It will trigger a torque -/+4. feed forward response depending on its value. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 4 FricComp Setup Enter or write a value to configure the friction compensation algorithm. This is a packed word of 3 digits. Each digit has a possible selection of levels. The least significant digit sets the speed threshold in intervals of.5 pu speed. The next (middle) digit sets the hysteresis band for the units digit in intervals of.5 pu velocity. The most significant digit sets the number of time steps from stick to slip, each step is. sec. Example: Fsetup = 54 means, 5 time steps between stick and slip, each of. sec. duration, counts of hysteresis or. pu_speed (each count is.5 pu speed), and 4 counts or. pu_speed is the trigger threshold (each count is.5 pu speed). 4 FricComp Stick The torque needed to break away from zero speed. By the nature of friction, the break away sticktion will always be greater than the running friction. 43 FricComp Slip The torque level to sustain very low speed once break away has been achieved. By the nature of friction, viscous friction will always be less than sticktion. 44 FricComp Rated The torque needed to a base friction at base motor speed and with no process loading. The friction compensation algorithm assumes a linear or viscous component of friction between Par 43 [FricComp Slip] and Par 44 [FricComp Rated]. 45 FricComp TorqAdd The torque reference output of the Friction Compensation function. A value of. represents rated torque of the motor. 5 Logic State Mach Indicates the logical state of the drive. Value - Stopped indicates zero speed has been detected and the speed and torque regulators are disabled. Number of Time Steps 35 /999 N N N P.U..5./8. Comm Scale: Motor P.U. Torque Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Options: Hysteresis P.U.../8. Motor P.U. Torque P.U.../8. Motor P.U. Torque P.U.. -/+8. Motor P.U. Torque 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type Stopped Stopped 4 Inertia Test Starting 5 MC Diag Running 6 Test Done Stopping 6-bit 5 Logic Command The controller-drive interface (as defined by the Controller Communication Format) sets bits to enable and disable various functions and algorithms. Bits that are changed here are reflected in Par 5 [Applied LogicCmd]. Note: Bits 4 through 9 in Logic Command are NOT recalled from Control EEprom. They will be cleared upon drive power up or following an EEprom recall operation. Options PositionEnbl ProcsTrim En Frict Comp Inertia Comp Sys Inert En Mtr Inert En PM Offset En Dir Sel En Pwr Diag En MC Atune En Time Axis En TachLoss Rst Spd S Crv En SpdRamp Dsbl Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 5 Applied LogicCmd Displays Logic Command that is applied to the Regulators and Control Algorithms within the drive. Logic Commands come from the 3-bit Logic Command found in a connection with the Logix Controller. Options Coast Stop CurrLim Stop Jog UniPol Rev UniPol Fwd Clear Fault Jog Start Normal Stop PositionEnbl ProcsTrim En Frict Comp Inertia Comp Sys Inert En Mtr Inert En PM Offset En Dir Sel En Pwr Diag En MC Atune En Time Axis En TachLoss Rst Spd S Crv En SpdRamp Dsbl Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Units = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-5 Name No. Description 53 Control Options Set bits to configure the options for operating the drive. Options Values Trq Trim En Aux Pwr Sply Auto Tach Sw OL ClsLpDsbl Jog -NoInteg Iq Delay Motor Dir W CoastStop 3WireControl Stop Cndt Tq Stop in Torq Jog - NoRamp Jog in Torq WCurrLimStp Sreg LPF SRef Filt En Bipolar SRef Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True Bit Name Current Function Bipolar SRef When this bit is enabled a bipolar speed reference is used. In bipolar reference mode, Par 4 [Selected Spd Ref] indicates both the speed magnitude and the direction: Positive speed reference values (+) = forward direction and negative speed reference values ( ) = reverse direction. When this bit is disabled a unipolar speed reference is used. In unipolar mode, the speed reference is limited to a minimum value of zero (). In this case Par 4 [Selected Spd Ref] supplies only the speed magnitude. The direction is determined by Par 53 [Applied LogicCmd] bits [UniPol Fwd] and [UniPol Rev]. The forward/reverse direction button on the HIM is one possible source for the [Applied Logic Command] direction bits. The following chart explains the effect that the direction button on the HIM has based on the condition of the Bipolar SRef bit: Bipolar Reference Controlled By HIM? HIM Direction Button Enabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied (+) or (-) command signal Enabled No Has no effect on motor direction. Direction determined by sign of Par 4 [Selected Spd Ref]. Disabled Yes Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit. Disabled No Changes the motor direction due to a HIM supplied Forward or Reverse Logic Command bit. In either Bipolar or Unipolar mode, the selected direction can be determined from the sign of Par 4 [Limited Spd Ref]. Positive values indicate forward rotation and negative values indicate reverse rotation. SRef Filt En Enables Speed Reference Lead Lag Filter-reset disables Sreg LPF Setting this bit will enable the speed regulator filter as a single order low pass filter 4 Jog in Torq Overrides Par [Spd/Torq ModeSel] setting when jog command received 5 Jog-NoRamp Bypasses the Speed Reference Ramp and S-Curve 6 Stop in Torq Overrides Par [Spd/Torq ModeSel] setting when stopping 8 3WireControl Configures for 3-wire control Iq Delay Enables Torque Current Delay option Jog-NoInteg Configures speed regulator s integrator to hold when jogging 7 Aux Pwr Sply Enables use of Aux. Power Supply. When set to, Main Control Board examines internal V DC power to see when energized. When set to, examines voltage of DC Bus. This bit enables Main Control Board and DriveLogix Controller to remain energized when 3-Ø voltage is de-energized.
3-6 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 54 Stop Dwell Time Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators, when responding to a stop command. For more information, please see Stop Dwell Time on page C-5. Important: Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter. 55 Logic Status Displays the status - condition of the drive. Options 57 Logic Ctrl State Indicates which logic control functions are enabled. Sec../.l Command Run Start Active PositionMode Speed Mode Torque Mode Spd Commis MC Commis MC En Ack Above Setpt At Setpt At Setpt Spd At Zero Spd Tach Loss Sw At Limit Run Ready Flash Mode Alarm Faulted Jogging Decelerating Accelerating Actual Dir Command Dir Running Enabled Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type Bit Name Current Function Bit Name Current Function Enabled Drive is controlling motor 4 At Setpt Spd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 4 [Limited Spd Ref] and 7 [Set Speed Lim] Running Run command received & controlling motor 5 Command Commanded direction is forward 6 At Setpt Par 7 [Setpt Data] value is within limits defined Dir by Par 73 [Setpt TripPoint] and 74 [Setpt Limit] 3 Actual Dir Actual motor direction is forward 7 Above Setpt Par 75 [Setpt Data] value is within limits defined by Par 76 [Setpt TripPoint] and 77 [Setpt Limit] 4 Accelerating Motor is increasing speed 8 MC En Ack Drive is controlling motor (same as enabled) 5 Decelerating Motor is decreasing speed 9 MC Commis Motor control commissioning in progress 6 Jogging Jog command received & controlling motor Spd Commis Speed control commissioning in progress 7 Faulted Exception event that causes a fault has occurred 8 Alarm Exception event that causes an alarm has occurred Torque Mode Par [Spd/Torq ModeSel] value is, 3, 4, 5 or 6 9 Flash Mode Flash upgrade in progress 3 Speed Mode Par [Spd/Torq ModeSel] value is & position control is not enabled Run Ready Enable input is high & drive is fault free 4 Position Position control active & Par [Spd/Torq Mode ModeSel] value is not, 3, 4, 5 or 6 At Limit Speed, Power, Current or Torque is being limited, refer to 5 Start Active Start command received & controlling motor Par 34 Tach Loss Failure is detected in primary speed or position feedback 6 Command Run command received SW device & drive has switched to secondary device Run 3 At Zero Spd Speed feedback is within limits defined in Par 6 7-3 56 Run Inhibit Stat Indicates which condition is preventing the drive from starting or running. Options PM Mtr Fdbk Motin Shtdown DigIn Config Bus PreChrg Encoder PPR Jog Start Flash Upgrd Power EE Power Loss SW I Lim Stp SW Coast Stp SW Ramp Stop No Enable Faulted Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options ProcsTrim En Cmd Dir Upol Lgx I/O Cnx Lgx Run Mode PM Offset Rq Mtr Dir Req Pwr Diag Req MC Atune Req FTD Ramp En MC En Req RThru Flux DC Brake En Mtr Sim Mode RThru Coast CurrRef En Forced Spd Torq Ref En Spd Reg En SReg IntgHld CurrLim Stop J Tst FulSpd Inert Tst En PositionEnbl SRef SCrv En SRef Ramp En Spd Ref En Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True = False = True = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-7 Name No. Description Values 58 Drive Logic Rslt This is the logic output of the logic parser that combines the outputs from the DPI ports and the DriveLogix controller to determine drive control based on the masks and owners. The control bits are reflected in Par 5 [Applied LogicCmd] bits 6-3. Options Coast Stop CurrLim Stop Jog UniPol Rev UniPol Fwd Clear Fault Jog Start Normal Stop Coast Stop CurrLim Stop Jog UniPol Rev UniPol Fwd Clear Fault Jog Start Normal Stop Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 59 DigIn ConfigStat This parameter indicates the status of the Digital Inputs. 6 Zero Speed Lim Establishes a band around zero speed that is used to determine when the drive considers the motor to be at zero speed. 6 Logic TP Sel Enter or write a value to select logic status indication displayed in Par 6 [Logic TP Data]. 6 Logic TP Data Displays the indication selected by Par 6 [Logic TP Sel]. Options: 3 DigIn Ok DigIn Ok 4 Strt+UnLatch Run/Starts 5 Jog's Start NoStop 6 Jog's Run+Latched 7 FwdRevrs's RPM 7.64./88. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Options: 63 Stop Oper TP Sel Enter or write a value to select data displayed in Par 64 [StpOper TPData] at the time of Options: the last initiated stop. 64 StopOper TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 63 [Stop Oper TP Sel]. 65 Test Status Indicates which test (if any) is in progress. 66 Motor Ctrl Cmmd Displays the command bits to the Motor Control Processor from the Velocity Processor. Options Options: Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True 5 ms time Avg Spd Ref 6 ms max Avg Spd Fdbk 7 8ms time 3 LastStopMode 8 8ms max 4 Spd Ref Sel 9 BkGnd Time 5 Start State BkGnd Max 6 Run State 5us % 7 Stop State ms % 8 PrChrg Logic 3 8ms % 9 Meas State 4 BkGnd % Data State 5 RThru State Diag State 6 RThru Timer MC CalcState 7 Mtr Friction 3 5us time 8 Sys Friction 4 5us max 9 Iq proc time. -/+. Zero Zero 4 ZM Spd Fdbk Logic State 5 Speed Ref Logic Input 6 Avg Spd Ref 3 Lcl In State 7 ZM Spd Ref 4 Logic Status 8 SReg PI Out 5 Run Inhibit 9 Torq Ref 6 Logic Ctrl TorqRef Stat 7 Mtr Ctrl Cmd DC Bus Volts 8 Mtr Ctrl Ack Motor Volts 9 3 Mtr Current Flt Status 4 Motor Flux Flt Status 5 Motor Freq Motor Speed 6 Motor Power 3 Avg Spd Fdbk 7 Flt Status 3. -/+. None None 4 PM Offset MC Autotune 5 Mtr Inertia Power Diag 6 Sys Inertia 3 Motor Direct 7 Mtr+Sys J Fault Reset Base Block Torque Run Flux Run CP Enable Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
3-8 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 67 Motor Ctrl Ackn Displays the Motor Control Processor's acknowledgment to the Velocity Processor for the Motor Control Command bits. Options Fault Reset Power Diag Precharge Torque Run Flux Run CP Enable Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 69 SrLss ZeroSpdLim Functionally equivalent to Par 6 [Zero Speed Lim], but is used exclusively in Sensorless speed mode. The value is automatically set from Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz], Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] or Par 7 [Motor Poles]. The automatic setting corresponds to the rated slip speed of the motor (synchronous speed - nameplate speed). The value can be manually set. 7 Set Speed Lim Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 4 [Limited Spd Ref] for comparison to average speed feedback. The comparison controls bit 4 [At Setpt Spd] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. In general bit 4 [At Setpt Spd] turns on when the feedback is within the tolerance of the reference. Technically - Turn-on level for rising feedback = Par 4 [Limited Spd Ref] - Limit. Turn-off level for rising feedback = {Limited Spd Ref} + (Limit). Turn-on level for falling feedback = [Limited Spd Ref} + Limit. Turn-off level for falling feedback = [Limited Spd Ref] - (Limit). 7 Setpt Data Provides data for comparison to Par 73 [Setpt TripPoint], driving bit 6 [At Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. For more information, please see Setpt Data on page C-6. 73 Setpt TripPoint Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 6 [At Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. RPM 49.9975./875. RPM 7.64./88. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 74 Setpt Limit Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 73 [Setpt TripPoint]. Turn-on level for ascending data = [Setpt TripPoint] - [Setpt Limit]. Turn-off level for : ascending data = [Setpt TripPoint] + (Limit). Turn-on level for descending data = [Setpt TripPoint] + Limit. Turn-off level for descending data = [Setpt TripPoint] - (Limit). 75 Setpt Data Provides data for comparison to Par 77 [Setpt Limit], driving bit 7 [Above Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. For more information, please see Setpt Data on page C-6. 76 Setpt TripPoint Provides the midpoint for operation of bit 6 [At Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. 77 Setpt Limit Creates a tolerance - hysteresis band around the value in Par 76 [Setpt TripPoint]. For positive setpoints: Turn-on level = [Setpt TripPoint], Turn-off level = [Setpt TripPoint] - Limit. For negative setpoints: Turn-on level = [Setpt TripPoint], Turn-off level = [Setpt TripPoint] + Limit. 8 PI Output The final output of the Process Control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 8 PI Reference The reference input for the process control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 8 PI Feedback The feedback input for the process control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.../.5 P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.../.5 P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. 83 PI Command Set bits to configure the process control regulator - enable or disable the regulator, enable or disable the time function generator and limit generator. Options Time Lim En Enable Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 84 PI Lpass Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a single pole filter applied to the error input of the Process Control regulator. The input to the filter is the difference between Par 8 [PI Reference] and Par 8 [PI Feedback]. The output of this filter is used as the input to the process control regulator. 85 PI Preload Presets the integrator of the Process Control regulator. = False = True R/S../5. P.U.. -/+8. Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-9 Name No. Description Values 86 PI Prop Gain Controls the proportional gain of the Process Control regulator. If the proportional gain is., the regulator output equals pu for pu error. 87 PI Integ Time Controls the integral gain of the Process Control regulator. If the integrator time is., the regulator output equals pu in second for pu error. 88 PI Integ HLim The high limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 89 PI Integ LLim The low limit of the integral gain channel for the Process Control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 9 PI Integ Output Displays the output value of the integral channel of the Process Control regulator. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 9 PI High Limit The high limit of the Process Control regulator output. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 9 PI Lower Limit The low limit of the Process Control regulator output. A value of can represent either base motor speed, motor rated torque, or % for some external function. 93 PI TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Process Control PI data displayed by Par 94 [PI TP Data]. 94 PI TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 93 [PI TP Sel]. Time Axis Rate Sets rate (/sec) for the Time Function Generator to ramp from and output of to and from to. Options: Time Axis Output The output of the Time Function Generator. When the Time Function Generator is enabled by Par 83 [PI Command] bit [Enable] or Par 5 [Logic Command] bit 3 [Time Axis En], the value of this parameter ramps from to at a rate determined by Par [Time Axis Rate]. Conversely, when the Function Generator is disabled, the value of this parameter ramps from to. 4 LimGen Y axis Mx Sets Par 7 [Limit Gen Hi Out] and Par 8 [Limit Gen Lo Out] when the absolute value of Par 6 [LimGen X axis In] is greater than or equal to. 5 LimGen Y axis Mn Sets Par 7 [Limit Gen Hi Out] and Par 8 [Limit Gen Lo Out] when the absolute value of Par 6 [LimGen X axis In] is equal to. 6 LimGen X axis In The X axis input to the Limit Generator. Typically this parameter is linked to a speed reference or to Par [Time Axis Output]. 7 Limit Gen Hi Out Displays the positive output of the Limit Generator. When Par 6 [Limit Gen X axis In] is greater than or equal to, this value equals Par 4 [LimGen Y axis Mx]. When Par 6 [LimGen X axis In] is equal to, this value equals Par 5 [LimGen Y axis Mn]. For values of X Axis input between and, the value of this parameter is interpolated from Y axis min and max values. Typically this parameter is linked to Par 9 [PI High Limit]. 8 Limit Gen Lo Out Displays the negative output of the Limit Generator. The value of this parameter is the negative of Par 7 [Limit Gen Hi Out]. Typically it is linked to Par 9 [PI Lower Limit]. 8../. /Sec 8../4. P.U.../8. P.U. -. -8./. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.../8. P.U. -. -8./. 3 4 5 Zero Zero 6 On Out Limit PI Error 7 Extern Hold LPF Output 8 Hold Status P Gain Term 9 Enbl Status Reg Output Time Axis En On Intg Lim P.U.. -/+8. /Sec../.../. P.U..5./8. P.U..5./8.. -/+8. P.U. 8../8. P.U. -8. -8./. Linkable Read-Write Data Type
3-3 Programming and Parameters Linkable Read-Write Data Type Name No. Description Values PeakDtct Ctrl In Sets the configuration of the two peak/level detectors. When set (in Set mode), bit [Peak Set] and 4 [Peak Set] are level detectors that causes their output bit to match their preset bit value (Par 4 [PeakDtct Preset] and Par 8 [PeakDtct Preset], respectively). When set (in Hold mode), bit [Peak Hold] and 5 [Peak Hold] are level detectors that cause their output to hold the present min/max. When bits and 4 (Set mode) and and 5 (Hold mode) are off, their output bit captures the peak min/max. Bits [Peak Sel] and 6 [Peak Sel] determine if the peak/level detectors are positive of negative. If the bit is set the detector detects positive peaks or levels above the preset. If the bit is not set the detector detects negative peaks ( valleys") or levels below the preset. The output shows the min. or max. peak. Options Peak Sel Peak Hold Peak Set Peak Sel Peak Hold Peak Set Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Peak Ctrl Status Status of the peak/level detectors. A peak detector sets its bit when it detects a peak or when its input exceeds its preset - depending on the selected mode. Options Peak Chng Peak Chng Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 PeakDtct In Int input to the first peak/level detector. 3 PkDtct In Floating point input to the first peak/level detector. 4 PeakDtct Preset The first peal/level detector (in set or hold modes) compares this value to its input (Par [PeakDtct In Int] or 3 [PkDtct In ]) for level detection. When the detector trips (in set mode) it transfers the value of this parameter to its output (Par 5 [PeakDetect Out]). 5 PeakDetect Out Output from the first peak/level detector. 6 PeakDtct In Int input to second peak/level detector. 7 PkDtct In Floating point input to second peak/level detector. 8 PeakDtct Preset The second detector (in set or hold modes) compares this value to its input (Par 6 [PeakDtct In Int] or 7 [PkDtct In ]) for level detection. When the detector trips (in set mode) it transfers the value of this parameter to its output (Par 9 [PeakDetect Out]). 9 PeakDetect Out Output from the second peak/level detector. Spd Observer BW Sets the internal bandwidth for the speed feedback observer. The setting should be as high a possible, preferably at least 6 times the value of Par 9 [Spd Reg BW]. A setting of rad/sec is reasonable for most applications. The speed observer is bypassed when set to zero. Load Estimate Displays the estimated load torque, which is the side effect of the speed observer and does not include torque to accelerate or decelerate the motor if the inertia input is correct. This value is provided for display purposes. Motor Fdbk Sel Enter or write a value to select the primary motor speed feedback device. = False = True = False = True Options: 3 Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel Selects the alternate feedback device if the feedback selected from Par [Motor Fdbk Options: Sel] fails.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. R/S../. P.U.. -/+8. 3 3 3-bit 3-bit Encoder Encoder 4 Motor Sim Encoder 5 FB Opt Port Sensorless 6 FB Opt Port Encoder Encoder 4 Motor Sim Encoder 5 FB Opt Port Sensorless 6 FB Opt Port
Programming and Parameters 3-3 Name No. Description Values 4 TachSwitch Level Sets the detection level for the automatic tach loss switchover routine. A drop in feedback speed at this percent of rated speed over.5 msec will cause a tach switch from the primary to alternate feedback device. This feature is enabled when bit 6 [Auto Tach Sw] in Par 53 [Control Options] is selected. Setting this level lower will make the tach switch detection more sensitive and lower the minimum speed at which a tach switch can occur. Setting this level higher will make the tach switch less sensitive and raise the minimum speed for tach switch detection. 6 Virtual Edge/Rev Set the EPR (Edges Per Revolution) scaling for calculating motor position. Used in the calculation of the position feedback such as Par 7 [MtrSpd Sim Posit]. 7 Spd Obs Trq Gain Multiplication factor for the inertia input to the Speed Observer. If the specified inertia differs from actual, this value is used to fine tune the inertia value input to the observer. Normally set to. 3 Encdr Position Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from encoder. The value changes by a value of 4 times the Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft. Used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL) to close the position loop if the position control is selected. 3 Encdr Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from encoder. Calculated from the change of Par 3 [Encdr Position] and Par 3 [Encoder PPR]. 3 Encoder PPR Sets the PPR rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder input. Comm Scale: %. 5./5. EPR 496 /67776../. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. PPR 4 / Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 6-bit
3-3 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 33 Encdr Config Specifies the configuration options for the Encoder. Bits [Enc Filt bt], [Enc Filt bt], [Enc Filt bt], and 3 [Enc Filt bt3] configure the encoder input filter (see Table 33A: Encoder Input Filter Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. Bits 4 [Encdr 4x] and 5 [Encdr A Phs] determine how the encoder channel A and B signals will be interpreted. Typically, both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available. Par 3 [Encdr Position] counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation. If bit 5 [Encdr A Phs] is set, then the B phase signal is ignored. As a result, the encoder position will only increase, regardless of rotation direction. Bits 4 and 5 together also determine the number of edges counted per encoder pulse (see Table 33B: Multiplier and Direction Settings). "4x" sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B encoder phases, hence 4 edges per pulse. In 4x mode, the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution (PPR) rating per encoder revolution (e.g., it increments the value in Par 3 [Encdr Position] by 496 for one revolution of a 4 PPR encoder). Bit 6 [Encdr Dir] inverts the channel A input, thus reversing the direction of the feedback. Bit 9 [Edge Time] configures the method of sampling used by the VPL. Setting this bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting this bit to zero chooses "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation. Bits [SmplRate bt] through 5 [SmplRate bt3] configure the sample interval for measuring speed (see Table 33C: Encoder Sample Interval Settings). Increasing the encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed. Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds. Options SmplRate bt3 SmplRate bt SmplRate bt SmplRate bt Edge Time Encdr Dir Encdr A Phs Encdr 4x Enc Filt bt3 Enc Filt bt Enc Filt bt Enc Filt bt Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Table 33A: Encoder Input Filter Settings Table 33B: Multiplier and Direction Settings Bit 3 Encoder Bit Filter Settings Bit 5 4 Mult Directions Comments Filter disabled x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of phase ns filter A, phase B only used to find direction ns filter 4x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of both A 3 ns filter and B phases (default 4 ns filter setting) 5 ns filter x fwd only Counts rise of phase A. 6 ns filter Phase B ignored. 7 ns filter x fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored. 8 ns filter (default setting) 9 ns filter ns filter ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter 34 Encdr Error Indicates the error status of the Encoder. Options 35 Port Regis Ltch Displays the registration data of port. Indicates the position reference counter value latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 36 [Port Regis Cnfg]. Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True Table 33C: Encoder Sample Interval Settin Bit 5 4 3 Encoder Sample Interval Settings.5 ms.5 ms (min. setting). ms.5 ms. ms (default setting).5 ms 3. ms 3.5 ms 4. ms 4.5 ms 5. ms 5.5 ms 6. ms (max. setting) 6. ms 6. ms 6. ms Phase Level Phase Loss Quad Loss Encdr Missing Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-33 Linkable Read-Write Data Type Name No. Description Values 36 Port Regis Cnfg Configures the registration latch at port. Bit [RL Encdr Sel] selects the encoder for the input source of latched data. Setting bit selects Encoder, resetting the bit to zero selects Encoder. Bits [RL Trig Src] and [RL Trig Src] select the trigger source (see Table 36A: Trigger Source Settings). Bits 3 [RL Trig Edg] and 4 [RL Trig Edg] select which edges signal the position (see Table 36B: Edge Selection Settings). Bits 5 [RL Dir Rev] and 6 [RL Dir Fwd] set the direction of position capture (see Table 36C: Trigger Source Settings). Bits 8 [DI Filt bt], 9 [DI Filt bit], [DI Filt bt], and [DI Filt bit3] configure a filter for the digital input and (see Table 36D: Filter Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. Options DI Filt bit3 DI Filt bit DI Filt bi DI Filt bit RL Dir Fwd RL Dir Rev RL Trig Edg RL Trig Edg RL Trig Src RL Trig Src RL EncdrSel Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True Table 36A: Trigger Source Settings Bit Digital Input AND Encoder (Primary Encoder) Z Phase Digital Input 3 (default setting) Digital Input Encoder (Primary Encoder) Z Phase Table 36B: Edge Selection Settings Bit 4 3 Capture position on rising edge Capture position on falling edge Capture position on both edges Disable capture Table 36C: Trigger Source Settings Bit 6 5 Disable capture Capture position during Reverse rotation Capture position during Forward rotation Capture position during either rotation Table 36D: Filter Settings Bit 9 8 Input Filter Setting Filter disabled ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter 6 ns filter 7 ns filter 8 ns filter (default setting) 9 ns filter ns filter ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter 37 Port Regis Ctrl Configures the registration control for port. Set bit [Arm Request] to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bit [DisArm Req] to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. Options Disarm Req Arm Request Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 38 Port Regis Stat Indicates the registration control status of port. Bit [Armed] indicates the registration latch is armed. Bit [Found] indicates the registration event has triggered the latch. Options Found Armed Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 4 Encdr Position Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from Encoder. The value changes by a value of 4 times the Pulses Per Revolution (PPR) rating of the encoder for each full revolution of the encoder shaft. Used by the VPL to close the position loop if the position control is selected. = False = True = False = True 3-bit
3-34 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 4 Encdr Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from Encoder. Calculated from the change of Par 4 [Encdr Position] and Par 4 [Encoder PPR]. 4 Encoder PPR Sets the PPR rating of the feedback device connected to the Encoder input. Values RPM Min.Max: -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. PPR 4 / Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 43 Encdr Config Specifies the configuration options for the Encoder. Bits [Enc Filt bt], [Enc Filt bt], [Enc Filt bt], and 3 [Enc Filt bt3] configure encoder input filter (see Table 43A: Trigger Source Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. Bits 4 [Encdr 4x] and 5 [Encdr A Phs] determine how the encoder channel A and B signals will be interpreted. Typically, both encoder phases A and B are used so that direction information is available. The Par 4 [Encdr Position] counts up for forward rotation and down for reverse rotation. If bit 5 is set, then the B phase signal is ignored. As a result, the encoder position will only increase, regardless of rotation direction. Bits 4 and 5 together also determine the number of edges counted per encoder pulse (see Table 43B: Encoder Sample Interval Settings). "4x" sampling counts both rise and fall of both A and B encoder phases, hence 4 edges per pulse. In 4x mode, the encoder position will change by four times the encoder pulses per revolution rating (PPR) per encoder revolution (e.g., it increments the value in Par 4 [Encdr Position] by 496 for one revolution of a 4 PPR encoder). Bit 6 [Encdr Dir] inverts the channel A input, thus reversing the direction of the feedback. Bit 9 [Edge Time] configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Setting the bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting the bit to zero chooses "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation. Bits [SmplRate bt] through 5 [SmplRate bt3] configure the sample interval for measuring speed (see Table 43C: Channel Interpretation Settings). Increasing the encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed. Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds. Options SmplRate bt3 SmplRate bt SmplRate bt SmplRate bt Edge Time Encdr Dir Encdr A Phs Encdr 4x Enc Filt bt3 Enc Filt bt Enc Filt bt Enc Filt bt Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Table 43A: Trigger Source Settings Bit 3 Input Filter Setting Filter disabled ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter 6 ns filter 7 ns filter 8 ns filter (default setting) 9 ns filter ns filter ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter Table 43B: Encoder Sample Interval Settings Bit 5 4 Mult. Directions Comments x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of phase A, phase B only used to find direction 4x fwd/rev Counts rise/fall of both A and B phases (default setting) x fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored. x fwd only Counts rise of phase A. Phase B ignored. Table 43C: Channel Interpretation Settings Bit 5 4 3 Encoder Sample Interval Settings.5 ms.5 ms (min. setting). ms.5 ms. ms (default setting).5 ms 3. ms 3.5 ms 4. ms 4.5 ms 5. ms 5.5 ms 6. ms (max. setting) 6. ms 6. ms 6. ms = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-35 Name No. Description 44 Encdr Error Indicates the error status of Encoder. Options 45 Port Regis Ltch Displays the registration data of port. Indicates the position reference counter value latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 46 [Port Regis Cnfg]. = False = True 3-bit 46 Port Regis Cnfg Configures the registration latch at port. Bit [RL Encdr Sel] selects the encoder for the input source of latched data. Setting bit selects encoder, resetting the bit to zero selects encoder. Bits [RL Trig Src] and [RL Trig Src] select the trigger source (see Table 46A: Trigger Source Settings). Bits 3 [RL Trig Edg] and 4 [RL Trig Edg] select which edges signal the position (see Table 46B: Edge Selection Settings). Bits 5 [RL Dir Rev] and 6 [RL Dir Fwd] set the direction of position capture (see Table 46C: Direction Settings). Bits 8 [Ext Filt ], 9 [Ext Filt ], [Ext Filt 3], and [Ext Filt 4] configure a filter for the digital input and (seetable 46D: Filter Settings). The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. 47 Port Regis Ctrl Configures the registration control for port. Set bit [Arm Request] to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bit [DisArm Req] to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. Options Values Phase Level Phase Loss Quad Loss Encdr Missing Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options DI Filt bit3 DI Filt bit DI Filt bit DI Filt bit RL Dir Fwd RL Dir Rev RL Trig Edg RL Trig Edg RL Trig Src RL Trig Src RL EncdrSel Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Table 46A: Trigger Source Settings Bit Digital Input AND Encoder (Primary Encoder) Z Phase Digital Input 3 (default setting) Digital Input Encoder (Primary Encoder) Z Phase Table 46B: Edge Selection Settings Bit 4 3 Capture position on rising edge Capture position on falling edge Capture position on both edges Disable capture Table 46C: Direction Settings Bit 6 5 Disable capture Capture position during Reverse rotation Capture position during Forward rotation Capture position during either rotation Table 46D: Filter Settings Bit 9 8 Input Filter Setting Filter disabled ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter 6 ns filter 7 ns filter 8 ns filter (default setting) 9 ns filter ns filter ns filter ns filter 3 ns filter 4 ns filter 5 ns filter Disarm Req Arm Request Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True = False = True
3-36 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 48 Port Regis Stat Indicates the registration control status of port. Bit [Armed] indicates the registration latch is armed. Bit [Found] indicates the registration event has triggered the latch. Options 49 Fdbk Option ID Displays information about the Feedback Option. Bits 5- indicate Module ID Number. Bits -6 indicate Version Number. Bits 5-3 indicate Revision Number High. Bits - indicate Revision Number Low. Hexadecimal indicates resolver, hexadecimal indicates old high-resolution board, and hexadecimal 4 indicates new high-resolution board. 5 FB Opt Posit Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from the feedback option card port. 5 FB Opt Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from the feedback option card port. 53 Opt Regis Ltch Displays the registration data of the feedback option card port. The registration data is the position reference counter value latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by the Par P54 [Opt Regis Cnfg]. Options: RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 3-bit Floating Point 3-bit 54 Opt Regis Cnfg Configures the registration latch for port of the feedback option card. Bits 3 [RL Trig Edg] and 4 [RL Trig Edg] select which trigger edges signal the position (see Table 54A: Trigger Source Settings). Bits 5 [RL Dir Rev] and 6 [RL Dir Fwd] set the direction of position capture (see Table 54B: Direction Settings). Bits 8 [RL Filt bit] - [RL Filt bit3] configure a digital filter for the registration trigger signal. This filter can be used to reject spurious noise. The filter works by waiting a programmed time before deciding that the signal is valid. This waiting imposes a mandatory delay in the registration signal. The filter delay is programmable in increments of nanoseconds from (or no delay) up to 7 nanoseconds. Options 55 Opt Regis Ctrl Configures the registration control on port of the feedback option card. Set bit [Arm Request] to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bit [DisArm Req] to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. Values Armed Found Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True N N NNN N N NNN N NNN N NNN Module ID No. Version No. Revision No. High RL Filt bit3 RL Filt bit RL Filt bit RL Filt bit RL Dir Fwd RL Dir Rev RL Trig Edg RL Trig Edg Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Table 54A: Trigger Source Settings Bit 4 3 Capture position on rising edge Capture position on falling edge Capture position on both edges Disable capture Revision No. Low Table 54B: Direction Settings Bit 6 5 Disable capture Capture position during Reverse rotation Capture position during Forward rotation Capture position during either rotation = False = True Options Disarm Req Arm Request Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-37 Name No. Description 56 Opt Regis Stat Indicates the registration control status on port of the feedback option card. Bit [Armed] indicates the registration latch is armed. Bit [Found] indicates the registration event has triggered the latch. Options 59 Hi Res Config Specifies the configuration options for the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option. Bit 5 [Hi Res Dir] determines the counting direction. If clear, the direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down. Bits [SmplRate bt] -5 [SmplRate bt3] configure the sample interval for measuring speed (See Table 59: Encoder Sample Interval). Increasing the encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed. Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds. Values Found Armed Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True Options SmplRate bt3 SmplRate bt SmplRate bt SmplRate bt SW Reset Hi Res Dir Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True Table 59: Encoder Sample Interval Bit 5 4 3 Encoder Sample Interval Settings.5 ms.5 ms (min. setting). ms.5 ms. ms (default setting).5 ms 3. ms 3.5 ms 4. ms 4.5 ms 5. ms 5.5 ms 6. ms (max. setting) 6. ms 6. ms 6. ms 6 Hi Res Status Indicates faults on the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option. Bit 8 [Open Wire] indicates an open wire fault. The feedback option card checks for a pre-determined constant value. If this value is not within tolerances, an open wire fault is declared. A quadrature check is also done. If an error occurs during the check, the open wire check is aborted. If 3 quadrature errors occur in succession, the open wire check will complete and the constant value checked again. If this value is not within tolerances, the fault is declared. Bit 9 [Power Fail] indicates the failure of the power supply. Bit [Diag Fail] indicates the option board failed its power-up diagnostic test. The pattern on the FPGA must be identical to the pattern written from the DSP, or the board status test will fail. Bit [Msg Checksum] indicates a message checksum fault. The check sum associated with the Heidanhain encoder must be correct and acknowledged by the feedback option card. Bit [Time Out Err] indicates a RS-485 time-out fault. This check requires information to be sent from the encoder to the feedback option card within a specified time. Typical times are about clock cycles before and error is detected. This check is done only at power-up. Options Time Out Err Msg Checksum Diag Fail Power Fail Open Wire Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
3-38 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 6 Hi Res TP Sel Selects data displayed by Par 6 [Hi Res TP Data]. Options: H Edge Time - Latency counter value, not used for Hi-Resolution Feedback Option. H dedge - Change in edge counts for one 5 microsecond update. At constant speed, this value should be constant. H dtime - Change in update time. This value should be constant, 5 microseconds. H EPR - This value should be,48,576 counts per revolution - this is a constant value. H dtheta - This is a scaled value of option. Ho DeltaErr - Derivative of option. 6 Hi Res TP Data Displays data selected by Par 6 [Hi Res TP Sel]. 3 4 5 6 7 -/+3768 Zero Zero H Edge Time H dedge H dtime H EPR H Edge Mode H dtheta H DeltaErr Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 66 Reslvr Config Configures options for the resolver option card at port. Setting bit [Cable Tune] enables the cable tuning test, resetting the bit to zero disables the test. Bits [Resolution ] and 3 [Resolution ] select the feedback resolution (see Table 66A: Resolution Settings). This determines the number of significant bits that are calculated in the value of parameter 5 [FB Opt Posit]. It does not affect the number of counts created per resolver revolution (see Table 66B: Resolution Setting and Least Significant Bits Used). Also, the resolution sets a limit on the maximum tracking speed (see Table 66C: Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed). Setting bit 4 [Energize] energizes the resolver, resetting the bit to zero de-energizes the resolver. Bit 5 [Resolver Dir] determines the counting direction. If clear, the direction is forward or up. If set, the direction is reverse or down. Bit 9 [Edge Time] configures the method of sampling used by the Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Setting the bit chooses "Edge to Edge" sampling, while resetting the bit to zero chooses "Simple Difference" sampling. "Simple Difference" sampling calculates speed by examining the difference between pulse counts over a fixed sample time. "Edge to Edge" sampling adjusts the sample time to synchronize with the position count updates from the daughter card - improving the accuracy of the speed calculation. Bits [SmplRate bt] through 5 [SmplRate bt3] configure the sample interval for measuring speed (See Table 66D: Encoder Sample Interval). Increasing the encoder sample interval improves speed measurement near zero speed. Decreasing allows the speed control regulator to perform with high gains at high speeds. Options SmplRate bt3 SmplRate bt SmplRate bt SmplRate bt Edge Time Resolver Dir Energize Resolution Resolution Cable Tune Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True Table 66A: Resolution Settings Bit 3 Resolution bit resolution bit resolution (default setting) 4 bit resolution 6 bit resolution Table 66B: Resolution Setting and Least Significant Bits Used Resolution LSB Not Used Parameter 5 Increments by bit All bits used bit LSB not used 4 4 bit 4 LSB not used 8 6 bit 6 LSB not used 6 Table 66C: Resolution and Resolver Tracking Speed Resolution Tracking Speed Tracking Speed Tracking Speed for X Resolver for X Resolver for X5 Resolver bit 55 K-rpm 7.5 K-rpm K-rpm bit 3.8 K-rpm 6.9 K-rpm.76 K-rpm 4 bit 348 rpm 74 rpm 696 rpm 6 bit 9 rpm 45 rpm 8 rpm Table 66D: Encoder Sample Interval Bit 5 4 3 Encoder Sample Interval Settings.5 ms.5 ms (min. setting). ms.5 ms. ms (default setting).5 ms 3. ms 3.5 ms 4. ms 4.5 ms 5. ms 5.5 ms 6. ms (max. setting) 6. ms 6. ms 6. ms
Programming and Parameters 3-39 Name No. Description Values 67 Reslvr Status Indicates the status of the resolver option card port. Bit [-Cable Tune] indicates that the cable tuning test is active. Bit [-Tune Result] indicates the tuning parameter type. When set, it indicates the tuning is using the parameter database. When cleared, it indicates the tuning is using derived data. Bit [-Mtr Turning] indicates that the motor is turning. Bit 4 [Energized] indicates the resolver is energized. Bit 8 [Open Wire] indicates a problem with the cable (open circuit). Bit 9 [Power Supply] indicates a problem with the option card's power supply. Bit [Diag Fail] indicates the option card has failed its power-up diagnostics. Options Select OK Diag Fail Power Supply Open Wire Energized -Cable Comp -Mtr Turning -Tune Result -Cable Tune Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 68 Reslvr TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 69 [Reslvr TP Data]. 69 Reslvr TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 68 [Reslvr TP Sel]. Options: 7 Reslvr SpdRatio Specifies the speed ratio for the resolver option card port. The speed ratio comes from Options: the following formula. Speed ratio = electrical revolutions / mechanical revolutions = pole count /. 7 Reslvr Carrier Specifies the resolver carrier frequency for the resolver option card port. 7 Reslvr In Volts Specifies the resolver input voltage for the resolver option card port. 73 Rslvr XfrmRatio Specifies the resolver transform ratio for the resolver option card port. = False = True 3 Zero Zero 4 R EPR R Edge Time 5 R Edge Mode R dedge 6 R dtheta R dtime 7 R DeltaErr 3-bit poles (x) Poles (x) 4 8 Poles (x4) 4 Poles (x) 5 Poles(x5) 6 Poles (x3) 3 Hz / Volt../3.8../4.95 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit Floating Point Floating Point 74 Reslvr CableBal Specifies the resolver cable balance for the resolver option card port.../55. Floating Point 75 Reslvr Type Sel Specifies the type of resolver used. 76 FB Opt Posit Displays the position feedback (accumulator) from port of the feedback option card. 77 FB Opt Spd Fdbk Displays the speed feedback from port of the feedback option card. Options: 79 Opt Regis Ltch Displays registration data from port of the feedback option card. This data is the value of the position reference counter, latched by the external strobes. The strobe signal used to trigger the latch is configurable by Par 8 [Opt Regis Cnfg]. 3 4 5 6 7 RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Disabled Disabled 8 T4/87x 9 36Ax 46v T4/87x T4/87x5 MPL 46v 3 Siemens FT6 4 AmciRXC7 PrkrHn ZX6 3-bit Floating Point 3-bit
3-4 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 8 Opt Regis Cnfg Configures the registration latch on the feedback option card. Bits 3 [RL Trig Edg] and 4 [RL Trig Edg] select which edges signal the position (see Table 8A: Edge Selection Settings). Bits 5 [RL Dir Rev] and 6 [RL Dir Fwd] set the direction of position capture (see Table 8B: Direction Settings). Linkable Read-Write Data Type Options RL Dir Fwd RL Dir Rev RL Trig Edg RL Trig Edg Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Table 8A: Edge Selection Settings Bit 4 3 Capture position on rising edge Capture position on falling edge Capture position on both edges Disable capture 8 Opt Regis Ctrl Configures the registration control for port on the feedback option card. Set bit [Arm Request] to arm the registration logic for the next trigger event. The particular latch will be armed and ready to be strobed on the next occurrence of the trigger input. Set bit [DisArm Req] to disarm the registration logic for next trigger event. Options 8 Opt Regis Stat Displays the registration control status of port on the feedback option card. Bit [Armed] indicates the when the registration latch has been armed. Bit [Found] indicates that the registration event has triggered the latch. 86 Linear Status Indicates faults on the Multi Device Interface (MDI). Bit 8 [Open Wire] indicates an open wire fault. 87 Linear TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Linear Feedback data displayed in Par 88 [Linear TP Options: Data]. Zero - Displays a value of zero. L Edge Time - Displays the latency or edge time (the time since the last update of Par 76 [FB Opt Posit]). L dedge - Displays the change in Par 76 [FB Opt Posit] since the last feedback sample. 3 L DTime - Displays the change in time since the last feedback sample. Note: the sample rate is, counts per second ( Mhz). 4 L EPR - Displays the change in edges per motor revolution. This number is the same value in Par 9 [Linear CPR]. 6 L dtheta - Displays the numerator term for speed calculation. This number divided by change in time (3 L DTime ) is the calculated per unit speed for the linear feedback sensor. 88 Linear TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 87 [Linear TP Sel]. Table 8B: Direction Settings Bit 6 5 Disable capture Capture position during Reverse rotation Capture position during Forward rotation Capture position during either rotation Disarm Req Arm Request Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Found Armed Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Open Wire Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 -/+3768 = False = True Zero Zero 4 L EPR L Edge Time 5 L Edge Mode L dedge 6 L dtheta L dtime 7 L DeltaErr = False = True = False = True = False = True 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-4 Name Description No. 89 Lin Update Rate Sets the sample rate for the linear channel on the Multi Device Interface (MDI) feedback option. Values Options: 9 Linear CPR Specifies the change in Par 76 [FB Opt Posit] for one revolution of the motor shaft. This value is used to scale the calculated speed, based on the change in feedback position. Units are count per motor revolution (CPR). 97 Output Curr Disp Displays measured RMS motor current with a resolution of / amperes. CPR / Amps../9999.9 Comm Scale: x 98 Elapsed Run Time Hrs Displays the total time that the drive has been running (inverter power devices active). with a resolution of / hour. This parameter is saved in power EE non-volatile memory../49496736. Comm Scale: x 99 Elapsed MWHrs Displays the total energy the drive has consumed or produced. Calculated from the absolute magnitude of the product of motor speed and motor torque (power), accumulated over time. This value will increase in both regen and motoring modes of operation. 3 Motor Spd Fdbk Displays measured motor speed information from the selected feedback device. 3 Motor Speed Ref Displays the speed reference value, after the limit function. This is the input to the error calculator and speed regulator. 3 Spd Reg PI Out Displays the output of the speed regulator. This is the input to torque control. A value of. represents base torque of the motor. 33 Motor Torque Ref Displays the reference value of motor torque. The actual value of the motor torque is within 5% of this value. MWHrs../49496736. Comm Scale: x. msec.5 msec 3.5 msec. msec 4. msec RPM. -/+4. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Comm Scale: RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-4 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 34 Limit Status Displays the limit status of conditions that may be limiting the current reference or torque reference. Bit [+MCS Iq Lim] indicates that torque producing current is at its positive limit. Bit [+MCS Ws Lim] indicates that flux producing torque is at its positive limit. Bit [ Ia from +] indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the positive direction - refer to Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 3 [+Iq Calc] indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its positive limit. Bit 4 [+Current Lim] indicates that the current reference has reached the positive Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 [Mtr Current Lim]. Bit 5 [+DriveProtOL] indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 343 [OL OpnLp CurrLim]. Bit 6 [+DriveProtCL] indicates that the current reference has reached the positive current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 344 [OL ClsLp CurrLim]. Bit 8 [+Torq Limit] indicates that the torque reference has reached the Positive Torque Limit set by Par 5 [Torque Pos Limit]. Bit 9 [Mtrng PwrLim] indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Motoring Power Limit set by Par 7 [Mtring Power Lim]. Bit [+Torq CurLim] indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit [Atune Tq Lim] indicates that the torque reference is being limited by Par 9 [Atune Torq Ref]. Bit [+ Torq Ena] indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 57 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 9 [Torq Ref En] is off. Bit 3 [+ Curr Ena] indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 57 [Logic Ctrl State] bit [CurrRef En] is off. Bit 6 [-MCS Iq Lim] indicates that torque producing current is at its negative limit. Bit 7 [-MCS Ws Lim] indicates that flux producing torque is at its negative limit. Bit 8 [ Iq from -] indicates that torque producing current is limited to zero from the negative direction - refer to Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 9 [-Iq Calc] indicates the calculation for torque producing current has reached its negative limit. Bit [-Current Lim] indicates that the current reference has reached the negative Motor Current Limit set by Par 356 [Mtr Current Lim]. Bit [-DriveProtOL] indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 343 [OL OpnLp CurrLim]. Bit [-DriveProtCL] indicates that the current reference has reached the negative current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload, shown in Par 344 [OL ClsLp CurrLim]. Bit 4 [-Torq Limit] indicates that the torque reference has reached the Negative Torque Limit set by Par 6 [Torque Neg Limit]. Bit 5 [Regen PwrLim] indicates that the torque reference is being limited by the Regenerative Power Limit set by Par 8 [Regen Power Lim]. Bit 6 [-Torq CurLim] indicates that current reference has reached the Actual Torque Producing Current Limit set by Par 353 [Iq Actual Lim]. Bit 7 [Bus Reg Tq Lim] indicates the bus voltage regulator is active and limiting the regenerative torque. Bit 8 [- Torq Ena] indicates that the torque reference is limited to zero because Par 57 [Logic Ctrl State] bit 9 [Torq Ref En] is off. Bit 9 [- Curr Ena] indicates that the current reference is limited to zero because Par 57 [Logic Ctrl State] bit [CurrRef En] is off. Options - Curr Ena - Torq Ena Bus Reg Lim -Torq CurLim Regen PwrLim -Torq Lim -SpdReg Open -DriveProtCL -DriveProtOL -Current Lim -Iq Calc Iq from - -MCS Ws Lim -MCS Iq Lim + Curr Ena + Torq Ena Atune Tq Lim +Torq CurLim Mtrng PwrLim +Torq Limit +SpdReg Open +DriveProtCL +DriveProtOL +Current Lim +Iq Calc Iq from + +MCS Ws Lim +MCS Iq Lim Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 35 Mtr TorqCurr Ref Displays the torque current reference present at the output of the current rate limiter. % is equal to per unit (pu) rated motor torque. 36 DC Bus Voltage Displays measured bus voltage. 37 Output Voltage Displays RMS line-to-line fundamental motor voltage. This data is averaged and updated every 5 milliseconds. 38 Output Current Displays measured RMS motor current. 39 % Motor Flux Displays the motor flux in % of nominal. 3 Output Freq Displays the motor stator frequency. Comm Scale: 3 Output Power Motor Power is the calculated product of the torque reference and motor speed feedback. A 5mS filter is applied to this result. Positive values indicate motoring power; negative values indicate regenerative power. 3 MotorFluxCurr FB Displays the measured per unit motor flux producing current. : P.U.. -/+8. Volt../. Volt../3. Amps../. %../. = 496 Hz. -/+5. Hp. -/+9999. P.U.../. Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-43 Name No. Description 33 Heatsink Temp Displays the measured temperature of the drive's heatsink. 34 VPL Firmware Rev Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive's Velocity Position Loop (VPL) software. 35 VPL Build Number Displays the build number of the drive's Velocity Position Loop (VPL) software. 36 SynchLink Status Indicates status of SynchLink functions. Bit [FB Opt Prsnt] indicates the presence of an optional feedback daughter card. Bit [Encdr Prsnt] indicates the presence of Encoder. Bit [Encdr Prsnt] indicates the presence of Encoder. Bit 3 [In Sync] indicates SynchLink communications is synchronized. Bit 4 [Tx Active] indicates TX frames are being transmitted downstream from this node. Bit 5 [Rx Active] indicates RX frames are being received from nodes upstream. Bit 5 [Rx Data Enbl] indicates received data is being updated. Values degc. -3./..6./99.99 Comm Scale: x / Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 6-bit Options Rx Data Enbl Reset Req d Rx Active Tx Active In Sync Encdr Prsnt Encdr Prsnt FB Opt Prsnt Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 37 SL System Time Displays the SynchLink system time counter. 38 Posit Spd Output Final output of the position regulator. µsec /48575 RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Comm Scale: 3 Exception Event Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. Configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the Fault/Alarm Configuration group of the Utility file. Options PWM Asynchro Precharge Er MC Firmware PWM Short VPL/MC Comm OverCurrent Ground Fault Trans Desat Bus OverVolt MC Commissn Over Freq Inertia Test DSP Error DSP Mem Err Ext Fault In Inv OL Trip Inv OL Pend Inv OTmpTrip Inv OTmpPend Motor Stall Mtr OL Pend Mtr OL Trip Power Loss SLink Comm SLink HW Ctrl EE Mem FB Opt Loss FB Opt Loss Encdr Loss Encdr Loss SpdRef Decel Abs OverSpd Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 Exception Event Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. Configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the Fault/Alarm Configuration group of the Utility file. Options Lgx LinkChng Lgx Closed Lgx Timeout Lgx OutOfRun NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI NetLoss DPI DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P DPI Loss P No Ctrl Devc Interp Synch NonCnfgAlarm VoltFdbkLoss BusUnderVolt RidethruTime Slink Mult PowerEE Cksm BrakeOL Trip PSC Sys Flt PSC Sys Flt Ctrl EE Cksm MC Command +/- v Pwr Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 Exception Event3 Indicates the presence of certain drive anomalies. Configure the drive's response to these events by entering values in the parameters of the Fault/Alarm Configuration group of the Utility file. Options Posit Err -Hrd OvrTrvl +Hrd OvrTrvl -Sft OvrTrvl +Sft OvrTrvl HH PwrBdTemp HH PwrEE Er HHPrChrgCntc HH PwrBd Prc HH Drv Ovrld HH FanFdbkLs HH BusWtchDg HH BusCRC Er HH BusLinkLs HH BusComDly HH InPhaseLs Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 3-bit = False = True = False = True = False = True
3-44 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 33 Fault Status Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. These events are from Par 3 [Exception Event] Options PWM Asynchro Precharge Er MC Firmware PWM Short VPL/MC Comm OverCurrent Ground Fault Trans Desat Bus OverVolt MC Commissn Over Freq Inertia Test DSP Error DSP Mem Err Ext Fault In Inv OL Trip Inv OL Pend Inv OTmpTrip Inv OTmpPend Motor Stall Mtr OL Pend Mtr OL Trip Power Loss SLink Comm SLink HW Ctrl EE Mem FB Opt Loss FB Opt Loss Encdr Loss Encdr Loss SpdRef Decel Abs OverSpd Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 34 Fault Status Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. These events are from Par 3 [Exception Event]. Options Lgx LinkChng Lgx Closed Lgx Timeout Lgx OutOfRun NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI NetLoss DPI DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P DPI Loss P No Ctrl Devc Interp Synch NonCnfgAlarm VoltFdbkLoss BusUnderVolt RidethruTime Slink Mult PowerEE Cksm BrakeOL Trip PSC Sys Flt PSC Sys Flt Ctrl EE Cksm MC Command +/- v Pwr Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 35 Fault Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as fault conditions. Options Posit Err -Hrd OvrTrvl +Hrd OvrTrvl -Sft OvrTrvl +Sft OvrTrvl HH PwrBdTemp HH PwrEE Er HHPrChrgCntc HH PwrBd Prc HH Drv Ovrld HH FanFdbkLs HH BusWtchDg HH BusCRC Er HH BusLinkLs HH BusComDly HH InPhaseLs Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 36 Alarm Status Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. These events are from Par 3 [Exception Event]. Options PWM Asynchro Precharge Er MC Firmware PWM Short VPL/MC Comm OverCurrent Ground Fault Trans Desat Bus OverVolt MC Commissn Over Freq Inertia Test DSP Error DSP Mem Err Ext Fault In Inv OL Trip Inv OL Pend Inv OTmpTrip Inv OTmpPend Motor Stall Mtr OL Pend Mtr OL Trip Power Loss SLink Comm SLink HW Ctrl EE Mem FB Opt Loss FB Opt Loss Encdr Loss Encdr Loss SpdRef Decel Abs OverSpd Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 37 Alarm Status Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. These events are from Par 3 [Exception Event]. Options Lgx LinkChng Lgx Closed Lgx Timeout Lgx OutOfRun NetLoss DPI6 NetLoss DPI5 NetLoss DPI4 NetLoss DPI3 NetLoss DPI NetLoss DPI DPI Loss P6 DPI Loss P5 DPI Loss P4 DPI Loss P3 DPI Loss P DPI Loss P No Ctrl Devc Interp Synch NonCnfgAlarm VoltFdbkLoss BusUnderVolt RidethruTime Slink Mult PowerEE Cksm BrakeOL Trip PSC Sys Flt PSC Sys Flt Ctrl EE Cksm MC Command +/- v Pwr Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 38 Alarm Status 3 Indicates the occurrence of exception events that have been configured as alarm conditions. Options Posit Err -Hrd OvrTrvl +Hrd OvrTrvl -Sft OvrTrvl +Sft OvrTrvl HH PwrBdTemp HH PwrEE Er HHPrChrgCntc HH PwrBd Prc HH Drv Ovrld HH FanFdbkLs HH BusWtchDg HH BusCRC Er HH BusLinkLs HH BusComDly HH InPhaseLs Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-45 Name No. Description 39 Fault TP Sel Enter or write a value to select Fault data displayed in Par 33 [Fault TP Data]. 33 Fault TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 39 [Fault TP Sel]. Values Options: 33 Fault Stop Mode Displays the action taken by the drive during the last fault. When a fault occurs, an action Options: is taken as a result of that fault. 335 Abs OverSpd Lim Sets an incremental speed above Par 3 [Fwd Speed Limit] and below Par 3 [Rev Speed Limit] that is allowable before the drive indicates its speed is out of range. 336 Service Factor Sets the minimum level of current that causes a motor overload trip under continuous operation. Current levels below this value will not result in an overload trip. For example, a service factor of.5 implies continuous operation up to 5% of nameplate motor current. 337 Mtr IT Curr Min Sets the minimum current threshold for the motor overload (I T) function. The value indicates the minimum current at the minimum speed, Par 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min], and Min Max: these are the first current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by Par 336 [Service Factor]. 338 Mtr IT Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload (I T) function. The value indicates the minimum speed below the minimum current threshold, Par 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min], and these are the first current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor Par 336 [Service Factor]. For more information, please see Motor Overload on page C-3. 339 Mtr IT Calibrat Sets the current calibration level for the motor overload (I T) function. The value indicates the current level that the drive will fault at this current in 6 seconds. 34 Mtr IT Trp ThrH Displays the trip threshold current for the motor overload (I T) function. The value depends on the motor speed, and is calculated from the minimum current, Par 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min], the minimum speed, Par 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min], and the motor service factor, Par 336 [Service Factor]. Zero Zero Mtr OL Input Abs OverSpd 3 Mtr OL Outpt EE Pwr State 4 MtrStallTime 3 Inv DataStat 5 MC Handshake 4 Run Time Err 6 VPL Handshak 5 LowBus Thres 7 MC Diag 6 LowBus Detct 8 PwrLossState 7 PwrLosBusVlt 9 volt loss 8 MCPLosBusVlt PwrEE Chksum 9 MC Flt Reset Db Read Cnt VPL FltReset Db Read Cnt VPL TaskErr 3 Db Read Cnt3 -/+ Ignore Ignore 3 Flt RampStop Alarm 4 FltCurLimStop FltCoastStop RPM 35.8./75. Comm Scale: Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. 343 OL OpnLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Open Loop Inverter Overload (OL) function. This function sets this current limit based on stator current feedback and the current ratings of the drive - continuous and short term (three-second rating). Typically the drive will have a sixty-second rating of % of continuous current and a three-second rating at 5% of the continuous current. Under normal operating conditions, the open loop function sets this current limit to the short term (three-second) rating. If the function detects an overload, it lowers the limit to the continuous level. After a period of time (typically one to three minutes), the function returns the limit to the short term rating. 344 OL ClsLp CurrLim Displays the current limit set by the Closed Loop Inverter Overload (OL) function. This function will set a current limit level based on the values in Par 358 [Iq Ref Limited], Par 33 [Heatsink Temp] and the thermal characteristics of the drive. Under normal operating conditions, the function typically sets the limit at 5% of the continuous drive rating. If the function determines that the power device junction temperature is approaching maximum, it will reduce this limit to the level required to prevent additional heating of the inverter. This level could be as low as the continuous rating of the drive. If the inverter temperature decreases, the function will raise the limit to a higher level. Disable this protection by setting bit 3 [OL ClsLpDsbl] of Par 53 [Control Options]. P.U..5./. P.U..5.5/. P.U...5/. P.U.../4. P.U..5.5/. P.U. 8../8. P.U. 8../8. Linkable Read-Write Data Type
3-46 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 345 Drive OL JnctTmp Displays the calculated junction temperature of the power semiconductors in the inverter. The calculation uses the values of Par 33 [Heatsink Temp], Par 358 [Iq Ref Limited], and inverter thermal characteristics contained in the power EE memory. If this value exceeds the maximum junction temperature (visible in Par 348 [Drive OL TP Data] when Par 347 [Drive OL TP Sel] = fjuntmprmax ), two faults occur: Inverter Overtemperature Fault (fault code 5), and Junction Overtemperature Fault - indicated by bit 7 [Jnc OverTemp] of Par 346 [Drive OL Status]. degc. -5./3. 346 Drive OL Status Indicates the status of various overload (OL) conditions. Bit [NTC Shorted] indicates the Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) device has a short circuit. Bit [NTC Open] indicates the NTC has an open circuit. Bit [HS OverTemp] indicates that the heatsink temperature is above 5C for ratings.-.a, 5C for 4-34A, or C for 4-5A. Bit 3 [HS Pending] indicates that the heatsink temperature is above 95C for ratings. -A, 5C for 4-34A, or 9C for 4-5A. Bit 4 [IT Trip] indicates the drive has exceed the 3 second rating of either the 5% normal duty rating or % of the heavy duty rating. Bit 5 [IT Pending] indicates the drive OL integrator is at 5% of the time out time. Bit 6 [IT Foldback] indicates the drive closed loop current limit is in a fold back condition. The value of the fold back is proportional to the calculated junction temperature. Bit 7 [Jnc Over Temp] indicates the junction temperature has exceeded the maximum temperature for the power semiconductor device. Options Jnc OverTemp IT Foldback IT Pending IT Trip HS Pending HS OverTemp NTC Open NTC Shorted Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 347 Drive OL TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the drive overload data displayed in Par 348 [Drive OL TP Options: Data]. 348 Drive OL TP Data Displays the value selected by Par 347 [Drive OL TP Sel]. 35 Iq Actual Ref Displays the value of motor current reference that is present at the output of the divide by flux calculation. 35 Iq Ref Trim Provides an external source to command, trim or offset the internal motor current reference. This value is summed with Par 35 [Iq Actual Ref] before the current limit is applied. Scaling is in per unit motor current. 35 Is Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable stator motor current. The range of allowable motor current is limited by the maximum drive current. Scaling is in per unit motor current. 353 Iq Actual Lim Displays the largest allowable torque producing (Iq) motor current. The range of allowable Iq motor current is limited by the maximum drive current and is adjusted by the motor flux current. Scaling is in per unit Iq motor current. 354 Iq Rate Limit Enter the maximum rate of change for Current Reference, in per unit current/ sec. Par 9 [Spd Reg BW] will be limited to /3 of this value. 355 Iq Rate Limited Displays the current reference output of the rate limiter. = False = True Zero Zero 3 figbtjuncase fabsiscurr 4 figbtwatts fdelta 5 iigbtpermod 3 fabsiqcurr 6 ffdthres 4 fol_l 7 ffdslope 5 fol_m 8 ffdjuncase 6 fol_k 9 ffdwatts 7 fol_g fmaxhsdegc 8 fol_intg 3 fcsimp 9 fcl_intg 3 fcsfltr finvolclim 33 fpwmhz fjuncdegc 34 felechz fjuntmprmax 35 fmodidex 3 f6spucur 36 fboost 4 f6samp 37 ftotalwatts 5 f3spucur 38 fhsdegc 6 f3samp 39 iadconv 7 fratioinvmtr 3 Jct Temp 7S 8 fratiomtrinv 4 Jct Tmp HiHp 9 iconvertstat 4 Jct Tmp FWD figbtthres 43 HH Lss Intg figbtslope 44 HH PwrBdTemp figbtenergy. -/+. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.../8. P.U.../8. /Sec. 5./. P.U.. -/+8. Linkable Read-Write Data Type
Programming and Parameters 3-47 Name No. Description 356 Mtr Current Lim Sets the largest allowable motor stator current. The online maximum value of this parameter is Par [Motor NP FLA]. The online minimum value is 5% of the current indicated in Par 488 [Flux Current]. 358 Iq Ref Limited Sets the limit value for the motor torque producing current. 359 Motor Flux Est Q-axis motor voltage is divided by the motor frequency while field weakening is active. This is used to convert the torque command to a motor current (Iqs) command. 36 Min Flux Sets the smallest level of flux used to convert Par 33 [Motor Torque Ref] to a current reference above base speed. Values 36 Flx LpassFilt BW Sets the bandwidth of the filter that adjusts the response of the flux estimate used in the torque to current conversion. Since the field time constant varies between motors, a better control response may be obtained by adjusting the filter time constant. Normally this parameter is not changed unless a significant disturbance occurs as the motor enters field weakening AND Par 36 [Min Flux] is less than per unit. 363 Curr Ref TP Sel Enter or write a value to select current reference data displayed in Par 364 [Curr Ref TP Data]. 364 Curr Ref TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 363 [Curr Ref TP Sel]. Options: 365 Encdr Loss Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Encoder Loss exception event. Options: Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 366 Encdr Loss Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Encoder Loss exception event. Options: Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 367 FB Opt LossCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Feedback Option Loss exception Options: event. Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 368 FB Opt LossCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Feedback Option Loss exception Options: event. Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event P.U..5./4. P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. P.U..5.5/. R/S..5/. Zero Zero Iq Sum Iq Lim In 3 Iq Lim Out 4 Iq Rate Stat 5 Limited Flux 6 MtrCrLimStat 7 Lim'dMtrCrLm 8 Iq Act Limit 9 Iq Cal Gain P.U.. -/+8. FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Linkable Read-Write Data Type Min Lim Stat Iq Prescale IqtoIs Stat 3 Flux Status 4 Flux LPF Out 5 Is Per Unit 6 InPos IqLim 7 InNeg IqLim 8 Flx Filt Hld
3-48 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 369 Brake OL Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Brake Overload (OL) Trip exception Options: event. This event is triggered when a Dynamic Brake (DB) overload condition occurs. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 37 HiHp InPhsLs Cfg Default Selector for the input phase loss configuration. Options: Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 37 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Overload (OL) Trip exception Options: event. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 37 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Overload (OL) Pending Options: exception event. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 373 Motor Stall Time Enter a value to specify the time delay between when the drive detects a Motor Stall condition and when it declares the exception event. 374 Motor Stall Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor Stall exception event. Options: Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 Alarm Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Sec../3. 3 4 Ignore Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Linkable Read-Write Data Type
Programming and Parameters 3-49 Name No. Description Values 375 Inv OT Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Inverter Over-Temperature (OT) Options: Pending exception event. This event is triggered when the Inverter NTC (Temperature protection) function detects the heat-sink temperature reaches to the overload warning level. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 376 Inv OL Pend Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Inverter Overload (OL) Pending Options: exception event. This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current-Over-Time functions (Open Loop or Closed Loop) detects current and temperature at warning levels. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 377 Inv OL Trip Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an Inverter Overload (OL) Trip Options: exception event. This event is triggered when one of the Inverter Protection Current-Over-Time functions (Open Loop or Closed Loop) detects current and temperature at a fault level. Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 378 Interp Flt Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response when a Synchronization input to the Options: Interpolator has been lost or has become excessively irregular. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 379 Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to an External Input exception event. The Options: event is triggered by a digital input that is configured for auxiliary fault or auxiliary aux fault by choosing option Aux Fault or AuxFault Inv in Pars 838 [DigIn Sel], 839 [DigIn Sel], or 84 [DigIn 3 Sel]. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 38 PreChrg Err Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Precharge Error exception event. Options: Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Linkable Read-Write Data Type
3-5 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 38 MC Cmd Lim Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Motor-Controller (MC) Command Options: Limitation exception event. This event is triggered when the motor-controller detects limit of the command values used in the motor-controller, and returns the exception event to the Velocity Position Loop (VPL). Ignore Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 383 SL CommLoss Data Enter a value to determine what is done with the data received from SynchLink when a communication loss occurs. Zero Data - Resets data to zero Last State - Holds data in its last state Options: Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Last State Zero Data Last State Linkable Read-Write Data Type! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 383 [SL CommLoss Data] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state. You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 384 SL CommLoss Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to SynchLink communication loss. Refer Options: to Par 9 [SL Error Status] for possible causes of communication loss. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! 385 Lgx CommLossData Enter a value to configure what drive does with the data received from the DriveLogix controller when the connection is closed or times out. Zero Data - Resets data to zero Last State - Holds data in its last state! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 384 [SL CommLoss Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. Options: 386 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the DriveLogix processor being in Options: Non-Run mode. Non-Run modes include Program, Remote-Program and Faulted. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 Last State Zero Data Last State ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 385 [Lgx CommLossData] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to hold the data in its last state. You can set this parameter so that the drive resets the data to zero. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 386 [Lgx OutOfRunCnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
Programming and Parameters 3-5 Name No. Description Values 387 Lgx Timeout Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a Controller to Drive connection Options: timeout, as detected by the drive. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Linkable Read-Write Data Type! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 387 [Lgx Timeout Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 388 Lgx Closed Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the controller closing the Controller to Options: Drive connection. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 388 [Lgx Closed Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 389 Lgx LinkChngCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to Controller to Drive default links being Options: removed. A default link is a link automatically set up when a communication format is selected for the Controller to Drive connection. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 389 [Lgx LinkChngCnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage.
3-5 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 39 SL MultErr Cnfg Enter a value to configure the Drive Module's response to SynchLink Multiplier error. Options: Refer to Par 34 [SL Mult State] for possible causes for multiplier errors. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Linkable Read-Write Data Type! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 39 [SL MultErr Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 39 DPI CommLoss Cfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to the failure of a DPI port. Options: Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 39 [DPI CommLoss Cfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 39 NetLoss DPI Cnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to communication fault from a network Options: card at a DPI port. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 Flt RampStop - Configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 4 FltCurLimStp - Configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 3 4 FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. Parameter 39 [NetLoss DPI Cnfg] lets you determine the action of the drive if communications are disrupted. By default this parameter causes the drive to fault and coast to a stop. You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run. Precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does not create hazards of injury or equipment damage. 393 BusUndervoltCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to DC Bus voltage falling below the Options: minimum value. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop
Programming and Parameters 3-53 Name No. Description Values 394 VoltFdbkLossCnfg Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a communication error between Motor Options: Control (MC) and the motor voltage feedback board. Ignore - Configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - Configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - Configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event 396 User Data Int General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 397 User Data Int General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 398 User Data Int 3 General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 399 User Data Int 4 General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 4 Rated Amps This displays the currenting rating of the inverter. The drive automatically sets this at power up. 4 Rated Volts This displays the name plate voltage rating of the inverter. The drive automatically sets this at power up. Min Max: 4 PWM Frequency Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output of the drive. Drive derating may occur at higher carrier frequencies. For derating information, refer to the PowerFlex 7S Phase I Control - Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM. The default is dependant on the power structure of the drive. 43 Voltage Class Sets the drive configuration for high or low voltage class (I.e. a 4 or 48V ac drive). Allows a choice of configuration and affects many drive parameters including drive rated current, voltage, power, over loads and maximum PWM carrier frequency. Options: 44 Dead Time The time delay between turning off and turning on an upper device and a lower device in the power structure. This parameter is set at power up and is not user adjustable. 45 Dead Time Comp The amount of voltage correction used to compensate for the loss of voltage during dead time. Do not adjust. Contact factory for alternative settings. 46 Power Loss Mode Enter a value to configure the drive's response to a loss of input power. Input voltage Options: below the value specified in Par 48 [Power Loss Level]. Enter a value of to make the drive coast (supply no current to the motor) during the power loss time (specified by Par 47 [Power Loss Time]. Enter a value of to make the drive continue "normal" operation during the power loss time. Enter a value of 5 to make the drive provide only motor flux current during the power loss time. 47 Power Loss Time Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is detected. 48 Power Loss Level Sets the bus voltage level at which ride-through begins and modulation ends. When bus voltage falls below this level, the drive prepares for an automatic reset. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the high voltage setting for the voltage class. For example: on a 4-48V drive. FltCoastStop Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Amps../. Volt 48 75/69 khz. (Fr 5, 6, 9) 4. (Fr -4)./5. (. Fr 5, 6, 9) 3 3 High Voltage Low Voltage High Voltage µsec 5../. % / 3 4 5 Coast Coast Continue Flux Only Sec.. 6. %. 5/95 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit. 48Vac = 5Vdc 49 Line Undervolts Controls the level of bus voltage that is needed to complete precharge and sets the level for undervoltage alarm/fault detection. Enter a percentage of the bus voltage derived from the value in Par 4 [Rated Volts]. For example: on a 48V drive. % 6.5./9..65 48Vac = 48Vdc 4 PreChrg TimeOut Sets the time duration of precharge. If bus voltage does not stabilize within this amount of time, a Precharge Error exception event occurs. Sec 3.. 8.
3-54 Programming and Parameters Name Description No. 4 PreChrg Control Must equal Enbl PrChrg to allow the drive to exit precharge and begin to run. Link this parameter to a controller output word to coordinate the precharge of multiple drives. 4 Power EE TP Sel Enter or write a value to select drive power EEPROM data displayed in Par 43 [Power EE TP Data]. Values Options: Zero Enbl PrChrg Hold PrChrg Enbl PrChrg Linkable Read-Write Data Type Options: Zero Mw Hrs Accum 4 Inv Rated Kw 36 IGBTs per Pk 48 Diode JC Tr 6 DB Ambt Tmax 7 Mtr IR Vdrop 84 Mtr IR Vdrop Volt Class 3 Inv High Vlt 5 Inv Rated V 37 GBT Rated V 49 Diode JC Tc 6 Convt Type 73 Mtr Id Ref 85 Mtr Id Ref Assy Rev 4 6 Inv Rated A 38 IGBT Rated A 5 GBT Tjmax 6 DC Bus Induc 74 HH Data Rev 86 HH Extr Data 3 ASA S/N 5 Fan/Pwr Cntl 7 Inv min Amp 39 IGBT V Thres 5 HS Max DegC 63 AC Inp Induc 75 HH Dev Type 87 HH Volt Indx 4 Manuf Year 6 Temp Sensor 8 inv 3sec Amp 4 IGBT Slope R 5 DB IGBT Amp 64 Precharg Res 76 HH Serial # 88 HH Size Indx 5 Manuf Month 7 Phs AmpScale 9 SW OverC Amp 4 IGBT Sw Engy 53 DB ohms 65 PrechThrm Tc 77 HH Test Date 89 HH Option 6 Manuf Day 8 Gnd AmpScale 3 DC Bus Cap 4 IGBT JC Tres 54 DB E Jo/degC 66 Mtr NP Units 78 HH Vcn Code 9 HH Hrd Prdct 7 Tst ProcStat 9 Bus VltScale 3 Min PWM Khz 43 IGBT JC Tc 55 DB EB C/Wat 67 Mtr NP Power 79 HH CrsCnc ID 9 HH H/W Mdfy 8 Life PwrCycl Sml PS Watts 3 Max PWM Khz 44 IGBT CS Tres 56 DB B Jo/degC 68 Mtr NP Volts 8 HH P/B ID 9 HH V/Amp 9 Life Pwrup Sml PS Min V 33 Dfl PWM Khz 45 IGBT CS Tc 57 DB BA C/Watt 69 Mtr NP Amps 8 HH S/W ID 93 HH s/amp Life RunTime Lrg PS Watts 34 PWM Dead us 46 Diode V Thrs 58 DB Elem Tmax 7 Mtr NP Freq 8 HH P/B Rev 94 HH Scale Kw Accum 3 Lrg PS Min V 35 Drive Frame 47 Diode SlopeR 59 DB Body Tmax 7 Mtr NP RPM 83 HH S/W Rev 43 Power EE TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 4 [Power EE TP Sel]. -/+ 44 Brake/Bus Cnfg Configures the brake and bus operation of the drive. Set bit [Brake Enable] to enable the operation of the internal brake transistor. Set bit [Brake Extern] to configure the brake to use an external resistor. Set bit [BusRef High] to select the "high" voltage setting as the turn-on point for the Bus Voltage Regulator. The "high" setting brake operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of Par 45 [BusReg/Brake Ref], and the Bus Voltage Regulator operation starts when bus voltage reaches the value of 45 [BusReg/Brake Ref] plus 4.5%. With the "low" setting both brake and regulator operation start when bus voltage reaches the value of 45 [BusReg/Brake Ref]. Set bit 3 [Bus Reg En] to enable the Bus Voltage Regulator. The output of the Bus Voltage Regulator is summed with Par 8 [Regen Power Lim] and fed into the Power Limit Calculator. It, in effect, reduces negative torque references when the bus voltage is too high. Options Bus Reg En Bus Ref High Brake Extern Brake Enable Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 45 BusReg/Brake Ref Sets the turn-on voltage for the bus regulator and brakes. Enter a percentage of the high voltage setting for the voltage class. For example, on a 4-48V drive: 48= VDC 46 Brake PulseWatts Limits the power delivered to the external Dynamic Brake (DB) resistor for one second, without exceeding the rated element temperature. You may change the value of this parameter only if you have selected an external DB resistor (set bit [Brake Extern] of Par 44 [Brake/Bus Cnfg]). If this rating is not available from the resistor vendor, you can approximate it with this equation: Par 46 [Brake PulseWatts] = 75, x Weight, where Weight equals the weight of the resistor wire element in pounds (not the entire weight of the resistor). Another equation you can use is: Par 46 [Brake PulseWatts] = Time Constant x Brake Watts; where Time Constant equals the amount of time to reach 63% of its rated temperature the maximum power applied, and Brake Watts is the maximum power rating of the resistor. 47 Brake Watts Sets the maximum continuous power reference for the Dynamic Brake (DB). You may change the value of this parameter only if you have selected and external DB resistor (set bit [Brake Extern] of Par 44 [Brake/Bus Cnfg]). %..57.8 Watt../. Watt../5.
Programming and Parameters 3-55 Name No. Description 48 Brake TP Sel Enter or write a value to select the drive overload data displayed in Par 49 [Brake TP Data]. 49 Brake TP Data Displays the data selected by Par 48 [Brake TP Sel]. Values Options: 4 Iqs Integ Freq Sets the break frequency of the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. This and Par 4 [Iqs Reg P Gain] determine the integral gain for the q-axis current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 4 Iqs Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 43 Iqs Rate Limit Sets the limit of the rate of change for the torque producing (q-axis) current regulator. Do not change this parameter. Use Par 355 [Iq Rate Limited] to control the q-axis current rate limit.../. Comm Scale: x %/ms 8../8. Comm Scale: x 44 Flux Ratio Ref % Active only in the Field Oriented Control (FOC) control mode (when Par 485 [Motor Ctrl 99.99 Mode] equals FOC ), when activated (Par 5 [FOC Mode Config], bit 8 [FlxRatRf.5/399.99 Use] is set). Provides a scaling factor for the flux producing (d-axis) current reference. Comm Scale: = 3767 When active (Par 5 [FOC Mode Config], bit 8 [FlxRatRf Use] is set), Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] x Par 44 [Flux Ratio Ref]. When inactive (Par 5 [FOC Mode Config], bit 8 [FlxRatRf Use] is cleared) Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] below base speed and Flux Producing (d-axis) Current Reference = Par 488 [Flux Current] x motor base speed/motor speed above base speed. 45 Flux Rate Limit Sets the limit of the rate of change for flux producing (d-axis) current. 46 Flux Satur Coef This represents the amount of flux current required to compensate for the flux saturation effect of the motor. %/ms../95.3 Comm Scale: x Comm Scale: 47 PM Mtr CEMF Comp Provides CEMF compensation for the torque producing (q-axis) current in the permanent magnet motor mode. 48 IReg IGain Fctr Adjustment for current regulator integral frequency factor (gain). 49 Ids Integ Freq Sets the break frequency of the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. This and Par 43 [Ids Reg P Gain] determine the integral gain for the d-axis current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 43 Ids Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. Set by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 43 Test Current Ref Sets the current reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode. 43 Test Freq Ref Sets the frequency reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode. 433 Test Freq Rate Sets the rate of change of frequency reference used for Motor Control (MC) Test Mode. 434 Mtr Vds Base Displays the motor flux producing (d-axis) voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Min/Max Zero Zero Data State Duty Cycle MC BrakeEnbl Power Actual /rdb 3 4 Max BodyTemp 3 /th_eb Max ElemTemp 4 /ce 5 BodyTemp Act 5 tamax 6 ElemTemp Act 6 /th_ba 7 BTmpTripStat 7 /cb 8 ETmpTripStat 8 DB IGBT Amp 9 Int DB Ohms. -/+. R/S 6-bit /3767 %/../5.3 x % / / R/S /3767../. x % 5../799.9 x %. -/+799.9 x % /S 5../. x -89/ Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
3-56 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 435 Mtr Vqs Base Displays the motor torque producing (q-axis) voltage command when running at nameplate motor speed and load. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 437 Vqs Max Displays the maximum torque producing (q-axis) voltage allowed on the motor. Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. Values 438 Vds Max Displays the maximum flux producing (d-axis) voltage allowed on the motor. Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 439 Vqs Min Displays the minimum torque producing (q-axis) voltage required for motor control adaption. Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 44 Vds Min Displays the minimum flux producing (d-axis) voltage required for motor control adaption. Adaptation is disabled below this voltage. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 44 Vds Fdbk Filt Displays measured filtered motor flux producing (d-axis) voltage. 44 Vqs Fdbk Filt Displays measured filtered motor torque producing (q-axis) voltage. 443 Flux Reg P Gain Sets the Proportional (P) gain for the flux regulator. Do not change this value. 444 Flux Reg I Gain Sets the Integral (I) gain for the flux regulator. Do not change this value. 445 Slip Gain Max Displays the maximum slip frequency allowed in the motor control. Scaling is in hertz x 56. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 446 Slip Gain Min Displays the minimum slip frequency allowed in the motor control. Scaling is in hertz x 56. This value is determined during the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 447 Slip Reg P Gain Sets the Proportional (P) gain for the slip regulator. Do not change this value. 448 Slip Reg I Gain Sets the Integral (I) gain for the slip regulator. Do not change this value. 449 Freq Reg I Gain Sets the integral gain of the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Do not change this value. 45 Freq Reg P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Do not change this value. 45 SrLss Preset Spd Motor speed at which to start the sensorless frequency search. /89 797 /3767 5793 /3767 46 -/+3767 46 -/+3767 -/+3767 -/+3767 5 /3767 35 /3767 % 3 / % 5 / 35 /3767 Comm Scale: x /3767 5 /3767 453 Iu Offset Sets the current offset correction for the phase U current. Value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control (MC) is not faulted. Do not change this value. 454 Iw Offset Sets the current offset correction for the flux producing (d-axis) current regulator. This value is set automatically when the drive is not running and Motor Control (MC) is not faulted. Do not change this value. 469 StatorInduc Gain Displays the current regulator feedforward compensation. Do not change this value. 47 Flux Reg P Gain Displays the additional proportional gain used at the start of Bus voltage limited field weakening. Do not change this value. 47 PreCharge Delay Adjusts a delay between the time all other precharge conditions have been met and the time the drive leaves the precharge state. Can be used to control the sequence of precharge completion in a drive system. The maximum value of this parameter is calculated as follows: Par 47 [PreCharge Delay] = Par 4 [PreChrg TimeOut] -. second. 473 Freq Reg FF Gain Provides feed forward gain to the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Higher gains make operation at low speeds smoother. However, higher gains may make operation at high speeds less stable. 35 /3767 RPM 75. -/+3999.6 -/+3767 -/+3767 % / /3767 Sec../Calculated 3 /3767 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-57 Name No. Description 474 Freq Reg We BW Sets the electrical (stator) frequency bandwidth for the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. Values 5 /3767 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit Must always be set to a value higher than Par 475 [Freq Reg Wr BW]. 475 Freq Reg Wr BW Sets the rotor (speed) frequency bandwidth for the Frequency Regulator, which estimates motor speed when sensorless feedback is selected. 3 /3767 6-bit Must always be set to a value higher than Par 97 [Act Spd Reg BW]. Normal applications should use a value approximately 5% greater than Par 97. Applications with large dynamic ranges can use values -3% greater than Par 97. However large values can result in pull-outs and unstable operation. 476 Slip Gain Comp Provides slip gain compensation for sensorless speed adjustment. 477 Est Theta Delay Active only in Permanent Magnet motor mode (when Par 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] equals PMag Motor ). Provides a delay for the function that compares the estimated rotor position and the data from the position sensor. 485 Motor Ctrl Mode Enter a value to select the operating mode for the Motor Control (MC). FOC - (Field Oriented Control) is induction motor control with voltage adaptation. FOC (Field Oriented Control ) is induction motor control with temperature adaptation. Pmag Motor - (Permanent Magnet Motor Control) is permanent magnet motor operation. 4 (Test) - Is the test mode. 486 Rated Slip Freq Displays the control slip frequency, determined from Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz] and Par 4 [Motor NP RPM]. Measured by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value. 487 Motor NTC Coef Defines a coefficient used to calculate the rotor temperature from the measured stator temperature. Used only in Field Oriented Control - (FOC) mode. 488 Flux Current Specifies the magnetizing current that produces rated flux in the motor in a per unit Options: Comm Scale: %../4. msec /4 Hz.47./3. x % 5/ % 3. (percent representation). Measured by the autotune procedure. Do not change this value../75. Comm Scale: x 49 StatorInductance Displays the sum of the stator and cable inductances of the motor in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the autotune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. 49 StatorResistance Displays the sum of the stator and cable resistances of the motor in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the autotune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. 49 Leak Inductance Displays the sum of the motor stator, rotor leakage, and motor cable inductances in per unit (percent representation), as determined by the autotune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. 493 Leak Indc Sat Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the autotune procedure. 494 Leak Indc Sat Displays the leakage inductance correction for the first overload level as determined by the autotune procedure. 5 Bus Util Limit Sets the maximum allowed bus voltage utilization for the Motor Control. Do not change this value. Higher values may result in control instability or over-current faults. 5 Torque En Dly Sets the delay between the time the drive is enabled and the time the Motor Control applies torque. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: 5 Rotor Resistance Displays rotor resistance, as determined by the autotune procedure. Scaled to percent of rated motor impedance. Do not change this value. Comm Scale: %../799.99 = 89\ %../. = 89 %../. = 89 %. 5./. %. 5./. % 9../. = 89 msec /3767 = 89 %../. = 89 FOC FOC 3 FOC 4 Test PMag Motor 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
3-58 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 53 Current Reg BW Sets the bandwidth for the current regulator. Par 4 [PWM Frequency] limits the maximum value. Reducing the value reduces current regulator over-shoot. 54 PM AbsEncd Offst Determined by the autotune procedure. Values R/S 6 /3 /65535 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 6-bit 55 PM TestWait Time Defines the time interval used for the automated measurement of Par 54 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor. 56 PM Test Idc Ramp Defines the ramp rate of the flux producing (d-axis) current reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 54 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor. 57 PM Test FreqRamp Defines the ramp rate of the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 54 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: 58 PM Test Freq Ref Defines the frequency reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 54 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor. Comm Scale: 59 PM Test I Ref Defines the amplitude of the flux producing (d-axis) current reference that is used for the automated measurement of Par 54 [PM AbsEncd Offst] for a Permanent Magnet (PM) motor. 5 FOC Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control (FOC) operation. Note: Bit 5 [LwSpdRflctWv] was added for firmware version.6 Comm Scale: msec 5/5 %/ms../95.3 x %/ms../95.3 x %. -/+799.9 x % 3../799.9 x 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options FS PresetSpd SrLssFStrtEn SrLss RdThru SrLssWeLimit SrLss WeHold LwSpdRflctWv Slip Reg En SlipGain Est RsEst Update RsEst Ratio RsEst Adapt ReflWaveComp BusGain Comp LwSpd VqsReg Flux Reg Use Flux Reg En Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True Bit Definition 3 Enables Sensorless Flying start 6 Sensorless Flying start function will use the speed set in Par 45 [SrLss Preset Spd]. 5 FOC Mode Config Configures Field Oriented Control - (FOC) operation.! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options LinrSnsr Dir LnrSnsr Use FlxRatRf Use NTC Active CEMF We Use ReflWaveComp BusGain Comp Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-59 Name No. Description 5 PMag Mode Cnfg Configures Permanent Magnet (PM) operation. Values Linkable Read-Write Data Type! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options LinrSnsr Dir LinrSnsr Use FlxRatRf Use NTC Active CEMF We Use PMVltRegUse PMVltRegEn ReflWaveComp BusGain Comp Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 54 Test Mode Config Configures the Motor Control (MC) test mode.! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options ReflWaveComp BusGain Comp Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 55 FOC Tune Config! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options 56 FOC Tune Config NoRotateTune Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options NoRotateTune Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
3-6 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 57 PMag Tune Cnfg Configures the Permanent Magnet Motor tuning mode. Values Linkable Read-Write Data Type! ATTENTION: Do not modify this parameter. Motor/Drive instabilities and damage could result. Options IndTestA set Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 5 PM Q Inductance Indicates the percent-per unit inductance of the motor stator in the torque producing (q-axis). 5 PM D Inductance Indicates the percent-per unit inductance of the motor stator in the flux producing (d-axis). 5 PM Stator Resist Indicates the percent-per unit resistance of the motor stator. 53 PM Mtr CEMF Coef Indicates the coefficient for Counter Electro Motive Force (CEMF) voltage, normalized to base motor speed. 56 MC Build Number Displays the build number of the drive's Motor Control (MC) software. 57 MC Firmware Rev Displays the major and minor revision levels of the drive's Motor Control (MC) software. %../399.99 Comm Scale: = 89 %../399.99 Comm Scale: = 89 %.5./. Comm Scale: = 89 % 89.99./399.99 Comm Scale: = 89 /65535../655.35 Comm Scale: x 533 Slip Ratio Hz Used by the Field Oriented Control - (FOC) mode. Indicates the present operating slip. frequency at % Torque Producing Current (Iqs) scaled to hertz x../37.67 Comm Scale: x 534 Stator Frequency Displays stator frequency as a percentage of Par 3 [Motor NP Hertz]. 535 Iqs Command Displays the torque producing (q-axis) current command. 537 Ids Command Displays the flux producing (d-axis) current command. 539 Iqs Feedback Displays torque producing (q-axis) current feedback. 54 Ids Feedback Displays flux producing (d-axis) current feedback. 54 Vqs Command Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the torque producing axis (q-axis). 54 Vds Command Displays the command for initiation of voltage on the flux producing axis (d-axis). %. -/+8. Comm Scale: x %. -/+8. Comm Scale: x %. -/+8. Comm Scale: x Comm Scale: Comm Scale: P.U.. -/+8. P.U.. -/+8. % -/+ = 89 % -/+ = 89 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-6 Linkable Read-Write Data Type Name No. Description Values 544 MC TP Select Enter or write a value to select Motor Control (MC) data displayed in Pars 545 [MC TP Value], and 546 [MC TP Bit]. Pars 545 [MC TP Value], and 546 [MC TP Bit] are diagnostic tools you can use to view internal drive parameters. MuIqsRef Options: MuIqsRef 38 Wr 76 SinThtaEcor4 4 TestMark7 5 SrLssWeEst 9 RsEstPhi SlipRatio 39 FluxRatio 77 MuIRefB 5 TestMark7 53 SrLssPrportl 9 RsEstSinPhi Ws 4 VbusFdbk 78 SpdFdbk 6 TestMark73 54 SrLssPI 9 RsEstVqsFbkP 3 WrEst 4 FluxRatio 79 SpdIntegral 7 TestMark74 55 SrLssQAWeEst 93 RsEWeLadsCmd 4 We 4 FluxRatio3 8 SpdPrportnal 8 TestMark75 56 SLWeGainFwk 94 REWeLadsCmdP 5 VdsCmd 43 FluxRatio4 8 SpdPI 9 TestMark76 57 SrLssWsFf 95 RsEWeLaqsCmd 6 VqsCmd 44 MuFlxRtioRef 8 SpdRef TestMark76 58 SrLssWsEst 96 RsEstIdsRat 7 VuCmd 45 RcpFlxRatio 83 SlipGainEst TestMark78 59 SrLssWsCmd 97 RsEstIqsRat 8 VvCmd 46 MuIfluxRef 84 SlipGainFf TestMark79 6 SrLssVdsErr 98 MulqsRef 9 VwCmd 47 MuItestRef 85 Ws 3 TestMark7A 6 SLVdsErrComp 99 EstThetaByMV IuFdbk 48 MotVntc 86 SlipGain 4 TestMark7B 6 SrLssStrtTmr ETVdsFbkA IwFdbk 49 BaseSlip 87 SlipGainFltr 5 TestMark7C 63 SrLssWsMxLim ETVqsFbkA IdsFdbk 5 VbusFdbk 88 SlipVdsCmd 6 TestMark7D 64 SrLssWeAve ETVdsFbkS 3 IqsFdbk 5 VdsFdbk 89 SlpVdsCmdFlt 7 TestMark7E 65 SrLssWeEst 3 ETVqsFbkS 4 VdsFdbk 5 VqsFdbk 9 VdsLastError 8 TestMark7F 66 SrLssKpMonit 4 ETAtanVqVd 5 VuvFdbk 53 VdsSpdVltFlt 9 VdsPrportnal 9 RWVuOut 67 SrLssKiMonit 5 ETByMtrVDfr 6 VvwFdbk 54 WrEst 9 VdsintMnitor 3 RWVvOut 68 SLWeKScale 6 VelRef 7 VqsFdbk 55 MuTestFrqRef 93 MotorVlts 3 RWVwOut 69 SrLssWrAve 7 VelOutput 8 IdsCmd 56 TestFrqRef 94 BusUtil 3 RWuErr 7 SrLssWrCmd 8 TorqEst 9 IqsRatio 57 FluxFltrN_ 95 FieldInitTm 33 RWvErr 7 SLWeKCMon 9 TorqEstFltr MuIqsRef 58 PrchgDlayCtr 96 IqsLimit 34 RWwErr 7 SLWrKAMon FSLamDS IqsCmd 59 PrchTimOutCr 97 VqsCmdMotor 35 RWVuOut 73 SrLssVdsCmd FSIdsCmd We 6 PrchPilotCtr 98 WeFieldWeak 36 RWVuOut 74 SrLssGnMon FsFluxErr 3 VuTd 6 TrqEnableCtr 99 VqsFldWkBase 37 RWVuOut 75 WsKff 3 FSLamDSCmd 4 VvTd 6 MuTscan VqsIdsCmd 38 RWPosState 76 WsKffBst 4 FsFluxTmr 5 VwTd 63 ErStatFromCp VqsMaxMotor 39 RWNegState 77 SLQAWeEstAve 5 SrLsVdsOff 6 VuCmd 64 FlxCurRteOut VqsMaxVbus 4 BusDropVolts 78 SLWeEstErr 6 FSLstIntgl 7 VvCmd 65 ThetaE 3 CalcPUMtrFlx 4 RecoverVolts 79 SrLssIntMon 7 FSLstWe 8 VwCmd 66 SinThetaE 4 FldWkInitTim 4 VdsFdbkFltr 8 SLWePosLmt 8 FSLstWr 9 Kpwm 67 SinThetaE 5 FluxIdsFfFlt 43 VqsFdbkFltr 8 SLWeNegLmt 9 PwrCalc 3 Vds_cemf 68 SinThetaE3 6 FlxVqsCmdFlt 44 VbusFdbkFltr 8 SLWrScale ThetaELin 3 Vqs_cemf 69 SinThetaE4 7 VqsError 45 VbusMemory 83 SLErrNoCoher PprCntEfcOt 3 VdsCmd 7 SinThetaE5 8 VqsFluxPI 46 VpEncVelFbk 84 SLIntLmtPosM PprCntDfcTh 33 VqsCmd 7 SinThetaE6 9 VqsIntegral 47 VpEncVelFbk 85 SLIntLmtNegM 3 LinPprCnt 34 IdsIntegral 7 ThetaEcor VqsPrportl 48 VPOptVelFbk 86 RsEst 4 ActiveFbk 35 IqsIntegral 73 SinThtaEcor VqsPrportnl 49 VPOptVelFbk 87 RsEstCosPhi 5 VdsCOMP 36 DcBus 74 SinThtaEcor DbDuty 5 BitSelect 88 RsEstFltr 6 VqsCOMP 37 AGnd 75 SinThtaEcor3 3 TestMark7 5 BitSelect 89 RsEstIqsCmdP 7 S496.5V 545 MC TP Value Displays the data selected by Par 544 [MC TP Sel]. This display should only be used if the selected value is integer data. Par 545 [MC TP Value] is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters. 546 MC TP Bit Displays the data selected by Par 544 [MC TP Sel]. This display should only be used if the selected value is bit-enumerated data. Par 546 [MC TP Bit] is a diagnostic tool you can use to view internal drive parameters. Min: Max: 548 Est Speed Fdbk Displays estimated motor speed, calculated when the selected feedback is sensorless or when encoderless ridethrough is enabled. A value of 496 indicates a motor speed equal to the value in Par 4 [Motor NP RPM]. -/+3767 3-bit 3-bit Boolean 6-bit
3-6 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 55 MC Diag Status Indicates the status of the MC diagnostic test. Options 55 MC Diag Done Indicates which MC diagnostic tests are complete. 55 MC Diag Error Displays the first diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. 553 MC Diag Error Displays the second diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. 554 MC Diag Error 3 Displays the third diagnostic error encountered by the Motor Control (MC). Errors appear in this parameter in the order in which they occurred. 555 MC Status Indicates status of the Motor Control (MC) Processor and related functions. 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. Values PwrDiagFltPt PM EncOffset Rot Dir Chk CommCntEncls Comm Count CommParamCal CommLmEncles Comm Lm Meas Comm SigmaLs Comm Rs Meas PDgTrWP-VNOn PDgTrWP-UNOn PDgTrVP-WNOn PDgVP-UNOn PDgUP-WNOn PDgTrUP-VNOn PDgTrUNWNOn PDgTrUPWPOn Pdiag TrWNOn Pdiag TrVNOn Pdiag TrUNOn Pdiag TrWNOn Pdiag TrVPOn Pdiag TrUPOn Pdg VbusSens Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options PwrDiagFltPt PM EncOffset Rot Dir Chk CommCntEncls Comm Count CommParamCal CommLmEncles Comm Lm Meas Comm SigmaLs Comm Rs Meas PDgTrWP-VNOn PDgTrWP-UNOn PDgTrVP-WNOn PDgVP-UNOn UP-WNOn-U PDgTrUP-VNOn Ground Fault Ground Fault Pdiag TrWNOn Pdiag TrVNOn Pdiag TrUNOn Pdiag TWUNOn Pdiag TrVPOn Pdiag TrUPOn Pdg VbusSens Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Neg Parametr Not Rotating Not Rotating W,WP-VNOn-Wcur WP-UNOn-U,W VP-WNOn-Wcur VP-UNOn-Ucur UP-WNOn-U,W UP-VNOn-Ucur Ground Fault Ground Fault UP,VPdevShrt UP,WPdevShrt VP,WPdevShrt UN,VNdevShrt UN,WNdevShrt VN,WNdevShrt Vbus Range Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Negative Wr WP-VNOn-Vvw WPUN-Vuv,Vvw VP-WNOn-Vvw VP-UNOn-Vuv UPWN-Vuv,Vvw UP-VNOn-Vuv SensOfstRnge Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options HP Fault HP Fault Vvw Volt Flt Vuv Volt Flt W Currnt Flt U Currnt Flt Ground Fault WNdeviceShrt VNdeviceShrt UNdeviceShrt WPdeviceShrt VPdeviceShrt UPdeviceShrt Vbus Range Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Min Vqs MaxDCBus Vqs MaxMotor Vqs Max Vds Min Vds SrLssWsLimit Slip Limit Regen Iqs Limit FldWeakening FluxRatioRef Command Lim DC Bus Low MC Test Mode PreChrg Req PWM En PreChrg Done Flux En Torque En Change Dir MC CommisFlt MC CommisRun MC Fault MC Ready BaseBlockReq TorqueRunReq Flux Run Req MC En Req Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-63 Name No. Description 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 63 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. 63 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 64 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 65 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. 65 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 64 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 66 In3 Displays input word 3 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 67 [ In3], which displays the same data in floating point format. 67 In3 Displays input word 3 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 66 [ In3], which displays the same data in integer format. 68 In4 Displays input word 4 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 69 [ In4], which displays the same data in floating point format. 69 In4 Displays input word 4 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 68 [ In4], which displays the same data in integer format. 6 In5 Displays input word 5 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 6 [ In5], which displays the same data in floating point format. 6 In5 Displays input word 5 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In5], which displays the same data in integer format. 6 In6 Displays input word 6 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 63 [ In6], which displays the same data in floating point format. 63 In6 Displays input word 6 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In6], which displays the same data in integer format. 64 In7 Displays input word 7 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 65 [ In7], which displays the same data in floating point format. 65 In7 Displays input word 7 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 64 [ In7], which displays the same data in integer format. 66 In8 Displays input word 8 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 67 [ In8], which displays the same data in floating point format. 67 In8 Displays input word 8 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 66 [ In8], which displays the same data in integer format. 68 In9 Displays input word 9 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 69 [ In9], which displays the same data in floating point format. 69 In9 Displays input word 9 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 68 [ In9], which displays the same data in integer format. 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 6 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 63 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. Values. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Comm Scale: x Comm Scale: x. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-64 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 63 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 6 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 64 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 65 [ In], which displays the same data in floating point format. 65 In Displays input word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 64 [ In], which displays the same data in integer format. 66 In3 Displays input word 3 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 67 [ In3], which displays the same data in floating point format. 67 In3 Displays input word 3 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 66 [ In3], which displays the same data in integer format. 68 In4 Displays input word 4 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 69 [ In4], which displays the same data in floating point format. 69 In4 Displays input word 4 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 68 [ In4], which displays the same data in integer format. 63 In5 Displays input word 5 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 63 [ In5], which displays the same data in floating point format. 63 In5 Displays input word 5 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 63 [ In5], which displays the same data in integer format. 63 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 633 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 633 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 63 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 634 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 635 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 635 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 634 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 636 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 637 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 637 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 636 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 638 Out3 Displays output word 3 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 639 [ Out3], which displays the same data in floating point format. 639 Out3 Displays output word 3 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 638 [ Out3], which displays the same data in integer format. 64 Out4 Displays output word 4 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 64 [ Out4], which displays the same data in floating point format. 64 Out4 Displays output word 4 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 64 [ Out4], which displays the same data in integer format. 64 Out5 Displays output word 5 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 643 [ Out5], which displays the same data in floating point format. 643 Out5 Displays output word 5 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 64 [ Out5], which displays the same data in integer format. 644 Out6 Displays output word 6 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 645 [ Out6], which displays the same data in floating point format. Values. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-65 Name No. Description 645 Out6 Displays output word 6 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 644 [ Out6], which displays the same data in integer format. 646 Out7 Displays output word 7 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 647 [ Out7], which displays the same data in floating point format. 647 Out7 Displays output word 7 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 646 [ Out7], which displays the same data in integer format. 648 Out8 Displays output word 8 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 649 [ Out8], which displays the same data in floating point format. 649 Out8 Displays output word 8 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 648 [ Out8], which displays the same data in integer format. 65 Out9 Displays output word 9 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 65 [ Out9], which displays the same data in floating point format. 65 Out9 Displays output word 9 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 65 [ Out9], which displays the same data in integer format. 65 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 653 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 653 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 65 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 654 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 655 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 655 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 654 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 656 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 657 [ Out], which displays the same data in floating point format. 657 Out Displays output word of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 656 [ Out], which displays the same data in integer format. 658 Out3 Displays output word 3 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 659 [ Out3], which displays the same data in floating point format. 659 Out3 Displays output word 3 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 658 [ Out3], which displays the same data in integer format. 66 Out4 Displays output word 4 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 66 [ Out4], which displays the same data in floating point format. 66 Out4 Displays output word 4 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 66 [ Out4], which displays the same data in integer format. 66 Out5 Displays output word 5 of the controller communication format in integer format. Paired with Par 663 [ Out5], which displays the same data in floating point format. 663 Out5 Displays output word 5 of the controller communication format in floating point format. Paired with Par 66 [ Out5], which displays the same data in integer format. 664 Lgx Comm Format Indicates the Controller to Drive communication format. 6-Velocity Control, -Custom Format, 6-Position Control. Values Comm Scale: Options:. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. x6. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. 6 7 Not Used Not Used Velocity Position Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 8 UserDefined 9 Motion 3 CustmUserDef
3-66 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 67 Pwr Strct Mode Options 67 HiHP Drive Fault Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Star Coupler Hi Pwr Strct Lo PwrStrct Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used EE Incompati HW Incompati Prchrg cntct uprc Wtchdg Drive OvrLd FAN Alarm VBus Wtchdg VBus CRC Err VBus Lnk Lst VBus Com Dly AC Inpt Lss Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 67 HiHP GndFlt Cur Determines the current level for the ground fault detection. Note: The default value was changed from 5A to 3.5A and the maximum value was changed from 5A to A for firmware version.7. 673 HiHP GndFlt Dly Determines the time delay for the ground fault detection. Note: The default value for this parameter changed from ms to ms for firmware version.7. 69 DPI Ref Select Selects which DPI port can provide a reference to the drive. 69 DPI Baud Rate Sets the baud rate for attached drive peripherals. Reset the drive for the change to take effect. 693 Logic Mask Determines which adapters can control the drive. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 694 Start Mask Controls which adapters can issue start commands. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 695 Jog Mask Controls which adapters can issue jog commands. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True Values Bit : PowerFlex 7S Bit : Vacon HiHP Options: Options: Amps 3.5./. msec /4 3 Val Val Local HIM Local HIM 4 Ext DPI Conn 5 Int DPI Comm Aux DPI Conn 5K 5K Linkable Read-Write Data Type
Programming and Parameters 3-67 Name No. Description 696 Direction Mask Controls which adapters can issue forward/reverse direction commands. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 697 Fault Clr Mask Controls which adapters can clear a fault. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 7 Stop Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop command. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 7 Start Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid start command. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 7 Jog Owner Indicates which adapters that are presently issuing a valid jog command. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 73 Direction Owner Indicates which adapter is currently has exclusive control of direction changes. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True = False = True Values Linkable Read-Write Data Type
3-68 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 74 Fault Clr Owner Indicates which adapter is currently clearing a fault. Options Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined DriveLogix Int DPI Conn Aux DPI Conn Ext DPI Conn Local HIM Terminal Blk Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 77 Data In A Int Link A Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 78 Data In A Link A Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 79 Data In A Int Link A Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In A Link A Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In B Int Link B Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In B Link B Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 73 Data In B Int Link B Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 74 Data In B Link B Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 75 Data In C Int Link C Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. Values 76 Data In C Link C Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the Min/ Max: drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-69 Name Description No. 77 Data In C Int Link C Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. Values 78 Data In C Link C Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 79 Data In D Int Link D Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In D Link D Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In D Int Link D Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table. Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information. 7 Data In D Link D Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameters that can only be changed while the drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs. Entering a parameter of this type will "Disable" the link. Refer to the manual that came with your communications option for datalink information.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 73 DLink OutDataTyp Set bits to configure each Datalink output word for real (floating point) data transfer. Reset bits to configure each Datalink output word for integer data transfer. Options D Out D Out C Out C Out B Out B Out A Out A Out Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 74 Data Out A Int Link A Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. = False = True 75 Data Out A Link A Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 76 Data Out A Int Link A Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 77 Data Out A Link A Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 78 Data Out B Int Link B Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 79 Data Out B Link B Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 73 Data Out B Int Link B Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 73 Data Out B Link B Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 73 Data Out C Int Link C Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-7 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 733 Data Out C Link C Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 734 Data Out C Int Link C Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 735 Data Out C Link C Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 736 Data Out D Int Link D Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 737 Data Out D Link D Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. 738 Data Out D Int Link D Word () - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table. Comm Scale: 739 Data Out D Link D Word ( or Floating Point) - Parameter number whose value will be written to a communications device data table.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. x. -/+. 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 74 Position Control Set bits to enable various position control functions. Setting bit [Speed Out En] enables position regulator output at Par 38 [Posit Spd Output]. Setting bit [Integ En] enables integrator operation. Resetting it resets the integrator. Setting bit 3 [Integ Hold] holds the integrator in the present state. Setting bit 4 [X Offset Pol] reverses polarity of offset parameters. Setting bit 5 [XOffset ReRef] permits changing the value of position offsets without changing actual position. Resetting it makes the position offset relative to the re-referenced value or the latched value upon enable if re-reference was not performed. Bit 6 [ActPosit Rst] is only operational when Bit 8 [Xzero Preset] is off. When bit 6 [ActPosit Rst] is set, Pars 744 [PositRef EGR Out], 747 [Position Cmmd], 763 [Act Motor Posit] and 765 [Posit Actl Load] will be set to the value of Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] upon drive enable. When bit 6 [ActPosit Rst] is cleared, the above four parameters are set to a value of the position reference selected by Par 743 [Aux Posit Ref]. Setting bit 7 [AbsoluteMode] puts the position regulator in Absolute mode. Setting bit 8 [Xzero Preset] presets Pars 744 [PositRef EGR Out], 747 [Position Cmmd], 763 [Act Motor Posit] and 765 [Posit Actl Load] to the value in Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] minus Par 757 [Abs Posit Offset] upon drive enable. Setting bit [Pt-Pt ReRef] enables setting or changing Par 758 [Pt-Pt Posit Ref] without changing actual position. Setting bit 6 [X Watch En] enables position Watch. Resetting it clears Par 74 [Position Status] bit 8 [Posit Watch]. Setting bit 7 [X Watch Dir] causes Position Watch output to be set when Par 763 [Act Motor Posit] is greater than Par 78 [PositDtct Stpt]. Re-setting bit 7 [X Watch Dir] causes Position Watch output to be set when Par 763 [Act Motor Posit] is less than Par 78 [PositDtct Stpt]. Setting bit 8 [X Watch En] enables position Watch. Resetting it clears Par 74 [Position Status] bit 9 [Posit Watch]. Setting bit 9 [X Watch Dir] causes Position Watch output to be set when Par 763 [Act Motor Posit] is greater than Par 78 [PositDtct Stpt]. Re-setting bit 9 [X Watch Dir] causes Position Watch output to be set when Par 763 [Act Motor Posit] is less than Par 78 [PositDtct Stpt]. Options X Watch Dir X Watch En X Watch Dir X Watch En Pt-Pt ReRef Xzero Preset AbsoluteMode ActPosit Rst XOffset ReRef X Offset Pol Integ Hold Integ En Speed Out En Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 74 Position Status Indicates status of position control algorithms. Bit [X IGain LLim] indicates the position integrator is at the lower limit. Bit [X IGain HLim] indicates the position integrator is at the high limit. Bit [X Spd LLim] indicates the position regulator output at the low limit. Bit 3[X Spd HLim] indicates the position regulator output is at the high limit. Bit 4 [PtPtRRef Act] TBD. Bit 5 [XOffRRef Act] TBD. Bit 7 [Regulator On] indicates position regulator is active. Bit 8 [Posit Watch] indicates Position Watch has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction. Bit 9 [Posit Watch] indicates Position Watch has detected motor position equal to its setpoint, from the proper direction. Bit [In Position] indicates Par 769 [Position Error] is within the position deadband specified by parameter 78 [In Posit BW]. Options In Position Posit Watch Posit Watch Regulator On XOffRRef Act PtPtRRef Ac X Spd HLim X Spd LLim X IGain HLim X IGain LLim Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-7 Name No. Description 74 Posit Ref Sel Enter a value to select the position mode and corresponding reference. Values Options: 743 Aux Posit Ref Supplies position reference to the position regulator when selected by Par 74 [Posit Ref Sel]. This input is designed to be linked to a position count accumulator such as a virtual encoder or hardware accumulator. 744 PositRef EGR Out Accumulated output of the position reference Electronic Gear Ratio (EGR). When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 74 [Position Control] bit 6 [ActPosit Rst]. 745 PositRef EGR Mul An integer value in the numerator of the EGR function that is precision multiplied by the selected position reference. A negative value will effect a change in polarity. 746 PositRef EGR Div An integer value in the denominator of the EGR function that divides the product of the numerator of the EGR function and the selected position reference. Remainders are accumulated and not lost. 747 Position Cmmd Final accumulated command to the position regulator. When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 74 [Position Control] bit 6 [ActPosit Rst]. Thereafter, its value will reflect the result of reference and offset changes. 748 CoarsePosit Trgt Input to the interpolator. This is a course position target reference. 749 Interp Position Input to the interpolator. This is a course position target reference. 75 Course Spd Trgt Input to the interpolator. This is a course speed target reference. 75 Interp Speed Output from the interpolator. This is a fine speed target reference. Interpolated value of Par 75 [Course Spd Trgt] if available, or the first derivative of Par 748 [CoursePosit Trgt] if not available. 75 Interp AccelRate Output from interpolator. This is a fine acceleration rate. First derivative of Par 75 [Course Spd Trgt] if available, or zero () if not available. 753 Posit Offset Supplies a position reference offset, which is summed after the EGR and used to phase trim position reference. A step in the offset position will be internally rate limited and added to the selected reference position. The rate of correction is set by Par 755 [Posit Offset Spd]. The initial value of this parameter is latched upon position enable without causing a change in reference. Subsequent changes to the value will be relative to the latched value. See Par 74 [Position Control] bit 5 [XOffset ReRef] for re-referencing the offsets. 754 Posit Offset Supplies another position reference offset, which is summed directly with Par 753 [Posit Offset ]. Used to trim the phase of the selected position reference. Position offset will be internally rate limited to a velocity set by Par 755 [Posit Offset Spd]. 755 Posit Offset Spd Sets the speed of position offset. A position offset command will not exceed this speed. The actual speed of offset is limited to a maximum value of /(inertia * pos gain) so as not to cause a torque pulse greater than per unit. The speed will change exponentially. Comm Scale: 756 X Offst SpdFilt Displays the output of a first order filter whose time response is shaped specifically to provide an output that represents the actual speed of offset correction. It may be used as feed forward into speed reference to secure minimal position error during changes to offset. Comm Scale: -/+ / AuxPosit Ref Interpolate Pt to Pt AuxPosit Ref -/+. -/+8. -/+8. RPM 76.4 -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM. -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit DWord DWord 3-bit 3-bit
3-7 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 757 Abs Posit Offset Provides an offset to absolute position. Setting Par 74 [Position Control], bit 8 [Xzero Preset] presets Pars 744 [PositRef EGR Out], 747 [Position Cmmd], 763 [Act Motor Posit] and 765 [Posit Actl Load] with the value in Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] minus Par 757 [Abs Posit Offset] upon drive enable. Position Control (Xzero Preset) 74 8 744 PositRef EGR Out Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit Mtr Posit Fdbk 76 Abs Posit Offset 757 + - 758 Pt-Pt Posit Ref Provides position reference to the point to point position regulator, when the value in Par 74 [Posit Ref Sel] equals Pt to Pt. The initial value is latched upon position enable without causing movement. Subsequent changes to reference are relative to the latched position unless the position is re-referenced by Par 74 [Position Control], bit [Pt-Pt ReRef]. Position moves may be made within the limits of +/- 3 bits. Point to point reference may be changed, and even reversed, during a move. 759 Pt-Pt Accel Time Acceleration time (sec) from zero to base speed, active only in point to point mode. Acceleration to a relatively low speed may be exponential. 76 Pt-Pt Decel Time Deceleration time (sec) from base speed to zero, active only in point to point mode. Some tailing can be expected at the end of a move as the drive comes into command position. It is left to the user to select a time that does not place the drive in current or torque limit. Deceleration from relatively low speed may be exponential. 76 Pt-Pt Filt BW Sets the bandwidth of a low pass filter which affects smoothness at the start of deceleration in the point to point mode. A high filter bandwidth will produce a more square deceleration torque, one with a higher level of jerk. Typical values range from 5 to (rad/sec). A zero value will bypass the filter. Tail-out is influenced mainly by Par 768 [PositReg P Gain]. 76 Mtr Posit Fdbk Displays the accumulated pulse count of the primary feedback device as a 3 bit integer. The primary feedback device is selected by Par [Motor Fdbk Sel]. 763 Act Motor Posit Displays the accumulated motor position as a 3 bit integer. It tracks Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk]. When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 74 [Position Control] bit 6 [ActPosit Rst]. 764 Posit Load Fdbk Tracks the load position as a 3 bit integer. When a gear box connects the load to the motor, Par 766 [Posit FB EGR Mul] and Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] must be set to account for the gear ratio. Set Par 766 [Posit FB EGR Mul] equal to Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] if the load is directly connected to the motor. 765 Posit Actl Load Holds the accumulated output of the Load Gear Ratio as a 3 bit integer and forms the Mi/Max: primary feedback for the position regulator integral channel. It is very important that the Load Gear Ratio be precisely set, such that the delta pulse count of one motor revolution equals the delta pulse count of this parameter. When the position regulator is not enabled, this parameter is initialized to Par 76 [Mtr Posit Fdbk] or to the selected position reference as determined by Par 74 [Position Control] bit 6 [ActPosit Rst]. 766 Posit FB EGR Mul A 3 bit integer in the numerator of the load Electronic Gear Ratio function. It is multiplied by Par 764 [Posit Load Fdbk] and divided by Par 767 [Posit FB EGR Div] to reflect the load pulse count to the motor (effectively removing the gear box ratio). The accumulated position values of Par 763 [Act Motor Posit] and Par 765 [Posit Actl Load] will be equal if the ratio is set properly. There may be some difference due to lost motion in the gear train, but there should not be an accumulated difference. It is often necessary to count gear teeth as gear box manufacturers often approximate exact ratios with decimal numbers. Enter a negative value in the numerator to account for reversed motor rotation. 767 Posit FB EGR Div This is a 3 bit integer that forms the denominator of the load Electronic Gear Ratio function. 747 763 765 Position Cmmd Act Motor Posit Posit Actl Load Sec../6553.5 Sec../6553.5 R/S 5../5. -/+ / 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-73 Name No. Description Values 768 PositReg P Gain Sets position regulator gain as measured from position error to speed reference. The gain number is identically equal to position regulator bandwidth in rad/sec. For example: A gain of means that a per unit position error of. sec. will effect a. pu speed change ( per unit position error is the distance traveled in sec. at base motor speed). The maximum value of this parameter is typically /3 of the speed bandwidth (rad/sec) but may be set considerably higher with careful tuning of the speed regulator output lead/ lag filter. 769 Position Error Actual position error in motor pulse counts. When the position regulator is not enabled, this 3 bit integer register is initialized to zero. When the position regulator is enabled, this parameter contains the running value of position error, often referred to as following error. 77 PositReg Integ Sets position regulator integral gain as measured from position error to velocity reference. It has gain units of (per unit velocity/sec) / (per unit position) and is unit compatible with Par 768 [PositReg P Gain]. An integral gain of 5 means that a per unit position error of. sec will effect a.5 pu speed change per sec. A typical maximum value is _*[PositReg P Gain]. Note: per unit position is the distance traveled in sec. at base motor speed. Comm Scale: 77 PositReg Droop Position Droop limits the low frequency gain of the position regulators integral channel to a value of (/droop). It provides a means to fine tune the stability for load mounted feedback devices where lost motion may cause a problem. Typically, position droop will have a value that is less than (/position gain), perhaps even zero for tightly coupled loads. Position droop has a gain value of (per unit position) / (per unit speed). Note: per unit position is the distance traveled in sec. at base motor speed. 77 XReg Integ LoLim The negative limit of the position integrator. 773 XReg Integ HiLim The positive limit of the position integrator. 774 XReg Integ Out The output of the position regulator integral channel after application of the limits. This output is set to zero if the integral gain is set to zero or the integrator is not enabled. 775 XReg Spd LoLim The negative limit of total position regulator output. Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the reverse speed reference. 776 XReg Spd HiLim The positive limit of total position regulator output. Point to point mode uses this parameter to set the forward speed reference. Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: Comm Scale: 777 Posit TP Select Enter or write a value to select position regulator data displayed in Par 778 [Posit TP Data Options: Int] and Par 779 [Posit TP Data]. 778 PositTP Data Int Displays the data selected by Par 777 [Posit TP Select]. This display should only be used if the selected value is integer data. 779 PositTP Data Displays the data selected by Par 777 [Posit TP Select] in RPM. This display should only be used if the selected value is floating point data. 78 PositDetct Stpt Provides the setpoint for Position Watch. Position Watch is enabled and configured with Par 74 [Position Control] bits 6 & 7. Position Watch compares this value with Par 784 [Posit Detct In] and sets bit 8 [Posit Watch] of Par 74 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. 78 PositDetct Stpt Provides the setpoint for Position Watch. Position Watch is enabled and configured with Par 74 [Position Control] bits 8 & 9. Position Watch compares this value with Par 785 [Posit Detct In] and sets bit 9 [Posit Watch] of Par 74 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. Comm Scale: R/S 4../. /S 4../. x../.5 RPM -76.4-4./. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM 76.4./4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM -/+4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM -76.4-4./. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. RPM 76.4./4. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Zero Zero 9 Limiter Out del Xos Vout Ref EGR In del Xcmd OffsetSpdLim 3 del Act Load PtoP SpdLim 4 del Act Mtr 3 Sec per Edge 5 Integ Error 4 Edge per Sec 6 Xprop Out 5 Ratio Guess 7 6 Sync Count 8 PreLim Xvout RPM. -/+3.8887999688. Par 4 [Motor NP RPM] =. Linkable Read-Write Data Type v 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-74 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 78 In Posit BW Sets overall bandwidth of the In Position detector. The detector sets bit [In Position] of Par 74 [Position Status], when Par 769 [Position Error] is within this bandwidth for a sufficient time, specified by Par 783 [In Posit Dwell]. A modest hysteresis count is added to the position bandwidth after the position error is within specified limits. 783 In Posit Dwell Position error must be within the value specified by Par 78 [In Posit BW] for this amount of time before the In Position detector sets bit [In Position] of Par 74 [Position Status]. A momentary out of position indication will reset the internal timer and clear the In Position status bit. 784 Posit Detct In Provides the input variable for Position Watch. Position Watch is enabled and configured with Par 74 [Position Control] bits 6 & 7. Position Watch compares this value with Par 78 [PositDetct Stpt] and sets bit 8 [Posit Watch] of Par 74 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 [Act Motor Posit]. 785 Posit Detct In Provides the input variable for Position Watch. Position Watch is enabled and configured with Par 74 [Position Control] bits 8 & 9. Position Watch compares this value with Par 78 [PositDetct Stpt] and sets bit 9 [Posit Watch] of Par 74 [Position Status] when the appropriate condition is satisfied. A default link connects this parameter to Par 763 [Act Motor Posit]. / Sec.4./. 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 786 Xsync Status Bit [Sync Pulse] will go high for.5ms latching the Sync Generator inputs to the Sync Generator outputs. The period at which this bit is set is determined by Par 787 [Xsync Gen Period]. Options Sync Unstbl Sync Loss InterpInSync Sync Pulse 787 Xsync Gen Period Sets the period for the Sync Pulse Generator. Bit [Sync Pulse] of Par 786 [Xsync Status] Options: will be set for.5 msec and will be cleared for.5msec * [Xsync Gen Period] -.5 msec. 788 Xsync In 3 bit integer input of the Sync Generator. Latched to Par 789 [Xsync Out ]. Link any 3 bit integer parameter to this input parameter. 789 Xsync Out Sync Generator 3 bit output register. Latched to Par 788 [Xsync In ] every time bit [Sync Pulse] of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. 79 Xsync In 3 bit integer input of the Sync Generator. Latched to Par 79 [Xsync Out ]. Link any 3 bit integer parameter to this input parameter. 79 Xsync Out Sync Generator 3 bit output register. Latched to Par 79 [Xsync In ] every time bit [Sync Pulse] of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. 79 Xsync Out Dly Displays data of Par 79 [Xsync Out ] from the last sync period. 793 Xsync In 3 3 bit integer input of the Sync Generator. Latched to Par 794 [Xsync Out 3]. Link any 3 bit integer parameter to this input parameter. 794 Xsync Out 3 Sync Generator 3 bit output register. Latched to Par 793 [Xsync In 3] every time bit [Sync Pulse] of Par 786 [Xsync Status] is set. 795 Xsync Out 3 Dly Displays data of Par 794 [Xsync Out 3] from the last sync period. 4 msec msec 3 6 msec 4 msec 4 3 msec 8 msec -/+. -/+. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-75 Name No. Description Values 796 Posit Index Ctrl Set bits to control the Position Index function. Setting bit [Enable] allows the Position Index function to run. Setting bit [Step] causes Par 799 [PositIndexOutput] to change by the amount in Par 797 [Posit Index Step] if bit [Enable] is on. Setting bit [Reverse] causes Par 799 [PositIndexOutput] to decrement by the value in Par 797 [Posit Index Step] instead of increment if bit [Enable] is on. Setting bit 3 [Preset] forces the value in Par 798 [PositIndexPreset] into Par 799 [PositIndexOutput] if bit [Enable] is set. Bit 3 [Preset] overrides bits [Step] and [Reverse]. Options Preset Reverse 797 Posit Index Step Specifies the amount added to or subtracted from Par 799 [PositIndexOutput] on the rising edge of Par 796 [Posit Index Ctrl], bit [Step]. Note that this value can be positive and negative. 798 PositIndexPreset Specifies the value to be moved into Par 799 [PositIndexOutput] when Par 796 [Posit Index Ctrl], bits [Enable] and 3 [Preset] are on. 799 PositIndexOutput Displays the output of the Position Index function. 8 Anlg In Data Displays the value of Analog Input. This is the final value (after conversion, offsetting, scaling and filtering). 8 Anlg In Volts Displays the sum of Par 83 [Anlg In Offset] and the analog to digital conversion of Analog Input. The display range is +/-V. If switch SW- is closed (set for +/-.V) the value is scaled and displayed as +/-V. 8 Anlg In Scale Scales the range of Analog Input to the range of Par 8 [Anlg In Data]. Par 8 [Anlg In Volts] is multiplied by this number to produce the input to the lead lag filter function. Par 8 = and Par 8 = when V is applied. 83 Anlg In Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input. The output of the analog to digital conversion is summed with this number to produce Par 8 [Anlg In Volts]. This is used to zero out the analog input. 84 AI Filt Gain Provides the lead term for the Analog Input filter. A values greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. 85 Anlg In Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Analog Input filter. 86 Anlg In Data Displays the value of Analog Input. This is the final value (after conversion, offsetting, scaling and filtering). Comm Scale: 87 Anlg In Volts Displays sum of the Par 89 [Anlg In Offset] and the analog to digital conversion of Analog Input. The display range is +/-V. If switch SW- is closed (set for +/-.V) the value is scaled and displayed as +/-V. 88 Anlg In Scale Scales the range of Analog Input to the range of Par 86 [Anlg In Data]. Par 87 [Anlg In Volts] is multiplied by this number to produce the input to the lead lag filter function. 89 Anlg In Offset Applies an offset to Analog Input. The output of the analog to digital conversion is summed with this number to produce Par 87 [Anlg In Volts]. 8 AI Filt Gain Provides the lead term for the Analog Input filter. A values greater than will result in a lead function and a value less than will result in a lag function. 8 Anlg In Filt BW Sets the frequency for the Analog Input filter. Step Enable Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 8 Anlg Out Offset Provides an offset for Analog Output, before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output function. This parameter is summed with either Par 84 [AnlgOut ] or 85 [Anlg Out ] at the beginning of the function. 83 Anlg Out Offset Provides an offset for Analog Output, before the scaling and limit blocks in the Analog Output function. This parameter is summed with either Par 89 [AnlgOut ] or 8 [Anlg Out ] at the beginning of the function.. -/+. Volt. -/+. /v. -/+. Volt. -/+.. -/+5. R/S../376.l. -/+. x Volt. -/+. /v. -/+. Volt. -/+.. -/+5. R/S../376.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-76 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 84 AnlgOut Link this parameter to an integer source parameter and that source will control Analog Output. Values 85 Anlg Out Link this parameter to a real (floating point) source parameter and that source will control Analog Output. 86 Anlg Out Volts Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output, before the digital to analog conversion. 87 Anlg Out Scale Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output. Par 84 [AnlgOut ] or Par 85 [Anlg Out ] is multiplied by this number after the limit function. 88 Anlg Out Zero Applies an offset to the scaled value of the Analog Output function. This parameter is summed with the output of the scaling block. This sum produces Par 86 [Anlg Out Volts]. Typically this value corresponds to V for Analog Output. 89 AnlgOut Link this parameter to an integer source parameter and that source will control Analog Output. 8 Anlg Out Link this parameter to a real (floating point) source parameter and that source will control Analog Output. 8 Anlg Out Volts Displays the voltage reference for Analog Output, before the digital to analog conversion. 8 Anlg Out Scale Scales the range of the source parameter to the range of Analog Output. Par 89 [AnlgOut ] or Par 8 [Anlg Out ] is multiplied by this number after the limit function. 83 Anlg Out Zero Applies an offset to the scaled value of the Analog Output function. This parameter is summed with the output of the scaling block. This sum produces Par 8 [Anlg Out Volts]. Typically this value corresponds to V for Analog Output. 84 Local I/O Status Displays the status of the local I/O. Options 85 En In Debounce Sets the value of the debounce filter for the Enable input. The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. 86 DigIn Data Sets the value of Par 88 [DigIn User Data], except for the bit controlled by bit [DigIn ] Min of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Max: 87 DigIn Bit Selects the bit, in Par 88 [DigIn User Data], which is controlled by bit controlled by bit [DigIn ] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. 88 DigIn User Data Provides a source of data controlled by bit [DigIn ] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Link to a Read-Write parameter and enter a value of 3 in Par 838 [DigIn Sel] to activate this function. Min: Max: 89 DigIn Debounce Sets the value of the debounce filter for Digital Input. The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. 83 DigIn Data Sets the value of Par 83 [DigIn User Data], except for the bit controlled by bit [DigIn ] Min: of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Max: 83 DigIn Bit Selects the bit, in Par 83 [DigIn User Data], which is controlled by bit controlled by bit [DigIn ] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status].. -/+.. Volt. -/+. /v. -/+. Volt. -/+.. -/+. Volt. -/+. /v. -/+. Volt. -/+. VPL Gate Ena Watch Dog VP TP Out VP TP Out Aux Out Aux Out Output Relay LogixPresent DigIn 3 DigIn DigIn Enable In Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 msec 8./. 5.5 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit v 3-bit Boolean -3/3 msec 8../5.5 6-bit 3-bit Boolean 3-bit Boolean -3/3 = False = True 6-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-77 Name No. Description 83 DigIn User Data Provides a source of data controlled by bit [DigIn ] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Link to a Read-Write parameter and enter a value of 3 in Par 839 [DigIn Sel] to activate this function. Values Min: Max: Comm Scale: 833 DigIn Debounce Sets the value of the debounce filter for Digital Input. The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. 834 DigIn3 Data Sets the value of Par 836 [DigIn3 User Data], except for the bit controlled by bit 3 [DigIn 3] Min: of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Max: 835 DigIn3 Bit Selects the bit, in Par 836 [DigIn 3 User Data], which is controlled by bit controlled by bit 3 [DigIn 3] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. 836 DigIn3 User Data Provides a source of data controlled by bit 3 [DigIn 3] of Par 84 [Local I/O Status]. Link to a Read-Write parameter and enter a value of 3 in Par 84 [DigIn3 Sel] to activate this function. Min: Max: 837 DigIn3 Debounce Sets the value of the debounce filter for Digital Input 3. The filter requires the input signal to be stable for the specified time period. Input transitions within the filter time setting will be ignored. 838 DigIn Sel Enter or write a value to select the function of Digital Input. 839 DigIn Sel Enter or write a value to select the function of Digital Input. 84 DigIn3 Sel Enter or write a value to select the function of Digital Input 3. Options: Options: Options: 84 Relay Out Data Link a word to this parameter that will control the Relay Output. The bit within the selected Min: word that will control the Relay Output is set by Par 84 [Relay Out Bit]. Max: 84 Relay Out Bit Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 84 [Relay Out Data] that will change the status of the Relay Output (e.g., when Par 84 [Relay Out Bit] equals, bit of Par 84 [Relay Out Data] will control the Relay Output). 843 DigOut Data Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output. The bit within the selected Min: word that will control Digital Output is set by Par 844 [DigOut Bit]. Max: Inputs & Outputs Digital Inputs msec 8..5.5 3-bit Boolean 3-bit Boolean -3/3 msec 8../5.5 3 4 5 6 7 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Not Used Not Used 8 Fwd/Reverse Normal Stop 9 CurLim Stop Start Coast Stop Run Aux Fault Clear Faults AuxFault Inv Stop - CF 3 User Select Jog 4 PreChrg/Disc Jog Not Used Not Used 4 Normal Stop 5 Start 6 Run 7 Clear Faults 8 Stop - CF 9 Jog Jog Fwd/Reverse CurLim Stop 3 Logix Motion Coast Stop 4 +Hrd OvrTrvl Aux Fault 5 -Hrd OvrTrvl AuxFault Inv User Select Not Used Not Used 3 User Select Normal Stop 4 Start 5 Run 6 Clear Faults 7 Stop-CF 8 Jog 9 Jog Fwd/Reverse CurLim Stop 3 Logix Motion Coast Stop 4 +Hrd OvrTrvl Aux Fault 5 -Hrd OvrTrvl AuxFault Inv 6-bit 3-bit Boolean 3-bit Boolean -3/3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit 3-bit Boolean
3-78 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 844 DigOut Bit Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 843 [DigOut Data], that will change the status of Digital Output (e.g., when Par 844 [DigOut Bit] equals, bit of Par 843 [DigOut Data] will control Digital Output ). Values 845 DigOut Data Link a word to this parameter that will control Digital Output. The bit within the selected Min: word that will control Digital Output is set by Par 846 [DigOut Bit]. Max: 846 DigOut Bit Selects the bit, from the word linked to Par 845 [DigOut Data], that will change the status of Digital Output (e.g., when Par 846 [DigOut Bit] equals, bit of Par 845 [DigOut Data] will control Digital Output ). 85 ParamAccessLevel The value of this parameter establishes the level of parameter access for the Human Interface Module (HIM). Basic - grants access to the minimum number of parameters Advance - grants access to a larger group of parameters Engineering - grants access to all the parameters 9 MotnUpdatePeriod Servo update period for the Servo axis (drive). 9 Motion CoarseMulti Number of Par 9 [MotnUpdatePeriod] comprising one Course Update Period from the Motion Period. 93 Motn Config Configuration bits pertaining to Motion-related functions for the Servo axis. Options: -3/3 6-bit 3-bit Boolean -3/3 usec /999999 4 /6 Basic Basic Advanced Engineering Linkable Read-Write Data Type 6-bit DWord DWord Options Hrd Ovr Trvl Sft Ovr Trvl Polarity Neg Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 94 Motn Axis Status Status bits pertaining to Motion-related functions for the Servo axis. = False = True Options AxisShtdwnC Chng Ref Course Updt CST Updt Err -Hrd OvrTrvl +Hrd OvrTrvl -Sft OvrTrvl +Sft OvrTrvl Posit Lock AxisShutdown Drv Enable Motn Action Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 95 Motn AxisControl Command request bits from the Motion Planner to both the Servo and Feedback Only axis. Options ChngCmdRefC Abrt Evnt C Abrt Home C Shutdown C ChngCmdRefC Abrt Evnt C Abrt Home C Shutdown C Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 96 Motn Axis Resp Command response from both the Servo and Feedback Only axis to the Motion Planner. Options ChngCmdRefC Abrt Evnt C Abrt Home C Shutdown C Chng XRef C Abrt Evnt C Abrt Home C Shutdown C Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True = False = True = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-79 Name No. Description Values 97 Motn Cnct Status Status of all Motion connections. Also includes status for the configuration state relating to the motion connections. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Options MSO Input Drive Ready Asynch Cnct Event Cnct Synch Cnct UserIO Cnct Config OK Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 98 Motn EventStatus Status of all events supported by the Motion Event Connection. Options Home Home Arm Regis Posit Regis X Arm Regis Posit Regis X Arm Watch Posit Watch X Arm Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 99 Motn Event Ctrl Shows configuration state of Motion Event functions. = False = True = False = True Options Home Axis Event Cndt Home Type Home Type Wndw Regis Wndw Regis Watch X Rev Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 Motn Mx Pos Trvl Positive soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis. 9 Motn Mx Neg Trvl Negative soft overtravel threshold for the Motion Servo Axis. 93 Motn PositErrTol Position error tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis. 94 MotnPositLockTol Position lock tolerance for the Motion Servo Axis. 97 Motn Posit Cmmd Position command input from the Motion Planner. This is linked as the source to the interpolator s coarse position target specified in Par 748 [CoarsePosit Trgt]. 98 Motn Speed Cmmd Speed command input from the Motion Planner. This is linked as the source to the interpolator s coarse speed target specified in Par 75 [Coarse Spd Trgt]. 496 /47483648 /47483648 P.U.. -/+8. 99 Motn Posit Sync Synchronization input signal from the Motion Planner. Pulse received once per coarse update period. This is linked as the course to Par 3 [Interp SyncInput]. Options 9 FdbkAxis FdbkSel Selection for the Motion Feedback Only Axis feedback source. Note: Selections 5 and 6 are only available when compatible feedback option card is installed. 9 FdbkAxis FdbkVal Present value of the selected feedback for the Motion Feedback Only axis. = False = True SyncDataActv Sync Pulse Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 4 5 Encoder Encoder 6 FB Opt Port Encoder 7 SL DirIntRx 8 SL DirIntRx 9 SL DirIntRx SL DirIntRx3 FB Opt Port DWord DWord DWord DWord DWord = False = True DWord
3-8 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 9 Motn TP Select Selector for diagnostic testpoint relating to Motion functionality. 93 Motn TP Value Data for diagnostic testpoint relating to Motion functionality. 94 Motn RotaryCmmd Position command input from the Motion Planner to the Servo axis when configured in rotary mode. 95 MotnUnwdTurnCmmd Position unwind turns command input from the Motion Planner to the Servo axis when configured in rotary mode. 96 SrvoAxis RotFdbk Position feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo axis when configured in rotary mode. 97 SrvoAxisUnwdFdbk Potion unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Servo axis when configured in rotary mode. 98 FdbkAxis RotFdbk Position feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only axis when configured in rotary mode. 99 FdbkAxisUnwdFdbk Position unwind feedback output to the Motion Planner for the Feedback Only axis when configured in rotary mode. 93 MotnCnfgErrParam Indicates a parameter that is not configured properly for a motion connection to be accepted. Parameter could either have a wrong value or an incorrect link. When bit [Config OK] of Par 97 [Motn Cnct Status} is set, then this parameter contains the parameter number of an incorrectly configured parameter. If more than one parameter is incorrectly configured, they are displayed after others are fixed. If there are no configuration problems relating to Motion, then this parameter contains the value of zero and bit [Config OK] of Par 97 is cleared. 94 94 94 943 Values 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 +Sft OvrTrvlCnfg -Sft OvrTrvlCnfg Options: Synchronization input to the Interpolator has been lost or has become excessively irregular. Ignore - configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. 3 Flt RampStop - configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. 4 FltCurLimStp - configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. +Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg -Hrd OvrTrvlCnfg Options: Active signal from a digital input that is configured as a positive hard overtravel input. Ignore - configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm - configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit when this event occurs FltCoastStop - configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. 3 Flt RampStop - configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. 4 FltCurLimStp - configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. ServoAxisCnfg ServoAxisCnfg 6 CST Upper ServoAxisUnwd 7 Marker Dist 8 HomeEvent X 9 I/O Rx Seq# Watch Posit I/O Rx Msg# Home Posit I/O Tx Msg# SrvoMRP Ofst Syn Rx Seq# SrvoAct Ofst 3 Syn RxMsg# PositRegis 4 Syn Tx Msg# PositRegis 5 Evt Rx Seq# FdbkAxisCnfg 6 Evt Rx Msg# FdbkAxisUnwd 7 Evt Rx Tx Msg# FdbkMRP Ofst 8 Asy Rx Seq# FdbkAct Ofst 9 Asy Rx Msg# TimeEvntStat 3 Asy Tx Msg# CST Lower 3 Reset Msg# -/+3768 -/+3768 -/+3768 /65535 3 4 3 4 Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Alarm Ignore Alarm FltCoastStop Flt RampStop FltCurLimStp Linkable Read-Write Data Type DWord DWord Word DWord Word DWord Word Word
Programming and Parameters 3-8 Name No. Description Values 944 Positin ErrCnfg Alarm Position error for a Motion Servo axis has exceeded the configured limit. Options: Ignore Ignore - configures the drive to continue running, as normal, when this event occurs Alarm Alarm - configures the drive to continue running and set the appropriate alarm bit FltCoastStop when this event occurs 3 Flt RampStop FltCoastStop - configures the drive to perform a coast stop and set the appropriate 4 FltCurLimStp fault bit, in response this event. 3 Flt RampStop - configures the drive to perform a ramp stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. 4 FltCurLimStp - configures the drive to perform a current-limit stop and set the appropriate fault bit, in response this event. SL Node Cnfg Set bits to configure the SynchLink node. Setting bit [Time Keeper] configures the local node as the Time Master. Setting bit [Sync Now] configures the node to synchronize with the Time Master immediately (-S per node) on power-up or recovery. If you do not set bit, the node will stay in the fast mode, taking up to 36S per node to synchronize on power-up or recovery. Options Sync Now Time Keeper Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 SynchLink Rev Indicates the current revision of the local SynchLink Programmable Logic Firmware. = False = True SL System Rev Indicates the system revision of the SynchLink network. To be compatible on the network, all nodes must have the same major revision. Comm Scale: Comm Scale:../999.9 x../999.999 x 3 Interp SynchInput Bit [Sync Pulse] of this parameter is used as the synchronization pulse for he Interpolator. This parameter is linked to Par 99 [Motn Posit Sync] for a Motion Servo axis. It is linked to Par 786 [Xsync Status] for a SynchLink application. Options Sync Pulse SL Rx Comm Frmt Defines the node's communication format for receiving SynchLink data. This determines the number of axis data, direct data and buffered data words received. Configure the format by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True Value (A)xis (D)irect (B)uffered Options 6 4 7 8 9 4 8 6 4 4 7 4 8 6-bit 3-bit SL Rx DirectSel Determines the destination for the data received at word of direct received data. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. SL Rx DirectSel Determines the destination for the data received at word of direct received data. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Options: Options: 3 4 5 3 4 5 No Data No Data 6 SL Multiply 7 Event P 8 Event Opt 9 Event Status No Data No Data 6 SL Multiply 7 Event P 8 Event Opt 9 Event Status
3-8 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 3 SL Rx DirectSel Determines the destination for the data received at word of direct received data. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. 4 SL Rx DirectSel3 Determines the destination for the data received at word 3 of direct received data. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. SL Tx Comm Frmt Defines the node's communication format for transmitting SynchLink data. This determines the number of axis data words, direct data words and buffered data words transmitted. Configure the format by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Values Options: Options: 3 4 5 3 4 5 No Data No Data 6 SL Multiply 7 Event P 8 Event Opt 9 Event Status No Data No Data 6 SL Multiply 7 Event P 8 Event Opt 9 Event Status Value Axis Direct Buffered Options 7 8 9 4 8 7 4 8 Linkable Read-Write Data Type SL Tx DirectSel Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word. The source Options: type selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. If drive parameter is selected, a parameter of the appropriate data format (integer or real) must be linked to Parameter 4 [SL Dir Int Tx] or Parameter 4 [SL Dir Tx]. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. SL Tx DirectSel Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word. The source Options: type selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. If drive parameter is selected, a parameter of the appropriate data format (integer or real) must be linked to Par 43 [SL Dir Int Tx] or Par 44 [SL Dir Tx]. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. 3 SL Tx DirectSel Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word. The source Options: type selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. If drive parameter is selected, a parameter of the appropriate data format (integer or real) must be linked to Parameter 45 [SL Dir Int Tx] or Parameter 46 [SL Dir Tx]. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P Event P Event Opt Event Status No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P Event P Event Opt Event Status No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P Event P Event Opt Event Status 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dir Tx Data Dir Rx Data 3 E Accum 4 E Accum 5 Opt Accum 6 Opt Accum 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dir Tx Data Dir Rx Data 3 E Accum 4 E Accum 5 Opt Accum 6 Opt Accum 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dir Tx Data Dir Rx Data 3 E Accum 4 E Accum 5 Opt Accum 6 Opt Accum
Programming and Parameters 3-83 Name Description No. 4 SL Tx DirectSel3 Determines the source type for the data transmitted by direct transmit word 3. The source type selections are: no data, event, feedback and drive parameter. If drive parameter is selected, a parameter of the appropriate data format (integer or real) must be linked to Par 47 [SL Dir Int Tx3] or Par 48 [SL Dir Tx3]. Configure the selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. Values Options: 3 SL Mult A In Displays the A Multiplier Input, as a floating point (real) value. This value is divided by the Par 3 [SL Mult Base]. The source of the A Multiplier is determined by the "Rx Direct Data Selector" (Pars -4). The possible sources are: (zero), Par 54 [SL Dir Int Rx], Par 56 [SL Dir Int Rx], Par 58 [SL Dir Int Rx], or Par 6 [SL Dir Int Rx3]. The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input before it is converted to floating point. 3 SL Mult B In The B Multiplier Input. This must be a floating point (real) value. The SynchLink Multiply function takes this input after it is converted to integer. 3 SL Mult Base Specifies the base for SynchLink real to integer and integer to real conversion functions. Determines the resolution of the conversion results. You must use the same value at the transmitting node and receiving / multiplying nodes. Enter a value that will not produce an overflow - the product of this value and the inputs to the conversion and multiply functions must be less than 65,536. 33 SL Mult Out Displays the output of the SynchLink Multiply function as a floating (real) value. The value is the result of the formula Par 3 [SL Mult A In] source (integer) x Par 3 [SL Mult B In] / Par 3 [SL Mult Base] or Par 3 [SL Mult A In] x Par 3 [SL Mult B In]. Note: the SynchLink Multiply function produces an output that is always positive. 34 SL Mult State Displays the status of the SynchLink Multiply function. Bit [Local Ovflow] indicates a math overflow due to local multiply. Bit [Rx Overflow] indicates a math overflow in received data. Bit 3 [Ftol Ovflow] indicates a math overflow in the real to integer conversion function. Options 35 to Int In Provides the floating point (real) input to the real to integer conversion function. 36 to Int Out Displays the integer output of the real to integer conversion function. The value is the result of the formula Par 35 [ to Int In] x Par 3 [SL Mult Base]. 4 SL Rcv Events Displays the received event status from Par 4 [SL Rx P Regis] through Par 47 [SL Rx Opt Regis]. 4 SL Rx P Regis Displays received port registration data, if direct received data is configured to be port registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Pars -4). Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. No Data No Data SL Multiply Event P 3 Event P 4 5 6 7 8 Event Opt 9 Event Status 3../65535...5/.../5.../65535.. -/+6. /65535 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dir Tx Data Dir Rx Data 3 E Accum 4 E Accum 5 Opt Accum 6 Opt Accum FtoI Ovflow Rx Ovflow Local Ovflow Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Options Opt Regis D E Regis E Regis Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True v 6-bit = False = True 3-bit
3-84 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Values 4 SL Rx P Regis Displays received port registration data, if direct received data is configured to be port registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Pars -4). Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. 47 SL Rx Opt Regis Displays received registration data from feedback option (high resolution encoder daughter card), if direct received data is configured to be feedback option registration data by the Rx Direct Data Selector (Pars -4). Configure this selection by using the Peer Communication window in the DriveExecutive programming software. 49 SL Clr Events Set these bits to clear the corresponding event latches indicated in Par 4 [SL Rcv Events]. Options 54 SL Dir Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 55 [SL Dir Rx]. 55 SL Dir Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 54 [SL Dir Int Rx]. 56 SL Dir Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 57 [SL Dir Rx]. 57 SL Dir Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 56 [SL Dir Int Rx]. 58 SL Dir Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 59 [SL Dir Rx]. 59 SL Dir Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Direct Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 58 [SL Dir Int Rx]. 6 SL Dir Int Rx3 Displays the integer value of the Direct Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 6 [SL Dir Rx3]. 6 SL Dir Rx3 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Direct Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 6 [SL Dir Int Rx3]. 73 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 74 [SL Buf Rx]. 74 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 73 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 75 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 76 [SL Buf Rx]. 76 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 75 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 77 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 78 [SL Buf Rx]. Opt Regis E Regis E Regis. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-85 Name No. Description 78 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 77 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 79 SL Buf Int Rx3 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Rx3]. 8 SL Buf Rx3 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 79 [SL Buf Int Rx3]. 8 SL Buf Int Rx4 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Rx4]. 8 SL Buf Rx4 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Int Rx4]. 83 SL Buf Int Rx5 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 84 [SL Buf Rx5]. 84 SL Buf Rx5 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 83 [SL Buf Int Rx5]. Values 85 SL Buf Int Rx6 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 86 [SL Buf Rx6]. 86 SL Buf Rx6 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 85 [SL Buf Int Rx6]. 87 SL Buf Int Rx7 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 88 [SL Buf Rx7]. 88 SL Buf Rx7 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 87 [SL Buf Int Rx7]. 89 SL Buf Int Rx8 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Rx8]. 9 SL Buf Rx8 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 89 [SL Buf Int Rx8]. 9 SL Buf Int Rx9 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Rx9]. 9 SL Buf Rx9 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Int Rx9]. 93 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 94 [SL Buf Rx]. 94 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 93 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 95 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 96 [SL Buf Rx].. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-86 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 96 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 95 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 97 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 98 [SL Buf R]. 98 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 97 [SL Buf Int R]. 99 SL Buf Int Rx3 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf R3]. SL Buf Rx3 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 99 [SL Buf Int R3]. SL Buf Int Rx4 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. his parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf R4]. SL Buf Rx4 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Int R4]. 3 SL Buf Int Rx5 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 4 [SL Buf R5]. 4 SL Buf Rx5 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Int R5]. 5 SL Buf Int Rx6 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 6 [SL Buf Rx6]. 6 SL Buf Rx6 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 5 [SL Buf Int Rx6]. 7 SL Buf Int Rx7 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Rx7]. 8 SL Buf Rx7 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 7 [SL Buf Int Rx7]. 9 SL Buf Int Rx8 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Rx8]. SL Buf Rx8 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Int Rx8]. SL Buf Int Rx9 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Rx9]. SL Buf Rx9 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Int Rx9]. 3 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 4 [SL Buf Rx]. Values. -/+.. -/+.. -/+... -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-87 Name No. Description 4 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 5 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 6 [SL Buf Rx]. 6 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 5 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 7 SL Buf Int Rx Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Rx]. 8 SL Buf Rx Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 7 [SL Buf Int Rx]. 9 SL Buf Int Rx3 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Rx3]. SL Buf Rx3 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 3. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Int Rx3]. SL Buf Int Rx4 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This Par is paired with Par [SL Buf Rx4]. SL Buf Rx4 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 4. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par [SL Buf Int Rx4]. 3 SL Buf Int Rx5 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 4 [SL Buf Rx5]. 4 SL Buf Rx5 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 5. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Int Rx5]. 5 SL Buf Int Rx6 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 6 [SL Buf Rx6]. 6 SL Buf Rx6 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 6. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 5 [SL Buf Int Rx6]. 7 SL Buf Int Rx7 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 8 [SL Buf Rx7]. 8 SL Buf Rx7 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 7. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 7 [SL Buf Int Rx7]. 9 SL Buf Int Rx8 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Rx8]. 3 SL Buf Rx8 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 8. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 9 [SL Buf Int Rx8]. 3 SL Buf Int Rx9 Displays the integer value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Rx9]. Values. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-88 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description 3 SL Buf Rx9 Displays the floating point (real) value of the Buffered Received Data for word 9. Data transmitted from one node to another must be the same data type. This parameter is paired with Par 3 [SL Buf Int Rx9]. Values. -/+. 4 Tx Dir Data Type Indicates the data type of each Direct Transmit word. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the word s bit is not set the data type is integer. Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection. Options Tx3 Tx Tx Tx Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 4 SL Dir Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is integer. 4 SL Dir Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is real. 43 SL Dir Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is integer. 44 SL Dir Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is real. 45 SL Dir Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is integer. 46 SL Dir Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is real. 47 SL Dir Int Tx3 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type] is integer. 48 SL Dir Tx3 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 (indicated in Par 4 [Tx Dir Data Type]) is real.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 6 Tx Buf Data Type Indicates the data type of each Buffered Transmit word. If the word's bit is set the data type is floating point (real). If the word s bit is not set the data type is integer. Use the Peer Communication window to configure this selection. Options Tx9 Tx8 Tx7 Tx6 Tx5 Tx4 Tx3 Tx Tx Tx Tx9 Tx8 Tx7 Tx6 Tx5 Tx4 Tx3 Tx Tx Tx Tx9 Tx8 Tx7 Tx6 Tx5 Tx4 Tx3 Tx Tx Tx Default Bit 3 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 6 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 6 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 63 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 64 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 65 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 66 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type = False = True = False = True 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-89 Name Description No. 67 SL Buf Int Tx3 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 68 SL Buf Tx3 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. Value 69 SL Buf Int Tx4 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 7 SL Buf Tx4 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 7 SL Buf Int Tx5 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 7 SL Buf Tx5 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 73 SL Buf Int Tx6 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 74 SL Buf Tx6 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 75 SL Buf Int Tx7 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 76 SL Buf Tx7 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 77 SL Buf Int Tx8 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 78 SL Buf Tx8 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 79 SL Buf Int Tx9 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 8 SL Buf Tx9 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 8 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 8 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 83 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 84 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 85 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 86 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 87 SL Buf Int Tx3 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 88 SL Buf Tx3 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 89 SL Buf Int Tx4 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-9 Programming and Parameters Name Description No. 9 SL Buf Tx4 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. Value 9 SL Buf Int Tx5 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 9 SL Buf Tx5 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 93 SL Buf Int Tx6 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 94 SL Buf Tx6 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 95 SL Buf Int Tx7 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 96 SL Buf Tx7 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 97 SL Buf Int Tx8 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 98 SL Buf Tx8 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 99 SL Buf Int Tx9 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. SL Buf Tx9 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 3 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 4 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 5 SL Buf Int Tx Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word (indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type]) is integer. 6 SL Buf Tx Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word, if the data type for word (indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type]) is real. 7 SL Buf Int Tx3 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 8 SL Buf Tx3 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 3, if the data type for word 3 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 9 SL Buf Int Tx4 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. SL Buf Tx4 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 4, if the data type for word 4 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. SL Buf Int Tx5 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. SL Buf Tx5 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 5, if the data type for word 5 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. Comm Scale:. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. x Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit v 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit v 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-9 Name Description No. 3 SL Buf Int Tx6 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. Value 4 SL Buf Tx6 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 6, if the data type for word 6 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 5 SL Buf Int Tx7 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 6 SL Buf Tx7 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 7, if the data type for word 7 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 7 SL Buf Int Tx8 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. 8 SL Buf Tx8 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 8, if the data type for word 8 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 9 SL Buf Int Tx9 Provides integer data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is integer. SL Buf Tx9 Provides floating point (real) data for Direct Transmit word 9, if the data type for word 9 indicated in Par 6 [Tx Buf Data Type] is real. 6 SL Comm TP Sel Enter or write a value to select SynchLink data displayed by Par 7 [SL Comm TP Data]. 7 SL Comm TP Data Displays data selected by Par 6 [SL Comm TP Sel]. Options:. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit real Zero Zero 3 BufSeqErrTim SL MultA Src 4 Rx Sys Rev SL Mult A In 5 Tx Axis Size SL Mult B In 6 Tx Dir Size SL Mult Out 7 Tx Buf Size Rx Axis Size 8 Tx Pkg Size Rx Dir Size 9 Tx Seq Cnt Rx Buf Size Tx Index Rx Pkg Size Tx Index Rx Seq Cnt Tx Index Rx Index 3 Rx Vendor ID Rx Index 4 Rx ModuleTyp Rx Index 5 Rx Serial # 8 SL Error History Displays SynchLink faults which have occurred since the last fault clear operation or power cycle. Bit [Sync Loss] indicates SynchLink communication has failed, after it had been established Bit [Rx Loss] indicates the receive port is not receiving data, and the receive port configuration is set to receive data Bit [Many BOF Err] indicates the number of Beginning Of Frame (BOF) errors exceeds limit set by Par 35 [SL BOF Err Limit] Bit 3 [Many CRC Err] indicates the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors exceeds limit set by Par 34 [SL CRC Err Limit] Bit 4 [Pckg Msg Err] indicates the received package sequence number has not matched for.s Bit 5 [CommForm Err] indicates the format of received data does not match the configuration of the receive port Bit 6 [Sys Rev Err] indicates the system revision in the received data does not match the value of Par [SynchLink Rev] Bit 7 [Mult TKeeper] indicates more than one node on the SynchLink system is configured as a time keeper Options Mult TKeeper Sys Rev Err CommForm Err Pckg Msg Err Many CRC Err Many BOF Err Rx Loss Sync Loss Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = True = False 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-9 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Value 9 SL Error Status Indicates presence of SynchLink faults. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. Bit [Sync Loss] indicates SynchLink communication has failed, after it had been established Bit [Rx Loss] indicates the receive port is not receiving data, and the receive port configuration is set to receive data Bit [Many BOF Err] indicates the number of Beginning Of Frame (BOF) errors exceeds limit set by Par 35 [SL BOF Err Limit] Bit 3 [Many CRC Err] indicates the number of Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) errors exceeds limit set by Par 34 [SL CRC Err Limit] Bit 4 [Pckg Msg Err] indicates the received package sequence number has not matched for.s Bit 5 [CommForm Err] indicates the format of received data does not match the configuration of the receive port Bit 6 [Sys Rev Err] indicates the system revision in the received data does not match the value of Par [SynchLink Rev] Bit 7 [Mult TKeeper] indicates more than one node on the SynchLink system is configured as a time keeper Options Mult TKeeper Sys Rev Err CommForm Err Pckg Msg Err Many CRC Err Many BOF Err Rx Loss Sync Loss Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 3 SL CRC Err Accum Displays the total accumulated number of CRC errors. Clearing a CRC fault resets this accumulator. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. 3 SL CRC Error Displays the number of CRC errors that occurred during the last test (last 8 ms). This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. 3 SL BOF Err Accum Displays the total accumulated number of BOF errors. Clearing a BOF fault resets this accumulator. This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. 33 SL BOF Error Displays the number of BOF errors that occurred during the last test (last 8 ms). This data is visible on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. 34 SL CRC Err Limit The number of CRC errors per test (per 8 ms) allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink CRC Error exception event. Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. 35 SL BOF Err Limit The number of BOF errors per test (per 8 ms) allowed before the drive declares a SynchLink BOF Error exception event. Set this limit on the SynchLink diagnostics tab of the Peer Communication window. /49496796 /49496796 /49496796r /49496796 5 Trend Control Set bits to configure the Data Trend function: Bit [Enbl Collect] - Trend data collection begins on the rising edge of this bit and continues until either this bit is set low or the trend data has been completely collected. This bit should be cleared following either the 'Triggered' status or 'Complete' status (bit and, respectively, in Par 5 [Trend Status]) in order to complete the trend sequence. This bit can also be cleared at any time to force the trend data sampling to stop and set the 'Complete' status bit. Setting bit [In ] - specifies the data type for Trend Input. The source for data is Par 65 [Trend In ]. Clearing the bit specifies the data type. The source for data is Par 64 [Trend In Int]. Setting bit [In ] - specifies the data type for Trend Input. The source for data is Par 67 [Trend In ]. Clearing the bit specifies the data type. The source for data is Par 66 [Trend In Int]. Setting bit 3 [In3 ] - specifies the data type for Trend Input 3. The source for data is Par 69 [Trend In3 ]. Clearing the bit specifies the data type. The source for data is Par 68 [Trend In3 Int]. Setting bit 4 [In4 ] - specifies the data type for Trend Input 4. The source for data is Par 7 [Trend In4 ]. Clearing the bit specifies the data type. The source for data is Par 7 [Trend In4 Int]. Setting bit 5 [Auto Output] causes the trend output parameters to automatically cycle through the entire trend buffer at the rate specified in Par 53 [Trend Rate]. Typically, you link the output to an analog output for display on an oscilloscope. Auto output is accomplished by writing to Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. Clearing this bit requires manual selection of Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer] to view the trend buffer contents. /56 /56 Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit Options Auto Output In 4 In 3 In In Enbl Collect Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True
Programming and Parameters 3-93 Name No. Description Value 5 Trend Status Bits indicate the status of the Data Trend function: Bit [Triggered] indicates a Trend Trigger event has been detected. This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 5 [Trend Control], bit [Enbl Collect]. Bit [Complete] indicates all the post trigger data samples have been gathered and the trend buffers are full. It will also be set if the Par 5 [Trend Control], bit [Enbl Collect] is cleared before the trigger occurs. The trend data outputs will be updated from the contents of the trend buffer data when this bit is set. Par 5 [Trend Control], bit [Enbl Collect] can be cleared after this bit is set without affecting the trend data buffer contents. This bit will clear in response to the rise of Par 5 [Trend Control], bit [Enbl Collect]. The trend outputs will be forced to zero while this bit is clear. Options Complete Triggered Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 5 Trend State Value indicates the state of the Data Trend function. Options: Wait Enable - indicates the trend function is ready and waiting to begin data collection. Setting bit [Enbl Collect] of Par5 [Trend Control] will cause data collection to begin. In this state, Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer] and the Trend Output parameters are active. First Scan - indicates the Trend function is executing the first pass through the trend sample buffer. This takes 5 ms. (.5 ms x 4 samples). When it enters this state, the Trend function clears bit [Triggered] and bit [Complete] of Par 5 [Trend Enbl Collect Status]. While in this state, the Trend function refreshes the data. Also while in this state, the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero. When done, it enters the Pre-trigger state. Pre-trigger - indicates the Trend function is sampling the trend inputs and storing them in memory, at a rate determined by parameter 53 [Trend Rate]. Sampling continues until either the trend trigger event occurs or bit [Enbl Collect] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared. While in this state, the Trend function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero. If the trigger event occurs, the function sets bit [Triggered] of Par 5 [Trend Status] and enters the Post-trigger state. If bit [Enbl Collect] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared, the function sets bit [Complete] of Par 5 [Trend Status] and returns to the Wait Enable state. 3 Post-trigger indicates the Trend function is continuing to sample and save the trend inputs until the buffer is full. While in this state, the function forces the Trend Output parameters to zero. When the buffer is full, the function sets bit [Complete] of Par 5 [Trend Status] and enters the Wait Disable state. 4 Wait Disable - indicates the Trend function is complete and waiting for bit [Enbl Collect] of Par 5 [Trend Control] to be cleared. When this is done, the trend function returns to the Wait Enable state. While in the Wait Disable state, Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer] and the Trend Output Parameters are active. 53 Trend Rate Sets the sample time for both trend input and output updates. = False = True 54 Trend TrigA Int Provides the integer input for the A trigger function. This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 55 [Trend TrigA ]. The result is compared with the Trigger B sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur. 55 Trend TrigA Provides the real input for the A trigger function. This real number is summed with Par 54 [Trend TrigA Int]. The result is compared with the Trigger B sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur. 56 Trend TrigB Int Provides the integer input for the B trigger function. This integer is converted to a real number and summed with Par 57 [Trend TrigB ]. The result is compared with the Trigger A sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur. 57 Trend TrigB Provides the real input for the B trigger function. This real number is summed with Par 57 [Trend TrigB ]. The result is compared with the Trigger A sum. If the A sum exceeds the B sum, then a trend trigger will occur. 58 Trend Trig Data This is the logic input for the Trend Trigger Function. A trigger will occur on the rise of the Min: specified bit in this word. The bit will be specified by Par 59 [Trend Trig Bit]. Max: 59 Trend Trig Bit Specifies the bit in Par 58 [Trend Trig Data] that will cause a Trend Trigger to occur. Positive numbers specify rising edges and negative numbers specify falling edges. 6 Trend PreSamples Specifies the number of pre-trigger samples in the trend buffer. Pre-trigger samples are the samples that occur before the trigger and remain in the buffer. The remainder of the trend buffer will contain post-trigger samples. 64 Trend In Int Provides integer input to the Trend function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer, if bit [In ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared. 3 4 Val Wait Enable Val First Scan Enbl Collect Done Wait Enable Wait Enable First Scan Pre-trigger Post-trigger Wait Disable msec.5.5/.l. -/+.. -/+. -3/3 5 / j Enbl Collect Val Pre-Trigger Val 4 Wait Disable Val 3 Post-Trigger Trigger Event Buffer Full Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit Boolean 6-bit 6-bit 3-bit
3-94 Programming and Parameters Name No. Description Value 65 Trend In Provides real input to the Trend function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer, if bit [In ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is set. 66 Trend In Int Provides integer input to the Trend function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer, if bit [In ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared. 67 Trend In Provides real input to the Trend function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer, if bit [In ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is set. 68 Trend In3 Int Provides integer input to the Trend 3 function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 3, if bit 3 [In 3 ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared. 69 Trend In3 Provides real input to the Trend 3 function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 3, if bit 3 [In 3 ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is set. 7 Trend In4 Int Provides integer input to the Trend 4 function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 4, if bit 4 [In 4 ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is cleared. 7 Trend In4 Provides real input to the Trend 4 function. The Trending function samples this parameter for Trend Buffer 4, if bit 4 [In 4 ] of Par 5 [Trend Control] is set. 8 Trend Marker Int Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using integer data. The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function. 8 Trend Marker Marks the start of data for trend buffers that are using real data. The Trend Marker can be used to provide a scope trigger signal for the Auto Output function. 83 TrendBuffPointer Selects the trend buffer element to be displayed in the Trend Output Parameters when the trend function is inactive (not collecting data samples). A zero value points to the element that corresponds to the trigger event. Negative values point to pre-trigger data. Positive values point to post-trigger data. When the Auto Output function is running, this parameter will automatically sequence through it's full range, at a rate set by Par 53 [Trend Rate]. 84 Trend Out Int Displays the output for Trend Buffer, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 85 Trend Out Displays the output for Trend Buffer, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 86 Trend Out Int Displays the output for Trend Buffer, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 87 Trend Out Displays the output for Trend Buffer, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 88 Trend Out3 Int Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 3, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 89 Trend Out3 Displays the output for Trend Buffer 3, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 3, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 9 Trend Out4 Int Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4, if the buffer is using integer data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 4, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 9 Trend Out4 Displays the output for Trend Buffer 4, if the buffer is using real data. This will equal the value of the element, in Trend Buffer 4, specified by Par 83 [TrendBuffPointer]. 3 User Data Int 5 General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 3 User Data Int 6 General purpose parameter available for storage of 3-bit enumerated data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 35 User Data General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 36 User Data General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. -/+3. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 6-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
Programming and Parameters 3-95 Name Description No. 37 User Data 3 General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 38 User Data 4 General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 39 User Data 5 General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. 3 User Data 6 General purpose parameter available for storage of real data by the operator. This value will be retained through a power cycle. Value. -/+.. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. Linkable Read-Write Data Type 37 Switch Control Set bits to control the two software SPDT switches. Bit [SW Int On] controls the integer switch. Setting bit moves the value from Par 37 [SW Int NO] into Par 373 [SW Int Output]. Resetting this bit moves the value of Par 37 [SW Int NC] into Par 373 [SW Int Output]. Bit [SW On] controls the real switch. Setting bit moves the value from Par 374 [SW NO] into Par 376 [SW Output]. Resetting this bit moves the value of Par 375 [SW NC] into Par 376 [SW Output]. Options SW On SW Int On Default Bit 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 = False = True 37 SW Int NO The integer switch moves the value of this parameter into Par 373 [SW Int Output] when bit [SW Int On] of Par 37 [Switch Control] is set. 37 SW Int NC The integer switch moves the value of this parameter into Par 373 [SW Int Output] when bit [SW Int On] of Par 37 [Switch Control] is reset. 373 SW Int Output Displays the output of the integer switch. It will reflect the value of either Par 37 [SW Int NO] or 37 [SW Int NC]. 374 SW NO The real switch moves the value of this parameter into Par 376 [SW Output] when bit [SW Int On] of Par 37 [Switch Control] is set. 375 SW NC The real switch moves the value of this parameter into Par 376 [SW Output] when bit [SW Int On] of Par 37 [Switch Control] is reset. 376 SW Output Displays the output of the real switch. It will reflect the value of either Parameter 374 [SW NO] or 375 [SW NC].. -/+.. -/+.. -/+. 3-bit 3-bit 3-bit
3-96 Programming and Parameters Parameter Cross Reference By Name Name Number % Motor Flux 39 Abs OverSpd Lim 335 Abs Posit Offset 757 Accel Time 3 Act Motor Posit 763 Act Spd Reg BW 97 AI Filt Gain 84 AI Filt Gain 8 Alarm Status 36 Alarm Status 37 Anlg In Data 8 Anlg In Filt BW 85 Anlg In Offset 83 Anlg In Scale 8 Anlg In Volts 8 Anlg In Data 86 Anlg In Filt BW 8 Anlg In Offset 89 Anlg In Scale 88 Anlg In Volts 87 Anlg Out Offset 8 Anlg Out 85 Anlg Out Scale 87 Anlg Out Volts 86 Anlg Out Zero 88 Anlg Out Offset 83 Anlg Out 8 Anlg Out Scale 8 Anlg Out Volts 8 Anlg Out Zero 83 AnlgOut 84 AnlgOut 89 Applied LogicCmd 5 Atune Spd Ref 9 Atune Torq Ref 9 Aux Posit Ref 743 Brake OL Cnfg 369 Brake PulseWatts 46 Brake TP Data 49 Brake TP Sel 48 Brake Watts 47 Brake/Bus Cnfg 44 Bus Util Limit 5 BusReg/Brake Ref 45 BusUndervoltCnfg 393 Control Options 53 Curr Ref TP Data 364 Curr Ref TP Sel 363 Current Reg BW 53 Data In A Int 77 Data In A 78 Data In A Int 79 Data In A 7 Data In B Int 7 Data In B 7 Data In B Int 73 Data In B 74 Data In C Int 75 Data In C 76 Name Number Data In C Int 77 Data In C 78 Data In D Int 79 Data In D 7 Data In D Int 7 Data In D 7 Data Out A Int 74 Data Out A 75 Data Out A Int 76 Data Out A 77 Data Out B Int 78 Data Out B 79 Data Out B Int 73 Data Out B 73 Data Out C Int 73 Data Out C 733 Data Out C Int 734 Data Out C 735 Data Out D Int 736 Data Out D 737 Data Out D Int 738 Data Out D 739 DC Bus Voltage 36 Dead Time 44 Dead Time Comp 45 Decel Time 33 Delayed Spd Ref 45 DeltaSpeedScale 6 DigIn ConfigStat 59 DigIn Bit 87 DigIn Data 86 DigIn Debounce 89 DigIn Sel 838 DigIn User Data 88 DigIn Bit 83 DigIn Data 83 DigIn Debounce 833 DigIn Sel 839 DigIn User Data 83 DigIn3 Bit 835 DigIn3 Data 834 DigIn3 Debounce 837 DigIn3 Sel 84 DigIn3 User Data 836 DigOut Bit 844 DigOut Data 843 DigOut Bit 846 DigOut Data 845 Direction Mask 696 Direction Owner 73 DLink OutDataTyp 73 DPI Baud Rate 69 DPI CommLoss Cfg 39 DPI Ref Select 69 Drive Logic Rslt 58 Drive OL JnctTmp 345 Drive OL Status 346 Drive OL TP Data 348 Drive OL TP Sel 347 Elapsed MWHrs 99 Elapsed Run Time 98 En In Debounce 85 Name Number Encdr Config 33 Encdr Error 34 Encdr Loss Cnfg 365 Encdr Position 3 Encdr Spd Fdbk 3 Encdr Config 43 Encdr Error 44 Encdr Loss Cnfg 366 Encdr Position 4 Encdr Spd Fdbk 4 Encoder PPR 3 Encoder PPR 4 Est Speed Fdbk 548 Est Theta Delay 477 Exception Event 3 Exception Event 3 Ext Flt/Alm Cnfg 379 Fault Clr Mask 697 Fault Clr Owner 74 Fault Status 33 Fault Status 34 Fault TP Data 33 Fault TP Sel 39 FB Opt Posit 5 FB Opt Spd Fdbk 5 FB Opt LossCnfg 368 FB Opt Posit 76 FB Opt Spd Fdbk 77 Fdbk Option ID 49 Filtered Spd Ref 44 Filtered SpdFdbk 7 Flux Current 488 Flux Rate Limit 45 Flux Ratio Ref 44 Flux Reg I Gain 444 Flux Reg P Gain 443 Flux Reg P Gain 47 Flx LpassFilt BW 36 FOC Mode Config 5 FOC Mode Config 5 Freq Reg FF Gain 473 Freq Reg I Gain 449 Freq Reg P Gain 45 Freq Reg We BW 474 Freq Reg Wr BW 475 FricComp Rated 44 FricComp Setup 4 FricComp Slip 43 FricComp Spd Ref 4 FricComp Stick 4 FricComp TorqAdd 45 Fwd Speed Limit 3 Heatsink Temp 33 Hi Res Config 59 Hi Res Status 6 Hi Res TP Data 6 Hi Res TP Sel 6 Ids Command 537 Ids Feedback 54 Ids Integ Freq 49 Ids Reg P Gain 43 In Posit BW 78
Programming and Parameters 3-97 Name Number In Posit Dwell 783 Inertia SpeedRef 56 Inertia Torq Add 59 InertiaAccelGain 57 InertiaDecelGain 58 In 6 In 6 In 64 In3 66 In4 68 In5 6 In6 6 In7 64 In8 66 In9 68 In 6 In 6 In 64 In3 66 In4 68 In5 63 Out 63 Out 634 Out 636 Out3 638 Out4 64 Out5 64 Out6 644 Out7 646 Out8 648 Out9 65 Out 65 Out 654 Out 656 Out3 658 Out4 66 Out5 66 Inv OL Pend Cnfg 376 Inv OL Trip Cnfg 377 Inv OT Pend Cnfg 375 Iq Actual Lim 353 Iq Actual Ref 35 Iq Rate Limit 354 Iq Rate Limited 355 Iq Ref Limited 358 Iq Ref Trim 35 Iqs Command 535 Iqs Feedback 539 Iqs Integ Freq 4 Iqs Rate Limit 43 Iqs Reg P Gain 4 Is Actual Lim 35 Iu Offset 453 Iw Offset 454 Jog Mask 695 Jog Owner 7 Jog Speed 7 Jog Speed 8 Leak Inductance 49 Lgx Closed Cnfg 388 Lgx Comm Format 664 Lgx CommLossData 385 Name Number Lgx LinkChngCnfg 389 Lgx OutOfRunCnfg 386 Lgx Timeout Cnfg 387 LimGen X axis In 6 LimGen Y axis Mn 5 LimGen Y axis Mx 4 Limit Gen Hi Out 7 Limit Gen Lo Out 8 Limit Status 34 Limited Spd Ref 4 Lin Update Rate 89 Line Undervolts 49 Linear CPR 9 Linear Status 86 Linear TP Data 88 Linear TP Sel 87 Load Estimate Local I/O Status 84 Logic Command 5 Logic Ctrl State 57 Logic Mask 693 Logic State Mach 5 Logic Status 55 Logic TP Data 6 Logic TP Sel 6 MC Build Number 56 MC Cmd Lim Cnfg 38 MC Diag Done 55 MC Diag Error 55 MC Diag Error 553 MC Diag Error 3 554 MC Diag Status 55 MC Firmware Rev 57 MC Status 555 MC TP Bit 546 MC TP Select 544 MC TP Value 545 Min Flux 36 Motor Ctrl Ackn 67 Motor Ctrl Cmmd 66 Motor Ctrl Mode 485 Motor Fdbk Sel Motor Inertia 8 Motor NP FLA Motor NP Hertz 3 Motor NP Power 5 Motor NP RPM 4 Motor NP Volts Motor NTC Coef 487 Motor Poles 7 Motor Spd Est 74 Motor Spd Fdbk 3 Motor Speed Ref 3 Motor Stall Cnfg 374 Motor Stall Time 373 Motor Torque Ref 33 MotorFluxCurr FB 3 Mtr Current Lim 356 Mtr IT Calibrat 339 Mtr IT Curr Min 337 Mtr IT Spd Min 338 Mtr IT Trp ThrH 34 Name Number Mtr NP Pwr Units 6 Mtr OL Pend Cnfg 37 Mtr OL Trip Cnfg 37 Mtr Posit Fdbk 76 Mtr TorqCurr Ref 35 Mtr Vds Base 434 Mtr Vqs Base 435 Mtring Power Lim 7 MtrSpd Est Posit 75 MtrSpd Sim Posit 7 MtrSpd Simulated 76 NetLoss DPI Cnfg 39 Notch Filt Freq 8 Notch Filt Mode 7 OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 OL OpnLp CurrLim 343 Opt Regis Cnfg 54 Opt Regis Ctrl 55 Opt Regis Ltch 53 Opt Regis Stat 56 Opt Regis Cnfg 8 Opt Regis Ctrl 8 Opt Regis Ltch 79 Opt Regis Stat 8 Output Curr Disp 97 Output Current 38 Output Freq 3 Output Power 3 Output Voltage 37 ParamAccessLevel 85 Peak Ctrl Status PeakDetect Out 5 PeakDetect Out 9 PeakDtct Ctrl In PeakDtct In Int PeakDtct Preset 4 PeakDtct In Int 6 PeakDtct Preset 8 PI Command 83 PI Feedback 8 PI High Limit 9 PI Integ HLim 88 PI Integ LLim 89 PI Integ Output 9 PI Integ Time 87 PI Lower Limit 9 PI Lpass Filt BW 84 PI Output 8 PI Preload 85 PI Prop Gain 86 PI Reference 8 PI TP Data 94 PI TP Sel 93 PkDtct In 3 PkDtct In 7 PM AbsEncd Offst 54 PM D Inductance 5 PM Mtr CEMF Coef 53 PM Mtr CEMF Comp 47 PM Q Inductance 5 PM Stator Resist 5 PM Test Freq Ref 58
3-98 Programming and Parameters Name Number PM Test FreqRamp 57 PM Test I Ref 59 PM Test Idc Ramp 56 PM TestWait Time 55 PMag Mode Cnfg 5 PMag Tune Cnfg 57 Port Regis Cnfg 36 Port Regis Ctrl 37 Port Regis Ltch 35 Port Regis Stat 38 Port Regis Cnfg 46 Port Regis Ctrl 47 Port Regis Ltch 45 Port Regis Stat 48 Posit Actl Load 765 Posit Detct In 784 Posit Detct In 785 Posit FB EGR Div 767 Posit FB EGR Mul 766 Posit Index Ctrl 796 Posit Index Step 797 Posit Load Fdbk 764 Posit Offset 753 Posit Offset 754 Posit Offset Spd 755 Posit Ref Sel 74 Posit Spd Output 38 Posit TP Select 777 PositDetct Stpt 78 PositDetct Stpt 78 PositIndexOutput 799 PositIndexPreset 798 Position Cmmd 747 Position Control 74 Position Error 769 Position Status 74 PositRef EGR Div 746 PositRef EGR Mul 745 PositRef EGR Out 744 PositReg Droop 77 PositReg Integ 77 PositReg P Gain 768 PositTP Data Int 778 PositTP Data 779 Power EE TP Data 43 Power EE TP Sel 4 Power Loss Level 48 Power Loss Mode 46 Power Loss Time 47 PreCharge Delay 47 PreChrg Control 4 PreChrg Err Cnfg 38 PreChrg TimeOut 4 Pt-Pt Accel Time 759 Pt-Pt Decel Time 76 Pt-Pt Filt BW 76 Pt-Pt Posit Ref 758 PWM Frequency 4 Ramped Spd Ref 4 Rated Amps 4 Rated Slip Freq 486 Rated Volts 4 Name Number In 6 In 63 In 65 In3 67 In4 69 In5 6 In6 63 In7 65 In8 67 In9 69 In 6 In 63 In 65 In3 67 In4 69 In5 63 Out 633 Out 635 Out 637 Out3 639 Out4 64 Out5 643 Out6 645 Out7 647 Out8 649 Out9 65 Out 653 Out 655 Out 657 Out3 659 Out4 66 Out5 663 to Int In 35 to Int Out 36 Regen Power Lim 8 Relay Out Bit 84 Relay Out Data 84 4 4 4 43 44 45 46 Reslvr CableBal 74 Reslvr Carrier 7 Reslvr Config 66 Reslvr In Volts 7 Reslvr SpdRatio 7 Reslvr Status 67 Reslvr TP Data 69 Reslvr TP Sel 68 Rev Speed Limit 3 Rotor Resistance 5 Rslvr XfrmRatio 73 Run Inhibit Stat 56 S Curve Spd Ref 43 S Curve Time 34 Scaled Spd Fdbk 7 Scaled Spd Ref 46 Selected Spd Ref 4 Service Factor 336 Name Number Servo Lock Gain 85 Set Speed Lim 7 Setpt Data 7 Setpt Limit 74 Setpt Data 75 Setpt Limit 77 Setpt TripPoint 73 Setpt TripPoint 76 SL BOF Err Accum 3 SL BOF Err Limit 35 SL BOF Error 33 SL Buf Int Rx 73 SL Buf Int Rx 75 SL Buf Int Rx 77 SL Buf Int Rx3 79 SL Buf Int Rx4 8 SL Buf Int Rx5 83 SL Buf Int Rx6 85 SL Buf Int Rx7 87 SL Buf Int Rx8 89 SL Buf Int Rx9 9 SL Buf Int Rx 93 SL Buf Int Rx 95 SL Buf Int Rx 97 SL Buf Int Rx3 99 SL Buf Int Rx4 SL Buf Int Rx5 3 SL Buf Int Rx6 5 SL Buf Int Rx7 7 SL Buf Int Rx8 9 SL Buf Int Rx9 SL Buf Int Rx 3 SL Buf Int Rx 5 SL Buf Int Rx 7 SL Buf Int Rx3 9 SL Buf Int Rx4 SL Buf Int Rx5 3 SL Buf Int Rx6 5 SL Buf Int Rx7 7 SL Buf Int Rx8 9 SL Buf Int Rx9 3 SL Buf Int Tx 6 SL Buf Int Tx 63 SL Buf Int Tx 65 SL Buf Int Tx3 67 SL Buf Int Tx4 69 SL Buf Int Tx5 7 SL Buf Int Tx6 73 SL Buf Int Tx7 75 SL Buf Int Tx8 77 SL Buf Int Tx9 79 SL Buf Int Tx 8 SL Buf Int Tx 83 SL Buf Int Tx 85 SL Buf Int Tx3 87 SL Buf Int Tx4 89 SL Buf Int Tx5 9 SL Buf Int Tx6 93 SL Buf Int Tx7 95 SL Buf Int Tx8 97 SL Buf Int Tx9 99 SL Buf Int Tx
Programming and Parameters 3-99 Name Number SL Buf Int Tx 3 SL Buf Int Tx 5 SL Buf Int Tx3 7 SL Buf Int Tx4 9 SL Buf Int Tx5 SL Buf Int Tx6 3 SL Buf Int Tx7 5 SL Buf Int Tx8 7 SL Buf Int Tx9 9 SL Buf Rx 74 SL Buf Rx 76 SL Buf Rx 78 SL Buf Rx3 8 SL Buf Rx4 8 SL Buf Rx5 84 SL Buf Rx6 86 SL Buf Rx7 88 SL Buf Rx8 9 SL Buf Rx9 9 SL Buf Rx 94 SL Buf Rx 96 SL Buf Rx 98 SL Buf Rx3 SL Buf Rx4 SL Buf Rx5 4 SL Buf Rx6 6 SL Buf Rx7 8 SL Buf Rx8 SL Buf Rx9 SL Buf Rx 4 SL Buf Rx 6 SL Buf Rx 8 SL Buf Rx3 SL Buf Rx4 SL Buf Rx5 4 SL Buf Rx6 6 SL Buf Rx7 8 SL Buf Rx8 3 SL Buf Rx9 3 SL Buf Tx 6 SL Buf Tx 64 SL Buf Tx 66 SL Buf Tx3 68 SL Buf Tx4 7 SL Buf Tx5 7 SL Buf Tx6 74 SL Buf Tx7 76 SL Buf Tx8 78 SL Buf Tx9 8 SL Buf Tx 8 SL Buf Tx 84 SL Buf Tx 86 SL Buf Tx3 88 SL Buf Tx4 9 SL Buf Tx5 9 SL Buf Tx6 94 SL Buf Tx7 96 SL Buf Tx8 98 SL Buf Tx9 SL Buf Tx SL Buf Tx 4 SL Buf Tx 6 Name Number SL Buf Tx3 8 SL Buf Tx4 SL Buf Tx5 SL Buf Tx6 4 SL Buf Tx7 6 SL Buf Tx8 8 SL Buf Tx9 SL Clr Events 49 SL Comm TP Data 7 SL Comm TP Sel 6 SL CommLoss Cnfg 384 SL CommLoss Data 383 SL CRC Err Accum 3 SL CRC Err Limit 34 SL CRC Error 3 SL Dir Int Rx 54 SL Dir Int Rx 56 SL Dir Int Rx 58 SL Dir Int Rx3 6 SL Dir Int Tx 4 SL Dir Int Tx 43 SL Dir Int Tx 45 SL Dir Int Tx3 47 SL Dir Rx 55 SL Dir Rx 57 SL Dir Rx 59 SL Dir Rx3 6 SL Dir Tx 4 SL Dir Tx 44 SL Dir Tx 46 SL Dir Tx3 48 SL Error History 8 SL Error Status 9 SL Mult A In 3 SL Mult B In 3 SL Mult Base 3 SL Mult Out 33 SL Mult State 34 SL MultErr Cnfg 39 SL Node Cnfg SL Rcv Events 4 SL Rx Comm Frmt SL Rx DirectSel SL Rx DirectSel SL Rx DirectSel 3 SL Rx DirectSel3 4 SL Rx Opt Regis 47 SL Rx P Regis 4 SL Rx P Regis 4 SL System Rev SL System Time 37 SL Tx Comm Frmt SL Tx DirectSel SL Tx DirectSel SL Tx DirectSel 3 SL Tx DirectSel3 4 Slip Gain Comp 476 Slip Gain Max 445 Slip Gain Min 446 Slip Ratio 533 Slip Reg I Gain 448 Slip Reg P Gain 447 Name Number Spd Err Filt BW 89 Spd Fdbk Scale 73 Spd Fdbk TP Data 79 Spd Fdbk TP RPM 78 Spd Fdbk TP Sel 77 Spd Gain TP Data 99 Spd Gain TP Sel 98 Spd Obs Trq Gain 7 Spd Observer BW Spd Ref Bypass 37 Spd Ref TP Data 5 Spd Ref TP RPM 5 Spd Ref TP Sel 5 Spd Ref Divide Spd Ref Multi 3 Spd Reg BW 9 Spd Reg Damping 9 Spd Reg Droop 86 Spd Reg I Gain 8 Spd Reg Neg Lim 3 Spd Reg P Gain 8 Spd Reg PI Out 3 Spd Reg Pos Lim Spd Reg TP Data 9 Spd Reg TP Sel 8 Spd Trim SpdRef 47 Spd/Torq ModeSel SpdRef Filt BW 36 SpdRef Filt Gain 35 SpdReg AntiBckup 84 SpdReg Integ Out SpdReg P Gain Mx 9 SpdTrim 3 Scale 4 SpdTrim Filt BW 6 Speed Comp 55 Speed Error Speed Ref Speed Ref Speed Ref 4 4 Speed Ref 5 5 Speed Ref DPI Speed Ref Scale 38 Speed Ref Sel 6 Speed Reg Ctrl 8 Speed Trim Speed Trim Speed Trim 3 3 SReg FB Filt BW 94 SReg Out Filt BW 96 SReg Torq Preset 87 SRegFB Filt Gain 93 SRegOut FiltGain 95 Start Mask 694 Start Owner 7 Stator Frequency 534 StatorInduc Gain 469 StatorInductance 49 StatorResistance 49 Stop Dwell Time 54 Stop Oper TP Sel 63 Stop Owner 7 StopOper TP Data 64
3- Programming and Parameters Name Number STrim Filt Gain 5 SW Int NC 37 SW Int NO 37 SW Int Output 373 SW NC 375 SW NO 374 SW Output 376 Switch Control 37 SynchLink Rev SynchLink Status 36 Test Current Ref 43 Test Freq Rate 433 Test Freq Ref 43 Test Mode Config 54 Test Status 65 Time Axis Output Time Axis Rate Torq NegLim Actl 4 Torq PosLim Actl 3 Torq Ref TP Data 3 Torq Ref TP Sel 3 Torq Ref Div Torq Ref Mult 4 Torque En Dly 5 Torque Neg Limit 6 Torque Pos Limit 5 Torque Ref Torque Ref 3 Torque Step 6 Torque Trim 5 Total Inertia 9 Trend Control 5 Trend In Int 64 Trend In 65 Trend In Int 66 Trend In 67 Trend In3 Int 68 Trend In3 69 Trend In4 Int 7 Trend In4 7 Trend Mark 8 Trend Marker Int 8 Trend Out Int 84 Trend Out 85 Trend Out Int 86 Trend Out 87 Trend Out3 Int 88 Trend Out3 89 Trend Out4 Int 9 Trend Out4 9 Trend PreSamples 6 Trend Rate 53 Trend State 5 Trend Status 5 Trend Trig Bit 59 Trend Trig Data 58 Trend TrigA Int 54 Trend TrigA 55 Trend TrigB Int 56 Trend TrigB 57 TrendBuffPointer 83 Tx Buf Data Type 6 Name Number Tx Dir Data Type 4 User Data Int 396 User Data Int 397 User Data Int 3 398 User Data Int 4 399 User Data Int 5 3 User Data Int 6 3 UserData 35 UserData 36 UserData 3 37 UserData 4 38 UserData 5 39 UserData 6 3 Vds Command 54 Vds Fdbk Filt 44 Vds Max 438 Vds Min 44 Virt Encdr Dlyed 63 Virt Encdr Posit 6 Virt Encoder EPR 6 Virtual Edge/Rev 6 Voltage Class 43 VoltFdbkLossCnfg 394 VPL Build Number 35 VPL Firmware Rev 34 Vqs Command 54 Vqs Fdbk Filt 44 Vqs Max 437 Vqs Min 439 X Offst SpdFilt 756 XReg Integ HiLim 773 XReg Integ LoLim 77 XReg Integ Out 774 XReg Spd HiLim 776 XReg Spd LoLim 775 Xsync Gen Period 787 Xsync In 788 Xsync In 79 Xsync In 3 793 Xsync Out 789 Xsync Out 79 Xsync Out Dly 79 Xsync Out 3 794 Xsync Out 3 Dly 795 Xsync Status 786 Zero Speed Lim 6
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter Objectives This chapter provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 7S. A list and description of drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable) and alarms is included. For Information on... See page... Faults and Alarms 4- Drive Status 4- Manually Clearing Faults 4-4 Fault Descriptions 4-4 Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types. Type Fault Description ➀ Non-Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. The fault will be reset on power up after repair ➁ User Configurable Programming and commissioning personnel can configure the drive s response to these exception events. Responses include: Ignore Alarm Fault Coast Stop Fault Ramp Stop Fault Current Limit Stop Drive Status The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any changes will be indicated through the front panel LEDs and/or the HIM (if present).
4- Troubleshooting LED Indications Figure 4. Drive Status Indicators 4 DRIVE ENABLE SYNCHLINK Frame Shown 3 DRIVE Power Structure Communications Control Assembly Control Table 4.A Drive Status Indicators # Name Color State Description Action ➊ PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive. No action - no faults present (Power) ➋ Green Flashing Drive ready, but not running & no faults are No action - no faults present STS (Status) present. Steady Drive running, no faults are present. No action - no faults present Yellow Flashing A type (non-configurable) alarm condition A run inhibit exists. Refer to Table 4.B exists, drive continues to run. Steady A type (user configurable) alarm condition exists, but drive continues to run. Red Flashing A fault has occurred. Refer to Table for faults. Steady A non-resettable fault has occurred. Red / Yellow Flashing Alternately The drive is in flash recovery mode. The only operation permitted is flash upgrade. ➌ PORT Status of DPI port internal communications (if Refer to the present). MOD Communication Status of communications module (when Adapter User installed). NET A Manual Status of network (if connected). NET B Status of secondary network (if connected). ➍ SYNCHLINK Green Steady The module is configured as the time keeper or The module is configured as a follower and synchronization is complete. Green Flashing The follower(s) are not configured with the time keeper. Red Flashing The module is configured as a time master on SynchLink and has received time information from another time master on SynchLink. ENABLE Green On The drive s enable input is high. Complete Flash Upgrade
Troubleshooting 4-3 Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 & 6 drives. The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure.. Name Color State Description Power Green Steady Indicates when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow Flashing [] [] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Number in [ ] indicates flashes and associated alarm () : Low line voltage (<9%). Very low line voltage (<5%). Low phase (one phase <8% of line voltage). Frequency out of range or asymmetry (line sync failed). Low DC bus voltage (triggers ride-through operation). Input frequency momentarily out of range (4-65 Hz). DC bus short circuit detection active. Fault Red Flashing [] [4] Number in [ ] indicates flashes and associated fault () : DC bus short (Udc <% after ms). Line sync failed or low line (Uac <5% Unom). () An alarm condition automatically resets when the condition no longer exists () A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power. Table 4.B Common Causes of a Pre-Start Alarm Examine Parameter 56 [Run Inhibit Status] Bit Description Action No power is present at the Enable Terminal TB- T7 Apply the enable, 3, 4 A stop command is being issued Close all stop inputs 5 Power loss event is in progress, indicating a loss of the AC Restore AC power input voltage 6 Data supplied by the power structure EEprom is invalid or Cycle the power. If problem persists, replace the power structure. corrupt 7 Flash Update in Progress Complete Flash Procedures 8 Drive is expecting a Start Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all start buttons and remove all start commands signal. 9 Drive is expecting a Jog Edge and is receiving a continuous Open all jog buttons and remove all jog commands signal. A conflict exists between the Encoder PPR programming Verify encoder data and reprogram (Parameter 3 or 4) and the encoder configuration for edge counts (Parameter 33 or 43, bits 4 & 5). The drive cannot precharge because a precharge input is Reprogram the input or close the precharge control contact. programmed and no signal is present. Start input configured but stop not configured Program Par 838-84 to include a stop button, rewire the drive Run input configured but control options do not match Program Par 53, Bit 8 to ( wire control) Start input configured but control options do not match Program Par 53, Bit 8 to (3 wire control) Multiple inputs configured as Start or Run Reprogram Par 838-84 so multiple starts, multiple runs or any combination do not exist Multiple inputs configured as Jog Reprogram Par 838-84 so only () is set to Jog Multiple inputs configured as Jog Reprogram Par 838-84 so only () is set to Jog Multiple inputs configured as Fwd/Rev Reprogram Par 838-84 so only () is set to Fwd/Rev 4 Invalid Feedback Device for Permanent Magnet Motor Control Set Par to Value 5 (FB Opt Port) Digital Configuration
4-4 Troubleshooting HIM Indication The HIM also provides visual notification of a fault. Condition Drive is indicating a fault. The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition by displaying the following: Faulted appears in the status line Fault number Fault name Time that has passed since the fault occurred Press Esc to regain control of the HIM Display F-> Faulted. Hz Auto Fault F4 Main DC Menu: Bus Overvolt Diagnostics Time since Fault Parameter :3:5 Manually Clearing Faults This section will contain a table that illustrates the HIM keystrokes necessary to clear faults. Step. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM.. Address the condition that caused the fault. The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. 3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods. Press Stop Cycle drive power Select Clear Faults from Diagnostic - Faults menu Key(s) Esc Fault Descriptions Fault Descriptions and Configuration Parameters No. Name Description Action Abs Ovespd Det Motor speed has exceeded the limits set by parameter 3 [Rev Speed Limit] minus parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] or parameter 3 [Fwd Speed Limit] plus parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim]. Verify the encoder feedback is correct polarity. Verify drive is not in torque mode, Par [Spd/Torq ModeSel], value, Torque Ref -If in torque mode, verify load is present. 3. Verify min/max settings Par 3 [Rev Speed Lim] and Par 3 [Fwd Speed Lim]. 4. Verify the load is not overhauling. -If the load is overhauling, turn bus regulator off, Par 44 [Brake/Bus Cnfg], bit [BusRef High]. Vref Decel Fail The value of parameter 3 [Motor Spd Ref] has failed to decrease during a ramp to zero speed stop. This could possibly be due to a speed trim from parameters [Speed Trim ], [Speed Trim ] or 3 [Speed Trim 3]. 3 Encoder Loss One of the following has occurred on encoder : missing encoder (broken wire) quadrature error phase loss 4 Encoder Loss One of the following has occurred on encoder: missing encoder (broken wire) quadrature error phase loss SynchLink report the event status to the VPL which acts according to the configuration of parameter 365 [Encdr Loss Cnfg]. Reconnect encoder or replace encoder. SynchLink report the event status to the VPL which acts according to the configuration of parameter 366 [Encdr Loss Cnfg].Reconnect encoder or replace encoder.
Troubleshooting 4-5 No. Name Description Action 5 Opt Port Loss A fault on port of the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card, MDI Option Card, or Resolver Feedback Option Card has occurred. Parameter 6 [Hi-Res Status] displays the fault status for port of the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Card. Parameter 67 [Resolver Status] displays the fault status for port of the Resolver Feedback Option Card. 6 Opt Port Loss The Linear sensor portion of the MDI feedback option card has detected a fault condition. Parameter 86 [Linear Status] displays the fault status for linear portion of the MDI feedback Option Card. 9 Slink Comm Fail A SynchLink communication fault has occurred. Parameter 9 [SL Error Status] displays SynchLink errors. Drive Power Loss DC Bus voltage has fallen below the minimum value Parameter 36 [DC Bus Voltage] displays bus voltage Parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] displays the minimum value when parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] is set to five The drive must first complete precharge before this check is made Motor Oload Trip A motor overload trip has occurred. Reduce mechanical load Parameter 38 [Output Current] is squared, scaled and integrated over time. When this integrated value exceeds., this Exception Event occurs. The integrator's output can be viewed in Parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] is set to 3 Mtr OL Outpt. The overload integration rate is affected by parameters 336 [Service Factor], 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min], 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] and 339 [Mtr IT Calibrat]. Motor Oload Pend A motor overload is pending. Parameter 38 [Output Current] is squared, scaled and integrated over time. When this integrated value exceeds.5, this Exception Event occurs. The integrator's output can be viewed in Parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] is set to 3 Mtr OL Outpt. The overload integration rate is affected by parameters 336 [Service Factor], 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min], 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] and 339 [Mtr IT Calibrat]. 3 Motor Stalled The motor has stalled. These three conditions have occurred at the same time for the amount of time specified in parameter 373 [Motor Stall Time]: Drive is not stopped (parameter 5 [Logic State Mach] not equal to zero) Drive is on limit (parameter 34 [Limit Status] not equal to zero) Drive is at zero speed (parameter 55 [Logic Status], bit 3 [At Zero Spd] is set). 4 Inv Otemp Pend Parameter 33 [Heatsink Temp] is within C of maximum. View the maximum heat sink temperature in parameter 348 [Drive OL TP Data] when parameter 347 [Drive OL TP Se] is set to 3 [fmaxhsdegc]. 5 Inv Otemp Trip Parameter 33 [Heatsink Temp] is above the maximum limit or temperature sensor has failed (shorted or open. See parameter 346 [Drive OL Status], bit [NTC Shorted] and bit [NTC Open]. Reduce mechanical load. Increase torque limit. Reduce mechanical load
4-6 Troubleshooting No. Name Description Action 6 Inv OLoad Pend The drive's operating point is approaching the intermittent current rating limitation. If output current remains at or above present levels, an Inverter Overload condition will occur. Reduce the load on the drive Operation of the Inverter Overload function is configured with the following parameters: 336 [Service Factor] 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min] 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] 339 [Mtr IT Calibrat] 7 Inv OLoad Trip The drive's operating point has exceeded the intermittent current rating and a foldback to the continuous rating in parameter 4 [Rated Amps] has occurred. Reduce mechanical load Operation of the Inverter Overload function is configured with the following parameters: 336 [Service Factor] 337 [Mtr IT Curr Min] 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] 339 [Mtr IT Calibrat] 8 Ext Fault Input A digital input has detected an external fault. Enter a value of Aux Fault or AuxFault Inv in one of the following parameters to configure an input to detect an external fault: 838 [Digin Sel] 839 [Digin Sel] 84 [Digin 3 Sel] 9 DSP Memory Error Flash memory does not match the SRAM memory DSP Device Error A DSP (VPL) interrupt task has not been completed in the allotted time. Err Inertia Test Not Used Over Frequency Fault Encoderless algorithm fails to converge on correct speed. Two possible causes: Velocity regulator is attempting to run below motor s slip speed Frequency regulator pulls out and commanded motor frequency slows to maximum frequency limit. 3 MC Commissn Fail The drive has failed to complete either the Motor Autotuning procedure or the Power Circuits Diagnostics test. Parameters 55 [MC Diag Error ], 553 [MC Diag Error ], and 554 [MC Diag Error 3] display Motor Autotuning and Power Circuit Diagnostic faults. 4 DC Bus Overvolt Bus voltage has exceeded 85V dc in 4volt class drives or 45V dc for volt class drives.. Verify the AC Line.. Verify that either Par 44 [Brake/Bus Cnfg], the brake or bus regulator is enabled. 3. Verify that Par 8 [Regen Power Lim] is set properly. 4. If Par 44, bit [Brake Enable] is set, verify braking resistor is properly sized. 6 Ground Fault A current to earth exceeds 35% of the peak drive rating Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition. 7 Inst Overcurrent Instantaneous motor current exceeds 4% of rating 8 VPL/MC Comm Fail A communication failure has occurred between the Velocity Position Loop (VLP processor and the Motor Control (MC) processor on the main control board. Possible causes are: MC has failed to complete or pass diagnostic tests This is Indicated when Fault Test Point 6 equals. This test point is viewed in parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] equals 6 VPL Handshak. VPL has not detected MC handshake activity for over 3 ms. This is Indicated when Fault Test Point 6 equals. This test point is viewed in parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] equals 5 MC Handshake. MC has not detected VPL handshake activity for over 3 ms.
Troubleshooting 4-7 No. Name Description Action 9 PWM Signal short This fault is detected when ever the actual IGBT gate are different than the commanded IGBT states. This fault is detected by the Motor Control processor. 3 MC Firmware One of the following Motor Control (MC) firmware errors has occurred: MC Task Over Run Illegal Interrupt Self Diagnostic Fault Data Error 3 Precharge Error The precharge function has failed to complete within 3 seconds of the precharge request. A precharge request is initiated when the DC Bus voltage is above the Undervoltage Trip level and the precharge input is high (the requirement for the precharge being high can be bypassed by setting parameter 838 [DigIn Sel] to a value other than 4 PreChrg/Disc ). 3 PWM Asynch The Motor Control Processor is not synchronized with SynchLink. 33 +/- volt Power TheV dc control voltage is outside the tolerance range. The positive voltage power must be within the band from +5.5 to Replace switch mode power supply. For smaller frames, replace drive. +.4V dc. The negative voltage power must be within the band from -6.6 to -V dc. 35 Ctrl EE Checksum The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated. Cycle power. Replace MCB 38 Brake OL Trip The calculated temperature of the dynamic braking resistor is too high. The temperature is calculated by a thermal model. If the resistor is internal, the model uses resistor characteristic stored in the power structure EEPROM memory. If the resistor is external, the model uses values of parameters 46 [Brake PulseWatts] and 47 [Brake Watts]. 39 PowerEE CRC fail The Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) of the data stored in the Power Board EEPROM does not match the stored CRC. 4 Slink Mult Oflow A SynchLink Multiplier Overflow has occurred. Parameter 34 [SL Mult State] displays SynchLink multiplier overflow errors. 4 Ridethru Timeout The drive has been in a bus loss ridethrough condition for more than two seconds. 4 DC Bus Undervolt Bus voltage has fallen below the level configured by parameter 49 [Line Undervolts]. 43 VoltageFdbk Loss Loss of Motor or DC Bus Voltage Feedback has occurred because of a communication failure between Motor Control and Voltage Feedback board. 44 Runtime Data Rst Runtime data (hours, energy) has been reset to zero due to a checksum error. 46 Interp Out Synch Interpolator is out of synch on motion control mode. 48 No Ctrl Device The controlling device (HIM or controller) has been disconnected while the drive was running. 49 DPI Loss Port DPI Port has stopped communicating.. Verify actual temperature of brake -If hot, wait for brake to cool -If cold, cycle power to the drive. If cold, verify Par 46 [Brake PulseWatts] and Par 47 [Brake Watts] are correct.. Verify the AC Line.. In frames -4, verify the precharge resistor is present. (With power off, there should be a resistance between DC+ and BR+). In frames 5 & 6, check the precharge board for errors. See the precharge board LED for fault sequence. Verify DPI device is present in port. A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud 5 DPI Loss Port DPI Port has stopped communicating. Verify DPI device is present in port. A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud
4-8 Troubleshooting No. Name Description Action 5 DPI Loss Port 3 DPI Port 3 has stopped communicating. Verify DPI device is present in port 3. A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud 5 DPI Loss Port 4 DPI Port 4 has stopped communicating. A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud 53 DPI Loss Port 5 DPI Port 5 has stopped communicating. Verify DPI device is present in port 4. Verify AC line power A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud 54 DPI Loss Port 6 DPI Port 6 has stopped communicating. A SCAN port device is connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 5k Baud 55 Net Loss DPI P A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port. 56 Net Loss DPI P A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port. 57 Net Loss DPI P3 A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port 3. 58 Net Loss DPI P4 A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port 4. 59 Net Loss DPI P5 A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port 5. 6 Net Loss DPI P6 A communications fault has occurred on the communication adapter at DPI port 6. 6 Logix Out of Run The DriveLogix controller is in a Non-Run mode. Non-Run modes include program, remote-program and faulted modes. 6 Logix Timeout The communication connection to the DriveLogix controller has timed out. 63 Logix Closed The DriveLogix controller has closed the Controller to Drive connection. 64 Logix Link Chng A required link in the Controller to Drive Communication Format has been modified. 65 HiHp In PhaseLs (High Horse Power Only) AC Input Phase Loss - AC voltage is not present on one or two input phases. 66 HiHp Bus Com Dly (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication Time Delay - the processor has not received proper periodic feedback information. 67 HiHp Bus Link Ls (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication Link Loss - bus communication between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board has halted. 68 HiHp Bus CRC Er (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication CRC Error - too many Cycling Ring Checksum (CRC) errors have occurred in the communication bus. Clear fault Verify drive is present in I/O Clear fault. Check for voltage on each input phase.. Check the status of each external input fuse. Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board. Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board. Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board. A fast power cycle may cause the 7S Main Control Board to Wait five minutes before re-energizing the attempt to communicate with the ASIC Board before the ASIC Board drive. is energized. 69 HiHp Bus WtchDog (High Horse Power Only) Bus Communication Watchdog Error - communication has halted in the communication bus, causing the watch dog timer to expire.. Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board.. Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board. 3. Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board. 4. Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board. 5. Replace the Main Control Board.
Troubleshooting 4-9 No. Name Description Action 7 HiHp Fan Fdbk Ls (High Horse Power Only) Fan Feedback Loss - a fan feedback signal. Check the main cooling fan. has been lost.. Check the Main Control Board cooling fan. 7 HiHp Drv OvrLoad (High Horse Power Only) Drive Overload - the circuit board on the Power Module has detected an overload. Measure output current of the drive. If the level is ever greater than the maximum drive rated output current level reduce the load. If the levels are always well below the drive rated levels, then replace the power module. 7 HiHp PwrBd PrcEr (High Horse Power Only) Power Board Processor Error - a microprocessor on the Power Board has detected a communication error.. Check fiber-optic connections between the Power Interface Circuit Board and Voltage Feedback Circuit Board.. Check connections between the Main Control Board and the Power Interface Circuit Board. 3. Replace the Voltage Feedback Circuit Board 4. Replace the Power Interface Circuit Board. 5. Replace the Main Control Board. 73 HiHp PrChrg Cntc (High Horse Power Only) Precharge Contactor Fault - proper contactor feedback has not occurred. The precharge contactor has probably failed to pick up or the feedback signal has failed. This fault only applies to DC input drives. Check precharge circuit wiring. Check for loose connections on X5 terminal block and/or the X9 and X5 connectors on the ASIC Board. 74 HiHp PwrEE Error (High Horse Power Only) Power EEPROM Error - the rating of the drive and data in the Power EEPROM on the Power Board do not match. 75 HiHP PwrBd Otemp (High Horse Power Only) Power Board Over-Temperature - temperature of the Power Board on has exceeded 85 C. 85 Position Error Position feedback exceeds the position error tolerance setting, Par 93 [Motn PositErrTol]. Replace output power module or program a new power board. Check the main cooling fan and fan power supply, replace if necessary.
4- Troubleshooting Notes:
Appendix A Supplemental Information Chapter Objectives For Information on See Page... Specifications A- DPI Communication Configurations A-4 Output Devices A-6 Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings A-6 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings A-7 Spare Connectors A-8 Dimensions A-9 Specifications Category Specification Frames -6 (69V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) Frames 9 & up Protection -8V 4V 38/4V 48V 6V 69V 38/4V 48V 6V 69V Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive 5V Drive Drive Drive AC Input Overvoltage Trip: 47VAC 85VAC 475VAC 57VAC 69VAC 863VAC 475VAC 57V AC 6V AC 69VAC 863VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip: 35VDC 45VDC 675VDC 8VDC 3VDC 64VDC 675VDC 8VDC 8VDC 3VDC 64VDC Bus Undervoltage Trip: Adjustable Adjustable Nominal Bus Voltage: 8VDC 34VDC 54VDC 648VDC 8VDC 93VDC 54VDC 648VDC 645VDC 8VDC 93VDC Heat Sink Thermistor: Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Current Limit: Hardware Current Limit: Instantaneous Current Limit: Calculated value, 5% of motor rated to % of drive rated 5% of 3 sec. rating (58%-%) 43% of 3 sec rating (5%-87%) Calculated value, 5% of motor rated to % of drive rated 36% of rated Heavy Duty current (typical) Line Transients: Up to 6 volts peak per IEEE C6.4-99 up to 6 volts peak per IEEE C6.4-99 Control Logic Noise Immunity: Showering arc transients up to 5V peak Showering arc transients up to 5V peak Power Ride-Thru: 5 milliseconds at full load 5 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride-Thru.5 sec., drive not running.5 seconds, drive not running Ground Fault Trip: Phase-to-ground on drive output Phase-to-ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip: Phase-to-phase on drive output Phase-to-phase on drive output
Production inspected Functional Safety A- Supplemental Information Category Agency Certification Specification Frames -6 (69V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) Frames 9 & up The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the The drive is designed to meet applicable requirements of the following codes/standards: following codes/standards: IEC 68- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - IEC 68- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - General requirements General requirements IEC 68-5- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems IEC 68-5- Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Safety requirements - Safety requirements NFPA 7 US National Electric Code NFPA 7 - US National Electrical Code NEMA 5 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment UL and cul Listed to UL58C and CAN/CSA -. No. 4-95 UL and cul Listed to UL58C and CAN/CSA -. No. 4-95 U L US C.. TUV Rheinland Product Safety E W C EN 578 Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Emissions EN 68-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Immunity EN 68-3 Second Environment, Restricted Distribution Low Voltage Directive (73/3/EEC) EN 578 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations TUV Rheinland (applies to frames - 6, /4V, and frames 5 & 6, 69V only) TUV Functional Safety Report only for frames - 4, 6V (no FS mark on the label) Marked for all applicable European Directives EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) Emissions EN 68-3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 Low Voltage Directive (73/3/EEC) EN 578 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations TUV functional safety report only (no FS mark on the label).. TUV Rheinland Bauart geprüft Type approved Environment Altitude: m (33 ft.) max. without derating m (33 ft) max. without derating Surrounding Air Temperature Based on drive rating, refer to Drive Frame chapters without Derating: Open Type: to 5 C (3 to F) IP: to 5 C (3 to F) NEMA Type : to 4 C (3 to 4 F) IP56, NEMA Type 4X: to 4 C (3 to 4 F) Note: Frames 9 & are rated to 4 C (3 to 4 F) surrounding air. Storage Temperature (all -4 to 7 C (-4 to 58 F) 4 to 7 degrees C ( 4 to 58 degrees F) const.): Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% non-condensing 5 to 95% non-condensing Shock: G peak for ms duration (+/-. ms) 5G peak for ms duration (±. ms) Vibration:.5 mm (.6 in.) displacement, G peak, 5.5 Hz mm (.787 in.) displacement, G peak EN578 / EN668--6 Atmosphere Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere. Electrical AC Input Voltage Tolerance: See Input Voltage Range/Tolerance on page C- for Full Power and Operating Range Frequency Tolerance: 47-63 Hz 47-63 Hz. Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. Single-phase Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives. operation provides 5% of rated current. Single-phase operation provides 5% of rated current. DC Input Voltage Tolerance +/- % of Nominal Bus Voltage (above) Displacement Power Factor:.98 across speed range.98 across speed range Efficiency: 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. 97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts. Max. Short Circuit Current Maximum short circuit current rating to match specified fuse/, Amps Rating: circuit breaker capability. Using Recommended Fuse, Amps or Circuit Breaker Type Maximum Drive to Motor Power The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a : ratio The drive to motor rating cannot exceed a : ratio Ratio
Supplemental Information A-3 Category Control Specification Method Induction Motor: Brushless Motor: Carrier Frequency Output Voltage Range: Output Frequency Range: Speed Control Torque Regulation Selectable Motor Control: Stop Modes: Accel/Decel S-Curve Time Intermittent Overload: Current Limit Capability: Electronic Motor Overload Protection Frames -6 (69V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated. Ratings apply to all drives. Refer to the PowerFlex 7S - Phase I Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM, for derating guidelines. The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or pulse in a configured package. Frames 9 & up Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency, Indirect Self-Organized, Field-Oriented Control, Current-regulated. Ratings apply to all drives. Refer to the PowerFlex 7S - Phase I Control Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM, for derating guidelines. The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or pulse in a configured package. Drive rating: 4 khz Settings:, 4, 8, khz to rated motor voltage Drive rating: khz Settings:, 4, 8, khz to rated motor voltage 3 Hz 3 Hz Speed regulation - without feedback Speed regulation - without feedback.% of base speed across : speed range.% of base speed across : speed range : operating range : operating range 5 rad/sec bandwidth 5 rad/sec bandwidth Speed regulation - with feedback Speed regulation - with feedback.% of base speed across : speed range.% of base speed across : speed range : operating range : operating range 3 rad/sec bandwidth 3 rad/sec bandwidth Torque Regulation - without feedback Torque Regulation - without feedback +/-%, 6 rad/sec bandwidth +/-%, 6 rad/sec bandwidth Torque Regulation - with feedback Torque Regulation - with feedback +/-%, 5 rad/sec bandwidth +/-5%, 5 rad/sec bandwidth Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and Field Oriented Control with and without a feedback device and permanent magnet motor control permanent magnet motor control Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp, Coast and Current Limit and Current Limit Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable Independently programmable accel and decel times adjustable from to 6553.5 in. second increments. from to 6553.5 in. second increments. Adjustable from.5 to 4. seconds Adjustable from.5 to 4. seconds % Overload capability for up to minute % Overload capability for up to minute 5% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds 5% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits Independent Motoring and Regenerative Power Limits programmable to 8% of rated output current programmable to 8% of rated output current Provides class motor overload protection according to NEC Provides class motor overload protection according to NEC article 43 and motor over-temperature protection according to article 43 and motor over-temperature protection according to NEC article 43.6 (A) (). UL 58C File E597. NEC article 43.6 (A) (). UL 58C File E597.
A-4 Supplemental Information Category Specification Frames -6 (69V Drive frames 5 & 6 only) Frames 9 & up Feedback Encoder Inputs (): Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type Dual Channel Plus Marker, Isolated with differential transmitter Output (Line Drive) Incremental, Dual Channel Quadrature type Encoder Voltage Supply: 5V DC or V DC 3 ma/channel 5V DC requires an external power supply. V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC, maximum low state voltage of.4v DC 5V DC or V DC 3 ma/channel 5V DC requires an external power supply. V DC minimum high state voltage of 7V DC, maximum low state voltage of.4v DC Maximum Input Frequency: 4 khz 5 khz Stegmann Option: Encoder Voltage Supply:.5V DC @ 3 ma.5v DC @ 3 ma Hi-Resolution Feedback: Sine/Cosine V P-P Offset.5 Sine/Cosine V P-P Offset.5 Maximum Cable Length: 8 m (6 ft.) 8 m (6 ft.) RS-485 Interface: Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of turns, power-up: Address, Command Number, Mode, Number of Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum turns, Number of Sine/Cos cycles, Checksum Customer-I/O Plug (P) - Hi Allen-Bradley PN: S9469 Allen-Bradley PN: S9469 Res: Weidmuller PN: BL3.5/9/BK Weidmuller PN: BL3.5/9/BK Resolver Option: Excitation Frequency: 4 Hz 4 Hz Excitation Voltage: 4.5-6 Vrms 4.5-6 Vrms Operating Frequency Range: - khz - khz Resolver Feedback Voltage: V ± 3 mv V ± 3 mv Maximum Cable Length: 34.8 meters ( ft.) 34.8 meters ( ft.) DriveLogix User Available MemoryBase: With Memory Expansion Board: 56 kbytes 768 kbytes 56 kbytes 768 kbytes Battery: 756-BA (Allen-Bradley PN 94948).59g lithium 756-BA (Allen-Bradley PN 94948).59g lithium Serial Cable: 76-CBLPM to 76-NET-AIC 76-CBLPM to 76-NET-AIC 76-CBLPA to 76-NET-AIC 76-CBLPA to 76-NET-AIC 756-CP3 directly to controller 756-CP3 directly to controller 747-CP3 directly to controller 747-CP3 directly to controller category 3 () category 3 () Flex I/O Connection: Up to (8) modules Up to (8) modules FLEXBUS Current Output: 64 ma maximum @ 5.V dc 64 ma maximum @ 5.V dc Cable: 4-CCF3 4-CCF3 DPI Communication Configurations Typical Programmable Controller Configurations Important: If programs are written that continuously write information to the drive, care must be taken to properly format the block transfer. If attribute is selected for the block transfer, values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive. This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers. If attribute 9 is selected, each program scan will complete a write to the drives non-volatile memory (EEprom). Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes, continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom. Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers. Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details.
Supplemental Information A-5 Logic Command Word Logic Bits 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Command Description x Normal Stop = Not Normal Stop = Normal Stop x Start () = Not Start = Start x Jog = Not Jog using [Jog Speed ] = Jog using [Jog Speed ] x Clear = Not Clear Fault Fault () = Clear Fault x x Unipolar = No Command Direction = Forward Command = Reverse Command = Hold Direction Control x x Jog = Not Jog using [Jog Speed ] = Jog using [Jog Speed ] x Current = Not Current Limit Stop Limit Stop = Current Limit Stop x Coast Stop = Not Coast to Stop = Coast to Stop x x x x x x () A Not Stop condition (logic bit =, logic bit 8 =, and logic bit 9 = ) must first be present before a = Start condition will start the drive. () To perform this command, the value must switch from to.
A-6 Supplemental Information Logic Status Word Logic Bits 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Status Description x Enabled = Not Enabled = Enabled x Running = Not Running = Running x Command Direction = Reverse = Forward x Actual Direction = Reverse = Forward x Accel = Not Accelerating = Accelerating x Decel = Not Decelerating = Decelerating x Jogging = Not Jogging = Jogging x Fault = No Fault = Fault x Alarm = No Alarm = Alarm x Flash Mode = Not in Flash Mode = In Flash Mode x Run Ready = Not Ready to Run x x x x x At Limit() = Ready to Run = Not At Limit = At Limit Tach Loss = Not Tach Loss Sw Sw = Tach Loss Sw At Zero Spd = Not At Zero Speed = At Zero Speed At Setpt = Not At Setpoint Speed Spd = At Setpoint Speed () See Parameter 34 - [Limit Status] in the PowerFlex 7S drive for a description of the limit status conditions. Output Devices Common mode cores are internal to the drive. For information on output devices such as output contactors, cable terminators and output reactors refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual, Vol..
Supplemental Information A-7 Fusing and Circuit Breakers The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. See Fusing and Circuit Breakers below for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 4 C (4 F) and the U.S. NEC. Other country, state, or local codes can require different ratings. Tables with DC link fuse recommendations for DC input drives are also provided. Fusing The recommend fuse types are listed below. If available current ratings do not match those listed in the tables provided, choose the next higher fuse rating. IEC - BS88 (British Standard) Parts &, EN669-, Parts &, type gg or equivalent should be used. UL - UL requirements specify that UL Class CC, T, RK, or J fuses must be used for all drives in this section. Circuit Breakers The non-fuse listings in the following tables include inverse time circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit protectors) and 4M self-protected combination motor controllers. If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method, the following requirements apply: IEC - Both types of circuit breakers and 4M self-protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for IEC installations. UL - Only inverse time circuit breakers and the specified 4M self-protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for UL installations. () Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Parts & : AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH.
A-8 Supplemental Information AC Input Protection Devices The following tables provide informaiton on the recommended fuses and circuit breakers for PowerFlex 7S Phase I AC drives. Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse 8 Volt AC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7) ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. () Max. (4) Max. (5) Available Catalog Numbers (8) Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) (9) DB4P.75.55 3.7.3 6 6 7.5 5 7 M-CE-B63 M-D8E-B63 769 DB6P8.5. 6.8.4 5 3 3 5 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DB9P6..5 9.5 3.4 4 4 5 M-CE-C6 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DB5 4. 3. 5.7 5.7 35 7 7 3 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DB 5.5 4. 3. 8.3 3 5 3 3 M-D8E-C5 M-F8E-C5 769 DB8 7.5 5.5 9.6.7 4 7 4 5 5 5 M-F8E-C3 769 DB4 3 7.5 44.5 6. 6 6 75 75 7 M-F8E-C45 363 DB5 3 5 5.5 8.6 8 5 8 DB7 4 8.5 5 7 5.9 9 75 9 3 3 DB8 4 8.5 84.7 3.5 35 35 5 DB4 5 3 3 4.7 5 5 5 475 35 5 84.7 3.5 5 5 35 3 5 DB3 5 37 4 44. 75 75 75 5 375 5 3 3 35.3 5 5 5 4 3 5 DB54 6 45 67 6. 5 35 5 5 5 5 37 4 5.9 3 5 45 5 DB9 6 55 8 75. 3 45 3 6 6 4 45 67 6. 5 35 5 5 5 5 DB6 6 66 55 96.7 3 575 3 75 75 4 55 99 7.7 5 45 5 6 6 4 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. (6) Bulletin 4M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (7) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 8 Wye or Delta, 4 Wye or Delta, 48Y/77 or 6Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 48V or 6V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (8) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 4M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 4M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. (9) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure.
Supplemental Information A-9 Drive Catalog Number Frame HP Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse 4 Volt AC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7) ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. (3) Max. (4) Max. (5) Available Catalog Numbers (8) Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) (9) DB4P.75 3.3.4 5 8 5 5 5 7 M-CE-B63 M-D8E-B63 769 DB6P8.5 5.9.4 5 5 5 5 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DB9P6 3 8.3 3.4 35 35 5 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DB5 5 3 3.7 5.7 3 6 6 3 M-CE-C6 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DB 7.5 5 9.9 8.3 5 5 5 8 8 3 M-D8E-C5 M-F8E-C5 769 DB8 7.5 5.7.7 35 6 35 5 M-F8E-C3 769 DB4 3 5 38.5 6. 5 9 5 5 5 5 M-F8E-C45 363 DB5 3 5 47.7 9.8 6 6 DB7 4 5 64. 6.7 9 5 9 75 75 DB8 4 3 5 73. 3.5 8 3 3 DB4 5 4 98 4.6 5 5 5 4 3 5 3 73 3.5 75 3 3 DB3 5 5 5.7 75 75 75 5 375 5 4 98 4.6 5 5 5 4 3 5 DB54 6 6 45 6. 3 6 45 5 5 5.7 75 75 75 5 375 5 DB9 6 75 8 74.9 5 4 5 6 575 5 6 45 6. 3 6 45 5 DB6 6 33 96.8 3 575 3 75 75 4 75 69 74.9 5 45 5 6 6 4 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. (6) Bulletin 4M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (7) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 8 Wye or Delta, 4 Wye or Delta, 48Y/77 or 6Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 48V or 6V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (8) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 4M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 4M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. (9) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure. Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse ND HD Amps kva Min. (3) Max. (4) Min. (5 ) 4 Volt AC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (5) Motor Circuit Protector (7) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (8)(9) Max. (6) Max. (6) Max. (8) Available Catalog Numbers () Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) () DCP.75.55.8.3 3 6 3 8 5 3 M-CE-B5 M-D8E-B5 769 DC3P5.5. 3.. 6 7 6 5 7 M-CE-B4 M-D8E-B4 769 DC5P..5 4.6 3. 6 6 7 M-CE-B63 M-D8E-B63 769 DC8P7 4 3. 7.9 5.5 5 7.5 5 3 3 5 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DC 5.5 4.8 7.5 5 5 5 45 45 5 M-CE-C6 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DC5 7.5 5.5 4.4. 3 6 6 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DC 7.5.6 4.3 3 45 3 8 8 3 M-D8E-C5 M-F8E-C5 769 DC3 5 8.4 9.7 35 6 35 5 M-F8E-C3 769 DC37 8.5 5 35. 4.3 45 8 45 5 5 5 M-F8E-C45 769 DC43 3 8.5 4.7 8. 6 9 6 5 5 6 DC56 3 3 53 36.7 7 5 7 DC7 3 37 3 68.9 47.8 9 5 9 5 5
A- Supplemental Information Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse ND HD Amps kva Min. (3) Max. (4) Min. (5 ) Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (5) Motor Circuit Protector (7) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (8)(9) Max. (6) Max. (6) Max. (8) Available Catalog Numbers () Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) () DC85 () 4 45 8.4 56.4 3 3 5 37 68.9 47.8 9 75 9 75 3 DC5 5 55.5 69.6 5 5 5 4 3 5 45 8.4 56.4 75 3 3 5 DC5 5 55. 83.9 5 75 5 5 375 5 45 63.7 5 5 375 375 5 DC4 5 75 35.6 94 3 4 4 5 55 69.6 5 5 5 3 3 5 DC7 6 9 64.6 4 5 375 5 6 5 5 75 36 94 3 55 4 5 DC5 () 6 98.5 38 5 45 5 6 6 4 9 64 4 5 375 5 6 5 5 DC6 6 3 54.7 66 35 55 35 75 75 4 99 38 5 45 5 6 6 4 () DC85 current rating is limited to 45 degrees C ambient. () DC5 current rating is limited to 4 degrees C ambient. (3) Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. (4) Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (5) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (6) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (7) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. (8) Bulletin 4M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (9) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 8 Wye or Delta, 4 Wye or Delta, 48Y/77 or 6Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 48V or 6V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. () The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 4M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 4M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. () When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure. Frame 4 Volt AC Input Frames 9 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Semi- Conductor Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) ND HD Amps Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. (3) Max. (4) Max. (5) DC6 9 3-63 35 55 35 7 7M583 7 4-7 75 45 75 6 7M583 6 3 DC3 9 6-3 4 65 4 9 7M583 9 4-3 47 35 5 35 7 7M583 7 4 DC385-388 5 85 5 7M583 6-6 3 4 65 4 9 7M583 9 4 DC46 5-463 6 6 3 7M8547 3 6-388 5 85 5 7M8547 6 DC5 5-54 65 65 5 7M8547 5 7-5 43 55 9 55 7M8547 6 DC59 35-594 75 ( per phs) 3 75 ( per phs) 7 7M583 7 8 375 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) - 5 54 7 ( per phs) 35 ( per phs) 7 ( per phs) 35 ( per phs) 5 7M583 5 7
Supplemental Information A- Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Semi- Conductor Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) ND HD Amps Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. (3) Max. (4) Max. (5) DC65 355-655 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) - 35 594 75 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) DC73 4-735 ( per phs) 5 ( per phs) - 355 655 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 4 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 3 75 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) 6 ( per phs) 5 ( per phs) 4 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 9 7M583 9 7 7M583 7 8 7M583 9 7M583 9 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. 48 Volt AC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number HP Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7) Frame ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. (3) Max. (4 ) Max. (4) Max. (6) Available Catalog Numbers (8) Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) (9) DDP.7 5.6.4 3 6 3 8 5 3 M-CE-B5 769 DD3P4.5.6. 4 8 4 5 7 M-CE-B4 M-D8E-B4 769 DD5P 3 3.9 3. 6 6 7 M-CE-B63 M-D8E-B63 769 DD8P 5 3 6.9 5.7 5 3 3 5 M-CE-C M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DD 7.5 5 9.5 7.9 5 5 4 4 5 M-CE-C6 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DD4 7.5.5.4 7.5 3 7.5 5 5 M-CE-C6 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DD 5 9.9 6.6 5 5 5 8 8 3 M-D8E-C5 M-F8E-C5 769 DD7 5 4.8.6 35 6 35 5 M-F8E-C3 769 DD34 5 3. 5.9 4 7 4 5 5 5 M-F8E-C45 769 DD4 3 3 5 36.7 3.5 5 9 5 5 5 5 M-F8E-C45 363 DD5 3 4 3 47.7 39.7 6 6 7 DD65 3 5 4 59.6 49.6 8 5 8 5 5 DD77 4 6 7.3 6. 7 3 3 5 59.6 49.6 8 5 8 5 5 DD96 5 75 9. 74.9 5 5 35 35 5 6 7.3 6. 7 3 3 DD5 5 7 97.6 5 5 5 5 375 5 75 9. 74.9 5 5 35 35 5 DD56 6 5 46.5.7 35 6 45 5 3 97.6 75 5 75 5 375 5 DD8 6 5 69 4.5 5 4 5 6 5 5 5 47.7 35 6 45 5 DD48 6 3.8 88 3 55 3 7 7 4 5 69 4.5 5 4 5 6 5 5 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. (6) Bulletin 4M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (7) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 8 Wye or Delta, 4 Wye or Delta, 48Y/77 or 6Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 48V or 6V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (8) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 4M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 4M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. (9) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure.
A- Supplemental Information Frame 48 Volt AC Input Frames 9 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number HP Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Bussmann Style Semi- Conductor Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) ND HD Amps Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. (3) Max. (4) Max. (5) DD6 9-5 35 55 35 7 7M583 7 4-5 7 75 45 75 6 7M583 6 3 DD3 9 5-9 4 65 4 9 7M583 9 4-47 35 55 35 7 7M583 7 4 DD385 3-37 5 85 5 7M583 6-5 3 4 65 4 9 7M583 9 4 DD46 35-444 6 6 3 7M8547 3 6-3 388 5 85 5 7M8547 6 DD5 45-483 65 65 5 7M8547 5 7-35 43 55 9 55 7M8547 6 DD59 5-57 75 ( per phs) 3 75 ( per phs) 7 7M583 7 8 375 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) - 45 54 7 ( per phs) 35 ( per phs) DD65 5-68 8 ( per phs) 4 ( per phs) - 5 594 75 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) DD73 6-75 9 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) - 5 655 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 7 ( per phs) 35 ( per phs) 4 8 ( per phs) 4 ( per phs) 3 75 ( per phs) 375 ( per phs) 6 9 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 4 85 ( per phs) 45 ( per phs) 5 7M583 5 7 9 7M583 9 8 7 7M583 7 8 7M583 9 9 7M583 9 9 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. 6 Volt AC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number HP Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7) Frame ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. (3) Max. (4) Max. (4) Max. (6) Available Catalog Numbers (8) Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) (9) DEP7.75.3.4 4 6 5 3 M-CE-B6 769 DEP7.5.. 3 6 3 5 3 M-CE-B5 769 DE3P9 3 3. 3. 6 9 6 5 5 7 M-CE-B4 M-D8E-B4 769 DE6P 5 3 5.3 5.5 9 9 5 M-D8E-B63 769 DE9P 7.5 5 7.8 8. 35 3 5 M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DE 7.5 9.9. 5 5 5 4 4 5 M-D8E-C M-F8E-C 769 DE7 5 5.4 6. 4 6 5 M-D8E-C6 M-F8E-C6 769 DE 5.. 3 5 3 8 8 3 M-F8E-C5 769 DE7 5 4.8 5.7 35 6 35 5 M-F8E-C5 769 DE3 3 3 5 9.4 3.5 4 7 4 5 5 5 M-F8E-C3 363 DE4 3 4 3 37.6 39. 5 9 5 5 5 DE5 3 5 4 47.7 49.6 6 6 DE6 4 6 5 58. 6.5 8 5 8 5 5 DE77 5 75 7.3 75. 9 5 9 3 3 6 58. 6.5 9 5 9 5 5
Supplemental Information A-3 Drive Catalog Number Frame HP Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) 4M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Range (6)(7) ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. (3) Max. (4) Max. (4) Max. (6) Available Catalog Numbers (8) Minimum Enclosure Volume (in. 3 ) (9) DE99 5 9.9 96.6 5 5 375 375 5 75 7.3 75. 75 3 3 DE5 6 5 7.6 5 5 5 375 375 5 93 96.6 5 5 375 375 5 DE44 6 5 35 4.5 75 3 75 4 4 5 5 7.6 5 75 5 375 375 5 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. (6) Bulletin 4M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip. (7) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 8 Wye or Delta, 4 Wye or Delta, 48Y/77 or 6Y/ 347. Not UL listed for use on 48V or 6V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (8) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 4M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 4M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. (9) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure.
A-4 Supplemental Information Frame 69 Volt AC Input Frames 5 and 6 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog kw Rating Input Ratings Dual Element Time Delay Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse Circuit Breaker (3) Motor Circuit Protector (5) Number ND HD Amps kva Min. () Max. () Min. () Max. (3) Max. (4) Max. (5) DF5 5 45 46.9 59.5 6 6 75 75 37.5 4. 48. 5 9 5 5 5 DF6 5 55 57.7 68.9 8 5 8 5 5 45 46.9 59.5 6 6 75 75 DF8 5 75 79. 94.4 375 375 55 57.7 68.9 8 5 8 5 5 DF98 5 9 94.7 3 5 5 375 375 75 79. 94.4 375 375 DF9 6 5 38 5 5 5 4 9 9.9 3 5 5 375 DF4 6 3 39 65.9 75 3 75 45 5 37 5 5 5 4 () Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping. () Maximum protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (3) Circuit Breaker - inverse time breaker. For US NEC, minimum size is 5% of motor FLA. Ratings shown are maximum. (4) Maximum allowable rating by US NEC. Exact size must be chosen for each installation. (5) Motor Circuit Protector - instantaneous trip circuit breaker. For US NEC minimum size is 5% of motor/drive FLA. Ratings shown are suggested. Instantaneous trip settings must be set to US NEC code. Not to exceed 3% FLA. 54 Volt DC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating DC Input Ratings Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse () ND HD Amps DC3P5.5. 3.7 8 JKS-8 DC5P..5 5.3 JKS- DC8P7 4 3. 9.3 5 HSJ5 DC 5.5 4.6 HSJ DC5 7.5 5.5 6.8 5 HSJ5 DC 7.5 4 4 HSJ4 DC3 5 33. 5 HSJ5 DC37 8.5 5 4.9 7 HSJ7 DC43 3 8.5 47.5 9 HSJ9 DC56 3 3 6.9 HSJ DC7 3 37 3 8.5 5 HSJ5 DC85 4 45 37 95. 5 HSJ5 DH5 () 5 55. 75 HSJ75 45 95. 75 HSJ75 DH5 () 5 55. HSJ 45 95. HSJ DH4 5 75 59 5 HSJ5 55. 5 HSJ5 DH7 () 6 9 9 35 HSJ35 75 59 35 HSJ35 DH5 () 6 6 35 HSJ35 9 9 35 HSJ35 DH6 () 6 3 98 4 HSJ4 6 4 HSJ4 () Also applies to P voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus. () The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC voltages 6V or less, as defined in NFPA7; Art 43-8 (NEC). Battery supplies or MG sets are not included. The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus: Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 494, 3 to 4 A; Bulletin No. 94, 3 to 4 A, or ABB: OESA, 6 & 8 A; OESL, all sizes. Fuses: Bussmann Type JKS, all sizes;type 7M, Case Sizes, and 3, or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes. For any other devices, please contact the factory.
Supplemental Information A-5 54 Volt DC Input Frames 9 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number Frame kw Rating DC Input Ratings Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse ND HD Amps DH6 9 3-37 5 7M668-4 5 7M668 DH3 9 6-353 63 7M66-3 88 63 7M66 DH385-453 7 7M66-6 353 7 7M66 DH46 5-54 9 7M663-453 9 7M663 DH5 5-589 5 ( per phs) 7M668-5 494 5 ( per phs) 7M668 DH59 35-695 55 ( per phs) 7M669-5 6 55 ( per phs) 7M669 DH65 355-765 63 ( per phs) 7M66-35 695 63 ( per phs) 7M66 DH73 4-859 7 ( per phs) 7M66-355 765 7 ( per phs) 7M66 65 Volt DC Input Frames 6 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number Frame HP Rating DC Input Ratings Fuse Non-Time Delay Fuse () ND HD Amps DDP.75.9 6 JKS-6 DD3P4.5 3. 6 JKS-6 DD5P 3 4.5 JKS- DD8P 5 3 8. 5 HSJ5 DD 7.5 5. HSJ DD4 7.5 4.6 3 HSJ3 DD 5 3.3 4 HSJ4 DD7 5 8.9 5 HSJ5 DD34 5 36.4 6 HSJ6 DD4 3 3 5 4.9 8 HSJ8 DD5 3 4 3 55.7 9 HSJ9 DD65 3 5 4 69.6 HSJ DD77 4 6 5 84.5 5 HSJ5 DJ96 () 5 75 5.3 75 HSJ75 6 84.5 75 HSJ75 DJ5 () 5 37. HSJ 75 5.3 HSJ DJ56 () 6 5 7 3 HSJ3 37. 3 HSJ3 DJ8 () 6 5 98 4 HSJ4 5 7. 4 HSJ4 DJ48 () 6 7 4 HSJ4 5 98 4 HSJ4 () Also applies to R voltage class. Fuses must be applied in the (+) leg and (-) leg of the DC Common Bus. () The power source to Common Bus inverters must be derived from AC Voltages 6V or less, as defined in NFPA7; Art 43-8 (NEC). Battery supplies or MG sets are not included. The following devices were validated to break current of the derived power DC Bus: Disconnects: Allen-Bradley Bulletin No. 494, 3 to 4 A; Bulletin No. 94, 3 to 4 A, or ABB: OESA, 6 & 8 A; OESL, all sizes. Fuses: Bussmann Type JKS, all sizes;type 7M, Case Sizes, and 3, or Ferraz Shawmut Type HSJ, all sizes. For any other devices, please contact the factory.
A-6 Supplemental Information 65 Volt DC Input Frames 9 Drive Protection Devices Drive Catalog Number Frame HP Rating DC Input Ratings Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse ND HD Amps DJ6 9-94 5 7M668-5 3 5 7M668 DJ3 9 5-338 63 7M66-94 63 7M66 DJ385 3-434 7 7M66-5 338 7 7M66 DJ46 35-59 9 7M663-3 434 9 7M663 DJ5 45-564 5 ( per phs) 7M668-35 474 5 ( per phs) 7M668 DJ59 5-666 55 ( per phs) 7M669-45 587 55 ( per phs) 7M669 DJ65 5-733 63 ( per phs) 7M66-5 666 63 ( per phs) 7M66 DJ73 6-84 7 ( per phs) 7M66-5 733 7 ( per phs) 7M66
Supplemental Information A-7 List of Motors with Compatible Thermistor Ratings Motor Type STD Motor SVO Motor 4 STD Motor Motor Type Base Speed Voltage Rate Current Ex. Current (kw) (Catalog No.) () Poles (RPM) (Vrms) (Arms) (Arms) GD (Kg/m ).5 M-57 4 5 8 7.5 -.4. M-58 4 5 8 -.45 3.7 M-5 4 5 8 8 -.66 3.7 M-57-4 5 8 8 -.66 5.5 M-5 4 5 8 5 -. 5.5 M-58-4 5 8 5 -. 7.5 M-53 4 5 8 33 -.5 7.5 M-59-4 5 8 33 -.5 M-54 4 5 8 47 -.3 M-5-4 5 8 47 -.3 5 M-55 4 5 8 63 -.43 5 M-5-4 5 8 63 -.43 8.5 M-5 4 5 8 8 -.7 8.5 M-5-4 5 8 8 -.7 M-53 4 5 8 95 -.8 M-53-4 5 8 95 -.8 3 M-55 4 5 55 45 -.83 37 M-55 4 5 55 83 -. 45 M-55 4 5 55 -.4 55 M-553 4 5 55 65-75 M-554 4 5 55 346 -.7.75 M-543 4 5 4 5.3 -.75.5 M-55 4 5 4.4 -.. M-56 4 5 4 5 -. 3.7 M-57 4 5 4 4.5 -.8 5.5 M-58 4 5 4 34.8 -.39 7.5 M-59 4 5 4 44 -.47 M-5 4 5 4 67. -.8 5 M-5 4 5 4 8.7 -.37 M-5 4 5 4 -. 3 M-53 6 55 76 -.58 37 M-54 6 55 -.7 55 M-56 6 35 334 -. 55 M-57 6 5 55 35-4..5 MC-M5 4 5 3 4.7.45 -. MC-M5 4 5 3 6.3 3.4-3.7 MC-M53 4 5 3 5.5-5.5 MC-M54 4 5 3 5.5 8.8-7.5 MC-M55 4 5 3.5.5 - MC-M56 4 5 3 9 4.3-5 MC-M57 4 5 3 37 6.4-8.5 MC-M58 4 5 3 45 9.65 - MC-M59 4 5 3 53 3-3 MC-M6 4 5 3 7 8.5-37 MC-M6 4 5 3 85 9.7-45 MC-M6 4 5 3 97 3.55-55 MC-M63 4 5 3 - - 75 MC-M64 4 5 3 63 - - 9 MC-M65 4 5 3 88 - - MC-M66 4 5 3 7 - - 3 MC-M67 4 5 3 8 - - 6 MC-M68 4 5 3 335 - - MC-M69 4 5 3 375 - -
A-8 Supplemental Information Motor Type Base Speed Voltage Rate Current Ex. Current Motor Type (kw) (Catalog No.) () Poles (RPM) (Vrms) (Arms) (Arms) GD (Kg/m ).5 MC-M 4 5 8 5.4 - -. MC-M 4 5 8 7.3 - - 3.7 MC-M 4 5 8.3 - - 5.5 MC-M 4 5 8 7.3 - - 7.5 MC-M 4 5 8 - - 4 SVO Motor MC-M 4 5 8 34 - - 5 MC-M 4 5 8 4 - - MC-M 4 5 8 58.5 - - MC-M 4 5 8 58.5 - - 3 MC-M 6 8 88 - - 37 MC-M 6 8 5 - - () Manufacturer, Reliance Electric-Japan, catalog number for ordering. Spare Connectors This section provides part numbers for Customer-I/O plugs (both Allen-Bradley numbers and connector manufacture numbers). This allows users to procure spare or replacement parts from Allen-Bradley or directly from the connector manufacturer. Main Control Board Phoenix Contact manufactures all four Customer-I/O connectors for the Main Control Board, according to Allen-Bradley specifications. Allen-Bradley specifies custom markings on standard Phoenix Contact plugs. Connector Allen-Bradley Number Phoenix Contact Standard Number TB - Row T 35334-Q MCV,5/3-ST3, 8 7 TB - Row B 35334-Q MCV,5/3-ST3, 8 7 TB - Row T 35335-Q MCV,5/3-ST3, 8 8 3 68 8 TB - Row B 35335-Q MCV,5/3-ST3, 8 8 3 68 8 High Resolution Encoder Interface Board Weidmuller manufactures the Customer-I/O plug on the High Resolution Encoder Interface Board. Connector Allen-Bradley Number Weidmuller Number P S9469 BL3.5/9/BK Resolver Interface Board Weidmuller manufactures the Customer-I/O plug on the Resolver Interface Board. Connector Allen-Bradley Number Weidmuller Number P S94698 BL3.5/9/8BK
Supplemental Information A-9 Dimensions Frame Table A.A PowerFlex 7S Frames AC Input DC Input 8 4 38... 4V 48V 6V 69V 54V 65V ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND kw HD kw ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP ND HP HD HP.75.37..75.75.55.75.5.5.75..5.5.75.5..5 3....5 3 3 4.. 5. 3. 4.. 5 3 5 3 5.5 4. 7.5 5. 5.5 4. 7.5 5 7.5 5 7.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 5 5 7.5 5.5 7.5 5 5 5 8.5 5 5 5 3 7.5 5 8.5 3 5 3 5 5 5 3 4 3 4 3 37 3 5 4 5 4 4 8.5 5 5 45 37 6 5 6 5 8.5 3 5 5 3 4 3 55 45 75 6 75 6 75 55 55 45 75 6 3 3 5 4 55 45 75 75 9 75 55 45 75 6 55 45 75 55 45 75 6 45 37 6 5 9 75 5 5 9 9 75 5 55 45 75 6 9 5 5 5 5 3 9 75 5 66 55 75 3 5 9 5 5 9 5 5 3 5 3 5 9 3 5 5 5 6 3 6 3 5 5 6 6 3 5 5 5 5 35 3 35 5 35 5 5 5 45 35 4 35 355 35 45 35 4 35 35 5 5 45 45 4 45 355 355 35 5 5 5 45 5 45 4 355 6 5 6 5 56 5
A- Supplemental Information Figure A. PowerFlex 7S Frame -3 (Frame Shown).5 (.49) A D 7. (.8) typ C B E 7. (.8) D 7. (.8) typ Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Frame A B C D E Weight () kg (lbs.) Drive. (7.87) 389. (5.3).8 (7.98) 75. (6.89) 375. (4.76).3 (4.9) 85. (.) 389. (5.3).7 (7.98) 5. (9.84) 375. (4.76) 8.4 (4.57) 3 85. (.) 564. (.).7 (7.98) 5. (9.84) 55. (.65) 6.6 (58.65) () Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and -COMM-C ControlNet adapter
Supplemental Information A- 7.5 (.3) Figure A. PowerFlex 7S Frame 4 A D 3. (.55) 7. (.7) Places 5. (.59) C 369.5 (4.53) 348.9 (3.76) S B E Lifting Holes 4 Places 8. (.3) 3 Places 8. (.3) Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Approx. Weight () kg (lbs.) Frame A (Max.) B C (Max.) D E Drive Drive & Packaging 4.8 (8.69) 758.8 (9.9).8 (7.94) 9. (7.56) 74.7 (9.) 8.4 (6.5) 9.3 (63.9) () Weights include HIM and Standard I/O.
A- Supplemental Information Figure A.3 PowerFlex 7S Frame 5 369.4 (4.54) 7. (.76) D 4.9 (.65) 6.5 (.6) 7.5 (.3) 6.5 (.6) 7.5 (.3) C 369. (4.53) 349.5 (3.76) B Overall Height 75 HP Frame 5 E 689.6 (7.5) Overall Height HP Frame 5 6.5 (.6) A Conduit Box NOT Present On 75 HP Frame 5 Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Weight () kg (lbs.) Drive 4.6 (93.93) () Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and -COMM-C ControlNet adapter
Supplemental Information A-3 Figure A.4 PowerFlex 7S Frame 6 466.7 (8.38) 8.5 (.33) 6.5 (.6) 5.5 (.6) Places 8. (.3) A 8. (.7) 36.6 (4.) Detail D.5 (.45) C 369. (4.53) 349.5 (3.76) S E B 8.5 (.33) 6.3 (4.97) Lifting Holes - 4 Places.7 (.5) Dia. Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Weight () kg (lbs.) Frame A (Max.) B C (Max.) D E Drive Drive and Packaging 6 43.8 (5.9) 85. (33.46) 75.5 (.85) 3. (.8) 85. (57.5) 7.3 (54.7) 89.9 (96.) () Weights include HIM, DriveLogix controller with ControlNet daughtercard, Hi-Resolution Encoder Option, and -COMM-C ControlNet adapter
A-4 Supplemental Information Figure A.5 PowerFlex 7S Frame 9 5. (.) 4. (.55) 48. (8.9) 4. (5.75) 4. (9.45) 9. (.35) 363.3 (4.3) 339.5 (3.37) 45. (.77) Nameplate Wire Way 5. (45.8). (44.9) Nameplate S 9. (.35) Lifting Hole. (.83) 6.5 (.46) 37.5 (4.67) 9.5 (.5) 4.5 (5.6) 59. (.3) 9.64 (7.54). (3.94) 45.53 (9.67) 85. (.) Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Detail A Brake Option Top Hat Weight kg (lbs.) Frame A B C D E Drive Drive & Packaging 9 48 (8.9) 5 (45.8) 339 (3.37) 4 (5.75) (44.9) 4.9 (35) 76.9 (39)
Supplemental Information A-5 Figure A.6 PowerFlex 7S Frame 597. (3.5) 534.7 (.5) 3.3 (.7) 63.5* (4.9) 65.5 (3.84) 498. (9.6) 4. (.65) 75. (89.57) 34. (87.95).8 (86.68) * This dimension is the depth for drives with the optional door-mounted HIM installed Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Weight kg (lbs.) Frame A B C D E Drive Drive & Packaging 597 (3.5) 75 (89.57) 63.45 (4.9) 534 (.5).75 (86.68) 43 (95) 447 (985)
! DANGER A-6 Supplemental Information Figure A.7 PowerFlex 7S Frame 797. (3.38) 736. (8.98) 3.5 (.7) 6.74* (4.48) 65.5 (3.84) 498. (9.6) 4. (.65) 75. (89.57) 34. (87.95) 5. (86.8) Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Supplemental Information A-7 Figure A.8 PowerFlex 7S Bottom View Dimensions Frame Frame 5.5 (.) 73.5 (6.83) 5.5 (6.) 3.5 (5.) 7.5 (.85).4 (.88) Dia. Places 8.7 (.3) Dia. 3 Places 9.4 (7.5) 36. (5.36) 87.9 (7.4) 87.6 (7.39) 6.3 (6.3) 53.7 (6.5) 4.9 (4.5) 8. (4.5) 35. (5.3) 4.9 (5.55) 6. (6.34) 65. (.56) 4.3 (4.). (4.8) 37.7 (5.4) 7. (6.73).4 (7.93) 4.4 (9.54) Frame 3 - All Drives except 5 HP, 48V (37 kw, 4V) Frame 3-5 HP, 48V (37 kw, 4V) Normal Duty Drive 7.3 (6.7). (.87) Dia. 8.7 (.3) Dia. places 59.7 (6.9) 37.3 (.47) Dia. places 8.7 (.3) Dia. Places 7.3 (6.7) 59.7 (6.9) 34.9 (.37) Dia. Places 46.7 (.84) Dia. Places 67.9 (6.6) 53.9 (6.6) 3.5 (5.4) 6.9 (6.4) 87.3 (7.37) 67.9 (6.6) 3.5 (5.4) 6.9 (6.4) 87.3 (7.37) 87.7 (3.45) 94. (37.) 3. (5.6) 6. (6.38). (7.96) 5. (9.9) 87.7 (3.45) 94. (3.7) 3. (5.6). (7.96) 5 (9.9) Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
A-8 Supplemental Information Frame 4 Figure A.9 PowerFlex 7S Bottom View Dimensions (continued) Frame 5-75 HP, 48V (55 kw, 4V) Normal Duty Drive. (.87) Dia. 76. (.99) 65.3 (.57) 8.7 (.3) Dia. Places 47. (.85) Dia. Places 54. (.3) Dia. Places 69. (6.65) 58. (6.3) 34.9 (.37) Dia. Places. (.87) Dia. Places 6.7 (.47) Dia. Places 89.7 (7.47) 77.9 (7.) 57.9 (6.) 4.9 (5.59) 5. (4.4) 4.9 (9.5) 9.5 (9.4). (8.66) 84. (7.4) 59.5 (6.8) 96. (3.78) 65. (.56) 6.8 (.6) 36.8 (.45) 5.5 (.3) 63.8 (.5).8 (4.44) 8.8 (7.) 65. (.56) 93. (3.66). (4.33) Frame 5 - HP, 48V (55 kw, 4V) Normal Duty Drive 5. (5.9) 5. (8.46) 8. (.) 3. (.6) 7.6 (4.4) 96.9 (3.8) 34.9 (.37) Dia.. (.87) Dia. Places 6.7 (.47) Dia. Places Removable Junction Box 4.9 (9.5) 3.5 (8.8) 88.5 (7.4) 84.3 (7.6) 53.5 (6.4) 96. (3.78) 65. (.56) 93. (3.66) 9. (4.9) 93. (7.6) 97.3 (.7) Frame 6 3.5 (4.86).9 (4.44) 34.9 (.37) Dia. 6.7 (.47) Dia. 3 Places. (.87) Dia. 4 Places Removable Junction Box 4. (9.53).3 (8.75) 48.5 (5.85) 6.6 (4.59) 85.4 (7.3) 5.8 (5.98) 9. (8.6) 75.5 (.85) 67.3 (.65) 4.4 (4.5) 9.4 (4.7) 36.4 (5.37) 97.4 (7.77) 97.4 (.7) 347.4 (3.7) 397.4 (5.6) Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Appendix B Control Block Diagrams List of Control Block Diagrams Flow diagrams on the following pages illustrate the drives control algorithms. For Information on See Page... Overview B- Speed Control - Reference B-3 Speed Control - Regulator B-4 Process Control B-5 Position Control - Interpolated/Direct B-6 Position Control - Point to Point B-7 Position Control - Auxiliary/Control B-8 Torque Control-Torque B-9 Torque Control-Current B- Speed/Position Feedback B- Inputs & Outputs - Discrete B- Inputs & Outputs - Analog B-3 Inverter Overload IT B-4 User Functions B-5 Control Logic B-6 Trend B-7
B- Control Block Diagrams Position Control (ms) CoarsePosit Trgt Position 748 Interpolator Aux Posit Ref 743 Pt-Pt Posit Ref 758 E E Mtr Posit FB 76 Posit Load Fdbk 764 Posit Ref Sel 74 [ N ] [ D ] Gear Rat Reference Selection (Mode) [ N ] [ D ] Gear Rat Position Offset PositReg P Gain 768 Posit Reg Integ 77 + Proportional Channel Integration Channel Point to Point PI Regulator Speed Control - Reference (ms) Selected Spd Ref S Curve Spd Ref Scaled Spd Ref Link * 3 4 5 Speed Ref Sel 6 + Speed Ref Selection 4 Linear Ramp & S Curve 43 Link Lead Lag Friction Comp Inertia Comp 46 45 59 Process Control (ms) Link Torque Ref Inputs PI Output PI Reference 8 PI Feedback 8 PI Prop Gain 8 Definations of the Per Unit system: PI Regulator. PU Position = Distance traveled in sec at Base Spd. PU Speed = Base Speed of the Motor Limit. PU Torque = Base Torque of the Motor 86 PI Integ Time 87 ( )= Enumerated Parameter [ ]= Page and Coordinate ex. 3A = pg 3, Column A, Row + Posit Spd Output 38 Link Torque Control (.5ms) Spd Reg PI Out 3 FricComp TorqAdd 45 Inertia Torq Add 59 xxx + 3 Speed Trim 3 *, /, + PowerFlex 7S Block Diagrams Speed Control - Regulator (.5ms) Motor Speed Ref 3 Spd Reg PI Out 3 PI Regulator Lead Lag 3 Motor Spd Fdbk Lead Lag Spd Reg P Gain 8 Spd Reg I Gain 8 Spd Reg BW 9 Bus Volt & Power Regulator Torque Selection Notch Control Mtr TorqCurr Ref Flux 35 Limit FOC Perm Magn & Vector Control Current Processing Drive & Motor Protection Motor E Gear Read Only Parameter Load Read / Write Parameter E Read Only Parameter with Bit Enumeration Read / Write Parameter with Bit Enumeration Provides additional information /
Control Block Diagrams B-3 A B C D E F G H I Speed Control - Reference ( ms) 3 Logic Ctrl State Applied LogicCmd 57 5 3 8 5 6 Speed Ref Sel Selected Spd Ref Limited Spd Ref 4 4 53 Control Options Speed Ref Jog Speed / Spd Ref Divide Limit Max 7 3 X Rev Speed Limit Applied LogicCmd X Speed Ref 3 Fwd Speed Limit 5 5 8 Jog Speed 3 + 3 Spd Ref Multi (Unipol Fwd) + 4 4 Speed Ref 4 (Unipol Rev) - 5 5 Speed Ref 5 6 FricComp TorqAdd FricComp Spd Ref Speed Ref DPI 45 4 Link to Torque Control [8B] Friction Comp 5 Logic Command (Frict Comp) Inertia SpeedRef 56 4 4 43 44 FricComp Setup?n?t FricComp Stick Logic Command (Inertia Comp) FricComp Slip 9 Total Inertia FricComp Rated 57 58 InertiaAccelGain to Torque Control [8B] InertiaDecelGain DeltaSpeedScale Spd Trim SpdRef 47 Filtered Spd Ref Scaled Spd Ref 44 X 46 + 38 Spd Ref Bypass 37 S Curve Spd Ref Link 53 Control Options (SRef Filt En) to Speed Control - Regulator [4A] Speed Ref Scale 35 36 SpdRef Filt Gain 3 Link Inertia Comp SpdRef Filt BW Inertia Torq Add 59 43 Ramped Spd Ref 4 Ramp S Curve Link 8 34 S Curve Time 33 Accel Time Decel Time Speed Trim from Process Control [4G] Logic Command (SpdRamp Dsbl) 45 Delayed Spd Ref One Scan Inv 5 & Delay 57 Logic Logic Ctrl State (SRef Ramp En) Logic Command (Spd S Crv En) Virt Encdr Posit 6 4x internal Virtual Encoder Logic Ctrl State (SRef SCrv En) 57 5 Virt Encdr Dlyed 63 One Scan Logic Delay 6 Virt Encoder PPR 3 4 5 6 * set the desired port in param 69 * 5 Speed Comp 55 6 (kn * s)+ wn s + wn Lead Lag PI Output
B-4 Control Block Diagrams 4 3 4 5 6 A B C D E F G H I Speed Trim 3 SpdTrim 3 Scale 3 4 X Logic Ctrl State (Inrta Tst En) 57 4 Logic Ctrl State (CurrLim Stop) 57 6 Speed Control - Regulator (.5 ms) from Speed Control - Reference [3H4] Posit Spd Output 38 from Position Control [5H3] or [6H4] STrim Filt Gain SpdTrim Filt BW Spd Trim SpdRef 47 Speed Trim 5 6 4x Ovr Smpl (kn * s)+ wn s + wn Lead Lag + 9 Atune Spd Ref Logic Ctrl State Autotune Bypass 57 5 8 (J Tst FulSpd) (Spd Reg En) 3 3 Limit * set param 9 = to manually adjust param 8 9 9 9 8 9 Spd Reg BW Spd Reg Damping SpdReg P Gain Mx Motor Inertia Total Inertia Motor Spd Fdbk 3 [H] SReg FB Filt Gain SReg FB Filt BW 93 94 Motor Speed Ref 3 (kn * s)+ wn s + wn Lead Lag 7 Filtered SpdFdbk SpdReg AntiBckup Speed Error Spd Err Filt BW 89 84 Filter nd Order LPass Servo Lock Gain nff FeedFwd 85 Control Options (Jog -NoInteg) Speed Reg Ctrl (Integ Hold) Speed Reg Ctrl ks s ServoLck 53 8 8 3 (Integ Reset) Speed Reg Ctrl (Preset Sel) + - + + - + - * 8 Spd Reg P Gain 8 Spd Reg I Gain kp P Gain I Gain 8 ki s + Spd Reg Pos Lim Spd Reg Neg Lim Spd Reg Droop 86 3 SpdReg Integ Out Limit Droop SRegOut FiltGain 95 SReg Out Filt BW 96 Logic Ctrl State (Spd Reg En) (kn * s)+ wn s + wn Lead Lag 57 8 Spd Reg PI Out 3 to Torque Control [8A3] SReg Torq Preset 87 Motor Torque Ref 33
Control Block Diagrams B-5 A B C D E F G H I Process Control ( ms) Logic Ctrl State (ProcsTrim En) 55 5 & 57 3 Logic Status (Running) OR 83 PI Command (Enable) 5 Logic Command (ProcsTrim En) PI Output 8 kp PI Reference 8 + Filter 8 PI Feedback to Speed Control - Reference [G5] P Gain LPass Limit 86 84 PI Lpass Filt BW PI High Limit PI Prop Gain PI Lower Limit 9 PI Integ Output ki s PI Preload 85 I Gain Limit 87 3 9 9 PI Integ Time 88 PI Integ HLim 89 PI Integ LLim 4 5 6 + -
B-6 Control Block Diagrams 3 4 5 6 A B C D E F G H I CoarseSpd Trgt 75 CoarsePosit Trgt Position Control (Interp Rev) Xsync Status 748 74 3 Interpolator Interp SyncInput 3 Interp Accel Rate 75 Interp Speed 75 Aux Posit Ref Interp Position 749 743 See Point-to-Point Position Control Diagram page 7 74 Posit Ref Sel PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Div Motn Posit Sync 99 LPass Posit Offset 753 p786 bit or p99 must be linked to p3 for proper + Posit Offset 754 Interpolator operation. * 763 Act Motor Posit Posit Offset Spd 755 Rate Lim Logic Ctrl State (Position En) 786 57 3 Accum Deriv Position Control (X Offset Pol) Position Control (X Offset Ref) 74 4 74 5 745 746 [ N ] [ D ] Gear Rat Accum Deriv 744 * PositRef EGR Out + 747 Accum Filter 756 Logic Ctrl State (position enable) [7G5] 57 3 Output Enable * Position Control (ms) Interpolated/Direct Position Cmmd X Offst SpdFilt 55 6 Logic Status & from Speed/Posit Fdbk [H] Posit Load Fdbk Mtr Posit Fdbk 76 Link 764 Posit FB EGR Mul Posit FB EGR Div Deriv Deriv 766 767 Position Control (Integ En) Position Control (Integ Hold) Logic Ctrl State (position enable) [7F5] [ N ] [ D ] Gear Rat 74 74 3 57 3 Accum + - + - 765 * Inv & Accum Accum Posit Actl Load Position Error 769 Calib Const Calib Const PositReg P Gain + - PositReg Integ 768 77 kp P Gain I Gain XReg Integ LoLim XReg Integ HiLim PositReg Droop ki s 77 773 77 Limit Droop + XReg Integ Out 774 Position Status 74 74 74 Limit 775 XReg Spd LoLim 776 XReg Spd HiLim Position Control ActPosit Rst Position Status 74 (X Spd LLim) 74 3 (X Spd HLim) Posit Spd Output 38 to Speed Control - Regulator [3A] Position Control Xzero Preset 74 6 74 8 On the rising edge (activation) of p74 bit 7 [8G5] the following bit assignments occur: If p 74 bit 8 is set, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with [Mtr Posit Fdbk (p76) - Abs Posit Offset (p757)]. Also, p7 (test point 7) gets loaded with [ - Abs Posit Offset (p757)]. If p 74 bit 8 is reset and p74 bit 6 is set, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with Mtr Posit Fdbk (p76). Also, p7 (tp 7) gets loaded with the value. If p 74 bit 8 is reset and p74 bit 6 is reset, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with the reference value (prior to reference derivative function [6D]). Also, p7 (tp 7) gets loaded with (p763 - p76). This is the only combination for motion control. x x x * 6
Control Block Diagrams B-7 A B C D E F G H I Position Control (ms) Point-To-Point PositRef EGR Out * Position Control Xzero Preset Position Control ActPosit Rst 744 74 Posit Ref Sel 74 6 74 8 Accum On the rising edge (activation) of p74 bit 7 [8G5] the following bit assignments occur: If p 74 bit 8 is set, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with [Mtr Posit Fdbk (p76) - Abs Posit Offset (p757)]. If p 74 bit 8 is reset and p74 bit 6 is set, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with Mtr Posit Fdbk (p76). If p 74 bit 8 is reset and p74 bit 6 is reset, then p763, p765, p744, and p747 get loaded with the reference value (prior to reference derivative function [7D]). * Position Cmmd + 747 [ N ] [ D ] Gear Rat Deriv Accum See Interpolated/Direct Position Control Diagram Page 6 745 746 PositRef EGR Mul PositRef EGR Div 758 Pt-Pt Posit Ref Deriv Reref 74 X Offst SpdFilt 756 + Posit Offset Posit Offset Posit Offset Spd Position Control (Pt-Pt ReRef) Rate Lim 753 754 755 Filter LPass 74 4 74 5 Position Control (X Offset Pol) Position Control (X Offset Ref) 57 3 Logic Ctrl State (Position En) Logic Cntrl State [7G5] 57 3 & Speed Out Enable 74 Position Error 769 3 Posit Spd Output 38 Mtr Posit Fdbk 76 from Speed/Posit Fdbk [H] to Speed Control - Regulator [3A] (X Spd LLim) (X Spd HLim) Position Status 74 74 3 Limit Accum + - Deriv Point to Point Position 768 PositReg P Gain 76 Pt-Pt Filt BW 759 76 XReg Spd LoLim 775 Pt-Pt Accel Time Act Motor Posit Pt-Pt Decel Time * 763 Accum XReg Spd HiLim 776 4 5 6 74 4 Position Status (PtPtRRef Act) * 7
B-8 Control Block Diagrams A B C D E F G H I 8 Position Control (ms) Auxiliary / Control Sync Generator Xsync In 788 Latch 789 Xsync Out Position Status (Posit Watch) 74 8 Posit Detct In 784 Link Act Motor Posit 763 Xsync Out 79 Position Watch 74 6 74 7 Position Control (X Watch En) (X Watch Dir) Xsync Out Dly 79 One Scan Latch 79 Xsync In Delay 78 PositDetct Stpt Xsync Out 3 794 Position Status (Posit Watch) One Act Motor Posit Posit Detct In Scan 795 Xsync Out 3 Dly 763 Link 785 Delay Position Control (X Watch En) 74 8 (X Watch Dir) 74 9 Latch 793 Xsync In 3 74 9 Position Watch.5ms Xsync Status (Sync Pulse) 37 SL System Time 78 PositDetct Stpt 786.5ms.5ms * (p787) Sync Pulse Generator Position Status (In Position) 74 769 Position Error 787 Xsync Gen Period In Position Detect 78 In Posit BW 783 In Posit Dwell Auxiliary Control Pos Reg On (p74 bit 7) needs to be set to activate the position regulator. Motion Connection Active Position Control (AbsoluteMode) 74 7 Posit Ref Sel (Interpolate) OR Posit Index Ctrl (Preset) 796 3 Power up Posit Ref Sel (Pt to Pt) & & Posit Index Ctrl 796 (Step) 796 (Reverse) - & OR 74 7 Applied LogicCmd (PositionEnbl) Logic Command (PositionEnbl) Index output 799 3 X + Posit Index Step 797 5 3 4 5 3 57 3 Logic Ctrl State (Position En) & 55 Logic Ctrl State (Running) PositIndexPreset 798 Posit Index Ctrl 796 Indexer 5 6 Position Status (Regulator On) [6C5] & [6G3] & [7G4] (Enable)
Control Block Diagrams B-9 A B C D E F G H I Torque Control - Torque (Task ) Spd/Torq ModeSel Inertia Adaption 9 Total Inertia 3 Motor Spd Fdbk 3 Inert Adapt Sel (Inrtia Adapt) (Load Est) 33 Inert Adapt BW 57 9 34 Inert Adapt Gain Logic Ctrl State (Torq Ref En) Logic Ctrl State (Forced Spd) 3 4 5 6 from Speed Control 57 3 Spd Reg PI Out [3H4] Motor Torque Ref 33 + + + + + 59 Inertia Torq Add [H4] [9A4] R Limit Notch 45 FricComp TorqAdd [H3] Min Limit Status 6 Torque Step 3 34 NotchAttenuation 8 Notch Filt Freq 4 Max 5 / Torque Ref Torq Ref Div 6 X 3 Torque Ref 4 Torq Ref Multi Abs Min 5 Torque Trim 5 Torque Pos Limit 3 Motor Spd Fdbk Power Limit Calc 36 DC Bus Voltage 45 3 Min 7 Mtring Power Lim BusReg/Brake Ref Torque PosLim Actl [9E5] Bus Volt Regulator X X 4 Rated Volts Limit 8 Regen Power Lim 353 Brake/Bus Cnfg (Bus Reg En) 4 Max Iq Actual Lim Brake/Bus Cnfg (Brake Enable) (BusRef High) Torque NegLim Actl [9E5] 6 [9H] Torque Neg Limit / - II - 7 + + + + + 9 + + + + + Flux Cur Lim MC 44 3 - X.45 - + Flux 44 &
B- Control Block Diagrams A B C D E F G H I Torque Control - Current (Task ) Is Is Actual Lim 35 OpnLp CurrLim 343 Min pu Stator Current Fdbk from Motor Control Iq IT-openloop Calc 356 Mtr Current Lim [8F5] Iq Actual Lim 353 Flux Current* 488 Min 3 MotorFluxCurr FB Max = inverter 3 sec rating X 38 Motor NP FLA Motor Current OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 IT-closedloop 53 3 Control Options (OL ClsLpDsbl) 345 Drive OL JnctTemp 33 Heatsink Temp 346 Drive OL Status 53 6 Control Options (Trq Trim En) [8H3] Motor Torque Ref. 33 Motor Torque Ref Iq Ref Limited 358 57 Logic Ctrl State (CurrRef En) Control Options (Trq Trim En) kp+ ki s + - 33 [9H3] Mtr TorqCurr Ref 35 Iq Delay Option Iq Rate Limited 355. to Motor Control Rate Lim Limit Iq Actual Ref 35 34 Limit Status % Motor Flux 39 Control Options (Iq Delay) 354 35 Iq Ref Trim Iq Rate Limit Filter LPass Torque NegLim Actl [8H5] Flx LpassFilt BW 36 36 Min Flux Torque PosLim Actl [8H4] Calculated by Autotune (may be overwritten) * 3 4 5 6 53 6 PI Reg Torque Est + + Flux 359 53 Motor Flux Est + + Calc Flux. Flux Limit 4. Flux 3.
Control Block Diagrams B- Speed/Posit Fdbk (.5ms) Motor Fdbk Sel Mtr Fdbk Alt Sel 3 Encdr Spd Fdbk 3 Mtr Posit FB 76 3 Encoder Processing Logic Command (TachLoss Rst) Encdr Position Encdr Error 34 Encoder PPR 5 3 33 to Position Control [6B3] & [7B5] Encdr Config Encdr Spd Fdbk Feedback Loss Detect Motor Spd Fdbk 3 to Speed Control [4A4] Speed Fdbk Observer if?. Speed Calc / Scaled Spd Fdbk 7 A B C D E F G H I Filter X LPass Load Estimate 3 4 Encoder Processing 4 Encoder PPR 4 Encdr Error Encdr Position Encdr Config 43 44 Motor Velocity est. Velocity Est. (mc) 548 74 496 75 Accum Spd Obs Droop 73 Spd Fdbk Scale 7 33 6 Analog EPR Motor Torque Ref MtrSpd Simulated 4 Spd Observer BW 76 Motor Simulator 4 7 Spd Calc Opt Regis Ltch 53 Port Regis Ltch 35 4 MtrSpd Sim Posit Accum 4 36 Port Regis Cnfg 54 Opt Regis Cnfg Opt Regis Ctrl 55 Port Regis Ctrl 37 5 FB Opt Spd Fdbk 5 59 Hi Res Config Opt Regis Stat 56 Port Regis Stat 38 5 5 Feedback Option Card 66 Reslvr Config Option Card Registration Port Registration 5 FB Opt Posit Processing 49 Fdbk Option ID 5 Port Regis Ltch 45 Rslvr Spd Ratio 6 FB Opt Spd Fdbk 77 Reslvr Carrier Port Regis Cnfg 46 Reslvr In Volts 6 Port Regis Ctrl 47 76 FB Opt Posit 7 7 7 73 74 Rslvr XfrmRatio 6 Reslvr CableBal Port Regis Stat 48 Hi Res Status 6 Port Registration Reslvr Status 6 67 4 5 6 To HIM Display
B- Control Block Diagrams A B C D E F G H I Inputs & Outputs - Digital (.5ms) 4 VDC 4 VDC Common TB-T TB-T Selections per p838 {Logic Common} DigIn Sel 838 Local I/O Status (Output Relay) 84 84 6 DigIn Src Data 88 Local I/O Status (DigIn ) Debounce TB-T9 TB-T8 TB-T7 89 TB-B5 TB-B4 Bit Combine 84 84 Relay Out Data Relay Out Bit Selector DigIn Debounce 86 DigIn SinkData Local I/O Status (Aux Out ) 87 DigIn Sink Bit 84 7 84 TB-T6 TB-T5 TB-T4 Local I/O Status (Enable In) Debounce 85 843 844 Dig Out Data Dig Out Bit En In Debounce Selections per p839 839 DigIn Sel {Return "Common"} Local I/O Status (Aux Out ) 84 8 84 SynchLink {Return "Common"} TB-T5 TB-T6 845 846 Dig Out Data Dig Out Bit DigIn Src Data 83 Bit Combine Local I/O Status (DigIn ) Debounce Selector Bit Filter 833 DigIn Debounce Port Regis Cnfg 83 83 DigIn SinkData DigIn Sink Bit 36 8 36 9 36 36 (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt 3) Selections per p84 84 DigIn 3 Sel {Return "Common"} 84 3 84 3 SynchLink TB-T3 TB-T4 DigIn 3 Src Data 836 Bit Combine Local I/O Status (DigIn 3) Debounce Selector Bit Filter 837 DigIn 3 Debounce Port Regis Cnfg 46 8 3 834 835 DigIn 3 SinkData DigIn 3 Sink Bit 46 9 46 (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt ) (Ext Filt 3) 46 4 5 6 84 84
Control Block Diagrams B-3 Inputs & Outputs - Analog (.5ms) Anlg In Volts A B C D E F G H I 8 Anlg Out Volts 86 + Anlg Out Offset AnlgOut Anlg In Data 8 + A/D 4bit TB-B TB-B TB-B5 TB-B6 X 8 84 85 Anlg Out (kn * s)+ wn s + wn X + D/A bit + Limit 83 Anlg In Offset Anlg In Scale Anlg Out Scale AI Filt Gain Anlg Out Zero 84 85 Anlg In Filt BW Anlg In Volts Anlg Out Volts AnlgOut Anlg In Data 86 + A/D 4bit TB-B8 TB-B7 TB-B TB-B3 Lead Lag + 8 88 [x] 87 [x] Shield 87 8 X 83 89 8 X Anlg Out 89 Anlg In Offset 88 Anlg In Scale Anlg Out Scale Shield TB-B9 TB-B4 Anlg Out Offset + + D/A bit + Limit + 83 [x] - - - - 8 AI Filt Gain Anlg Out Zero 8 8 3 (kn * s)+ wn s + wn Lead Lag [x] Anlg In Filt BW 4 5 6 3
B-4 Control Block Diagrams A B C D E F G H I Inverter Overload IT Inverter Over Load (IT) Power Device Characteristics Heatsink Temp 33 NTC Drive OL JnctTemp Drive OL Status 346 345 Heat sink and Junction degree Calculator Pwr EE Data (NTC Shorted) (NTC Open) (HS OverTemp) 358 Iq Ref Limited Duty Cycle Mtr Over Load (IT) pu Stator Current fdbk pu_current Output current (HS Pending) (IT Trip) (IT Pending) (IT Foldback) (Jnc OverTemp) Motor NP FLA Bus Voltage PWM Frequency (see torque block) OL OpnLP CurrLim 343 OL ClsLp CurrLim 344 Exception Event 3 4 5 6 7 (Mtr OL Trip) (Mtr OL Pend) Exception Event 3 right of curve time (sec). typ 6 pu_current 38 339 34 X Mtr IT Calibrat Mtr IT Trp ThrH (Inv OTmpPend) (Inv OTmpTrip (Inv OL Pend) (Inv OLTrip) Service Factor 336.5 typ DB resistor Mtr IT Curr Min 337 pu motor velocity. Exception Event (BrakeOL Trip) 5 3 3 dc bus 44 3 3 4 5 6 Drive Cnfg (Brake Enable) (Brake Extern) Mtr IT Spd Min 338 46 Brake PulseWatts {pulse watts @ sec} 47 Brake Watts 45 BusReg/Brake Ref {% of peak ac line} 4 5 6 4
Control Block Diagrams B-5 A B C D E F G H I PeakDtct Ctrl In PeakDtct Ctrl In User Functions (Peak Sel) 6 (Peak Sel) Peak Ctrl Status Peak Ctrl Status (Peak Chng) (Peak Chng) PeakDtct Ctrl In PeakDtct Ctrl In Inv (Peak Hold) Inv 5 (Peak Hold) PeakDtct Ctrl In OR 4 (Peak Set) 7 6 PkDtct In (Peak Set) PeakDtct In Int PeakDtct Ctrl In 3 OR PkDtct In PeakDtct In Int Peak Detect Out Peak Detect Out 5 9 PeakDtct Preset 4 PeakDtct Preset 8 NOTE: The change bit, Peak x Chng (where x = or ), is set TRUE if the peak detect value changes, otherwise the change bit is set FALSE. Change is also set to FALSE if the detector is in HOLD or SET. Limit Gen Hi Out 7 - Time Axis Rate Time Axis Output LimGen X axis In 6 Limit Gen Lo Out 8 - + Time Func Generator Limit Generator LimGen Y axis Mn 5 83 OR PI Command (Time Lim En) 5 3 4 LimGen Y axis Mx Logic Command (Time Axis En) 37 Switch Control (SW Int On) 37 Switch Control (SW On) SW Int NO 37 SW NO 374 SW Int NC 37 373 SW Int Output SW NC 375 376 SW Output 3 4 5 6 5
B-6 Control Block Diagrams 6 3 4 5 6 A B C D E F G H I In from DriveLogix HIM External DPI Connection 6 5 3 5 5 Port 7 Port Port Port 3 Port 5 Port Logic Command Logic Parser 5 Drive Logic Rslt 58 5 5 Applied LogicCmd 5 5 3 * P53 Control Options * P56 Run Inhibit Status Bit SpdRamp Dsbl Bit Spd S Crv En Bit TachLoss Rst Bit 3Time Axis En Bit 4AC Atune En Bit 5Pwr Diag En Bit 6Dir Sel En Bit 7PM Offset En Bit 8Mtr Inert En Bit 9Sys Inert En Bit Inertia Comp Bit Frict Comp Bit Procs TrimEn Bit 3PositionEnbl Bit 4 Bit 5 Control Logic Aux. External DPI Connection Internal DPI Comm Device Digital Inputs 5 5 Masks Owners Bit Normal Stop Bit Start Bit Jog Bit 3Clear Fault Bit 4Unipol Fault Bit 5Unipol Fwd Bit 6 Bit 7Jog Bit 8CurrLim Stop Bit 9Coast Stop Bit Bit Bit Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit SpdRamp DsblBit 6Normal Stop Bit Spd S Crv EnBit 7Start Bit TachLss RstBit 8Jog Bit 3Time Axis EnBit 9Clear Fault Bit 4MC Atune EnBit Unipol Fwd Bit 5Pwr Diag EnBit Unipol Rev Bit 6Dir Sel EnBit Bit 7PM Offset EnBit 3Jog Bit 8Mtr Inert EnBit 4CurrLim Stop Bit 9Sys Inert EnBit 5Coast Stop Bit Inertia CompBit 6 Bit Frict CompBit 7 Bit Procs Trim EnBit 8 Bit 3PositionEnblBit 9 Bit 4Bit 3 Bit 5Bit 3 693Logic Mask 694Start Mask 695Jog Mask 696Direction Mask 697Fault Clr Mask 7Stop Owner 7Start Owner 7Jog Owner 73Direction Owner 74Fault Clr Owner
Control Block Diagrams B-7 3 4 5 6 A B C D E F G H I Trend TrigA Int Trend TrigA Trend TrigB Int Trend TrigB 54 55 56 57 Trend Trig Data OR OR 58 A>B OR Trend Trigger S R Q 5 Trend Status (Triggered) Trace Select (Auto Output) 5 5 Setting bit 5 of p5 causes the trend data to auto play back at the rate entered p53 (milliseconds). Trend Rate 53 Trend Trend Trig Data 58 p59 selectes the bit within p58 to use as the trend trigger Trend Trig Bit 59 Trend Trig Bit 59 Trend PreSamples Trend Control (Enbl Collect) Buffer Full 6 5 5 S R Trend Status (Complete) p Trend PreSamples Trend Marker Int Trend Marker 6 8 8 p6 selects the number of data points to store prior to the trend trigger (pre-trigger data). 8 or p8, depending on the data type of the trend data, determines the marker value placed in the trend data at the beginning of the pre-trigger data (trigger point - p6 - ). Pre -trigger data is located at negative pointer values ranging from [ - p6 - ] to -. The trigger point data value is located at pointer value of in p83. Post -trigger data is located at positive pointer values ranging from to [ + p6. TrendBuffPointer 83 Trend Control (In ) 5 Trend Control (In ) Trend Control (In 3 ) Trend Control (In 4 ) 5 5 3 5 4 Trend In Int Trend In 64 65 3 Trend In Int Trend In Trend Out Int 84 Trend Out 85 66 67 3 Trend In3 Int Trend In3 Trend Out Int 86 Trend Out 87 68 69 3 Trend In4 Int Trend In4 Trend Out3 Int 88 Trend Out3 89 7 7 3 Trend Out Int 9 Trend Out 9 Trend Marker Int 8 Trend Marker 8 TrendBuffPointer 83................................................ 7
B-8 Control Block Diagrams Notes:
Appendix C Application Notes For additional application notes, refer to the PowerFlex 7S Adjustable Frequency AC Drive with Phase I Control - Reference Manual, publication PFLEX-RM. For Information on See Page... Input Voltage Range/Tolerance C- Motor Control Mode C- Motor Overload C-3 Overspeed Limit C-4 Stop Dwell Time C-5 Setpt Data C-6 Setpt Data C-6 Input Voltage Range/ Tolerance Drive Rating Nominal Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range -4-64 8-64 8 8 8-64 4 3 3-64 38-4 38 38 38-58 34-58 4 4 4-58 48 46 46-58 5-6 (Frames -4 Only) 6 575 575-66 43-66 5-69 (Frames 5 & 6 Only) 6 575 575-66 475-759 69 69 69-759 475-759 Drive Full Power Range = Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage + %. Rated current is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range = Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage - % to Drive Rated Voltage + %. Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage HP @ Motor (Drive Output) No Drive Output Derated Power Range Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Nominal Motor Voltage -% Nominal Motor Voltage Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input) Drive Rated Voltage Drive Rated Voltage +%
C- Application Notes Example: Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP, 46V motor connected to a 48V rated drive supplied with 34V Actual Line Voltage input. Actual Line Voltage / Nominal Motor Voltage = 74.3% 74.3% 5 HP = 3.7 HP 74.3% 6 Hz = 44.6 Hz At 34V Actual Line Voltage, the maximum power the 5 HP, 46V motor can produce is 3.7 HP at 44.6 Hz. HP @ Motor (Drive Output) 5 HP 3.7 HP No Drive Output 34V 46V Actual Line Voltage (Drive Input) 48V 58V Motor Control Mode Parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] selects the type of motor control to use. This parameter is set during the HIM assisted startup when asked to select the Motor Control. The settings for Parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] are - "FOC" selects field oriented control. Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance. - "FOC" selects field oriented control and is only used for a specific type of AC induction motor with motor thermal feedback. - "Pmag Motor" selects control for permanent magnet motors. 3 - "" 4 - "Test" puts the drive in a test mode to perform the direction test. "Test" is automatically selected during the direction test portion of the Start-Up routine and does not need to be set manually by the user. Field Oriented Control, Permanent Magnet Motor Control, and Volts/Hertz Control are described in further detail below. Field Oriented Control Field oriented control is used with AC squirrel cage induction motors for high performance. Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode. Field oriented control is selected by setting parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = "FOC". In field oriented control, the drive takes the speed reference that is specified by the Speed Reference Selection Block and compares it to the speed feedback. The speed regulator uses Proportional and Integral gains to adjust the torque reference for the motor. This torque reference attempts to operate the motor at the specified speed. The torque reference is then converted to the torque producing component of the motor current.
Application Notes C-3 This type of speed regulator produces a high bandwidth response to speed command and load changes. In field oriented control the flux and torque producing currents are independently controlled. Therefore, you can send a torque reference directly instead of a speed reference. The independent flux control also allows you to reduce the flux in order to run above base motor speed. High Bandwidth Current Regulator SPEED REF. Speed Reg. Flux Reg. TORQUE REF. Current Reg. V mag V ang Voltage Control CURRENT FEEDBACK Inverter Motor Adaptive Controller AUTOTUNE PARAMETERS SLIP SPEED FEEDBACK Encoder Permanent Magnet Control Permanent magnet control is used with permanent magnet motors. Permanent magnet motor control is selected by setting parameter 485 [Motor Ctrl Mode] = "Pmag Motor". Permanent magnet motor control requires either a hi-resolution Stegmann encoder or compatible resolver feedback on the motor. Refer to PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option on page E- for a list of compatible hi-resolution Stegmann encoders and compatible resolvers. Motor data and an autotune is required for correct operation in this mode. Refer to PowerFlex 7S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications on page I- for a list of compatible Allen-Bradley permanent magnet motors and motor data to be used with the PowerFlex 7S. Motor Overload Mtr IT Spd Min Sets the minimum speed for the motor overload (I T) function. The value indicates minimum speed below the minimum current threshold [Mtr IT Curr Min], and these are the first current/speed breakpoint. From this point the current threshold is linear to the value specified by the motor service factor [Service Factor].
C-4 Application Notes Figure C. Motor Overload Curve With Parameter 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] Is Less Than. P336 [Service Factor] Current When motor current exceeds the value of the curve, Mtr OL Output integrates. A motor overload exception event occurs when the value in Mtr OL Output reaches.. The value of Mtr OL Output is visible in parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when the value of parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] equals 3. P337 [Mtr IT Curr Min] P338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] Base Speed (.) Speed Figure C. Motor Overload Curve With Parameter 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] Is Equal To. P336 [Service Factor] Current When the value of parameter 338 [Mtr IT Spd Min] equals., the curve is flat - at the value of rated motor current times the value of parameter 336 [Service Factor]. If motor current exceeds the value of the curve, the value of Mtr OL Output integrates. The value of Mtr OL Output is visible in parameter 33 [Fault TP Data] when the value of parameter 39 [Fault TP Sel] equals 3. Speed Overspeed Limit The absolute overspeed limit parameter, parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim], is an adjustable setting. This sets a limit tolerance below parameter 3 [Rev Speed Lim] and above parameter 3 [Fwd Speed Lim], that is allowable. This can be used as a safe working speed limit. Example Speed reference is set to equal parameter 3 [Fwd Speed Lim]. Based on tuning of the drive, the speed could overshoot the commanded speed. If parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] is set equal to the forward speed limit and an overshoot is speed occurs, the drive will fault on an absolute overspeed. Example Drive is configured as a torque follower. If the mechanical connection to the load is severed, the torque command to the drive will probably be greater than the motor unloaded will require to maintain the system speed. This will cause the motor speed to increase until the torque command is met. Setting parameter 335 [Abs OverSpd Lim] to the safe motor speed will cause the fault to occur when the motor speed increase beyond this limit.
Application Notes C-5 Stop Dwell Time Sets an adjustable delay time between detecting zero speed and disabling the speed and torque regulators, when responding to a stop command. Important: Consult industry and local codes when setting the value of this parameter. Figure C.3 Drive Operation When Parameter 54 [Stop Dwell Time] Equals Zero Speed When Parameter 54 [Stop Dwell Time] equals zero, the drive turns off the velocity and torque regulators when it detects zero speed. P 6 [Zero Speed Lim] Time Drive Receives Stop Command Drive Detects Zero Speed and Turns Off Regulators Figure C.4 Drive Operation When Parameter 54 [Stop Dwell Time] Equals Zero Speed When Parameter 54 [Stop Dwell Time] is greater than zero, the drive delays turning off the velocity and torque regulators for the amount of time specified by Parameter 54 P 54 [Stop Dwell Time] P 6 [Zero Speed Lim] Time Drive Receives Stop Command Drive Detects Zero Speed Drive Turns Off Regulators
C-6 Application Notes Setpt Data Provides data for comparison of Par 7 [Setpt Data] to Par 73 [Setpt TripPoint], driving bit 6 [At Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. Figure C.5 At Setpoint Status P7 [Setpt Data] bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns on bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns off bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns on bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns off bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns on bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns off bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns on bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns off bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns on bit 6 [At Setpt ] turns off P73 [Setpt TripPoint] + x P74 [Setpt Limit] P73 [Setpt TripPoint] + P74 [Setpt Limit] P73 [Setpt TripPoint] P73 [Setpt TripPoint] - P74 [Setpt Limit] P73 [Setpt TripPoint] - x P74 [Setpt Limit] Time Setpt Data Provides data for comparison of Par75 [Setpt Data] to Par 76 [Setpt TripPoint], driving bit 7 [Above Setpt ] of Par 55 [Logic Status]. Figure C.6 Above Setpoint Status P75 [Setpt Data] bit 7 [Above Setpt ] turns on bit 7 [Above Setpt ] turns off P76 [Setpt TripPoint] P76 [Setpt TripPoint] - P77 [Setpt Limit] P76 [Setpt TripPoint] - x P77 [Setpt Limit] Time
or3 Appendix D HIM Overview For Information on See Page... External and Internal Connections D- LCD Display Elements D- Removing/Installing the HIM D-3 External and Internal Connections The PowerFlex 7S provides cable connection for a handheld HIM or Port Expander/Splitter (Frame shown). 3. No. Connector Description ➊ DPI Port HIM connection when installed in cover. ➋ DPI Port Cable connection for handheld and remote options. ➌ DPI Port 3 or Splitter cable connected to DPI Port provides additional port.
D- HIM Overview LCD Display Elements Display Description F Stopped. Main Menu: Diagnostics. Parameter Device Select Auto RPM Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto/Manual Information Commanded or Output Frequency Programming / Monitoring / Troubleshooting ALT Functions To use an ALT function, press the ALT key release it, then press the programming key associated with one of the following functions: Table D.A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then... ALT Esc ALT Sel S.M.A.R.T. View Function not available Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or detailed information about a parameter or component. ALT ALT ALT Lang Auto/Man Not Functional at this time Function not available ALT Remove Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is not the last controlling device and does not have Manual control of the drive. ALT. Exp Allows the value to be entered as an exponent. ALT +/ Param # Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing/editing.
HIM Overview D-3 Removing/Installing the HIM The HIM can be removed or installed while the drive is powered. Step Key(s) Example Displays To remove the HIM.... Press ALT and then Enter (Remove). The Remove HIM configuration screen appears. Remove Op Intrfc: Press Enter to. Press Enter to confirm that you want to remove ALT + Disconnect Op Intfc? the HIM. 3. Remove the HIM from the drive. (Port. Control) To install HIM.... Insert into drive or connect cable.
D-4 HIM Overview Notes:
Appendix E PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Chapter Objectives For Information on See Page... Specifications E- Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder E- Specifications Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Encoder Voltage Supply.5V dc @ 3 ma Hi-Resolution Feedback Sine/Cosine V P-P Offset.5 Maximum Cable Length 9m (95 ft) Maximum Frequency.5 µs/cycle (Encoder Speed) (4687.5 RPM for encoders with 4 sine cycles per revolution) (9375 RPM for encoders with 5 sine cycles per revolution) RS-485 Interface The Hi-Resolution Feedback Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address Command Number Mode Number of turns Number of Sine/Cos cycles Checksum Customer-I/O plug (P) Allen-Bradley PN: S9469 Weidmuller PN: BL3.5/9/BK Supported Encoders Table E.A specifies which encoders are supported by the 7S Hi-Resolution Stegmann Encoder Feedback Option module. Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended". This will ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory.
E- PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Table E.A Supported Stegmann Encoders Model Resolution Comment SINCOS SCS-6, SCS-7, 5 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-6 and SCM-7 have built-in SCM-6, and SCM-7 mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SCS-KIT- and SCM-KIT- 4 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-6 and SCM-7 have built-in mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SRS-5, SRS-6, 4 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-5 and SRM-6 have built-in SRM-5, and SRM-6 mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SRS/M 5 4 sine cycles per revolution SRS5 and SRM5 have built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 5 square flange mounting. SINCOS SRS66 4 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 4 mm diameter SINCOS SHS-7 5 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this encoder, the SHS-7 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply. SINCOS, SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc. Wiring the Stegmann Hi-Resolution Feedback Option Card to an Encoder Terminal block P contains connection points for a Stegmann Hiperface encoder. This terminal block resides on the Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option card. Hiperface is a registered trademark of Stegmann Inc. Figure E. Control Assembly Sliding Access Panel TIP: Remember to route wires through the sliding access panel at the bottom of the Control Assembly.
PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option E-3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Terminal Signal Description POWER COMMON Power supply for encoder POWER interface. REFSIN Negative Sine signal. 9 +SIN Positive Sine signal. 8 REFCOS Negative Cosine signal. 7 +COS Positive Cosine signal. 6 SHIELD Connection point for encoder 5 SHIELD cable shield. 4 N/C Not connected. 3 N/C DATA+ (RS 485) Positive DH485 terminal. DATA- (RS 485) Negative DH485 terminal. Recommended Cables If you are using this motor and feedback device: Use this cable: See this wiring diagram: Allen-Bradley 36AB-BXXXX-ML, and Allen-Bradley 36-CECU-XXL-XXX Figure E. on page E-3 -MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley 36AB-BXXXX-ML, -MKXL, Allen-Bradley 9-CDNFDMP-SXX Figure E.3 on page E-4 -SL, and -SKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MP-Series 46V motors with Allen-Bradley 9-CDNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.3 on page E-4 embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley MP-Series 3V motors with Allen-Bradley 9-UXNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX Figure E.4 on page E-4 embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with-pin DIN style connector Figure E.5 on page E-4 SHS-7 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-6, SCS-7, SCM-6 or SCM-7, Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with -pin DIN style connector or 8-pin Berg style connector Figure E.5 on page E-4 or Figure E.7 on page E-5 SRS-5, SRS-6, SRM-6, SRM-6, SRS-5 or SRM-5 rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SCS-Kit or SCK-Kit rotary encoder Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector Figure E.7 on page E-5 Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS66 rotary encoder Is available only with pre-attached Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable of various lengths Figure E.8 on page E-5 Connection Examples Figure E. 36-CECU-XXL-XXX cable POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board WH BK BK RD BK BU 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 BK GN BK WH BK RD BK BU BK GN A B C D E F G H I J ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS-485) SHIELD OVERALL SHIELD
E-4 PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Connection Examples Figure E.3 46V MP Series Motor with 9-CDNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable; or 36AB-BXXXX-ML, -MKXL, -SL, and -SKXL motor with 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board WH/OR OR BK/WH BK WH/RD 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 RD BU WH/BU GN WH/GN BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/OR BU WH/BU A B C D E F N P R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS- Figure E.4 3V MP Series Motor with 9-UXNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 RD BU WH/BU GN WH/GN Figure E.5 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with -pin DIN style connector BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY BU WH/BU A B C D E F K L R S ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS- Hi-Res Feedback Option Board BU RD BN REFSIN WH +SIN 9 BK REFCOS 8 +COS 7 PK SHIELD 6 SHIELD 5 N/C 4 N/C 3 GY GN POWER COMMON POWER DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) BU RD PK GN BN WH GY BK 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 ENCODER POWER N/C POWER COMMON SHIELD +COS DATA- (RS 485) REFSIN +SIN N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) REFCOS
PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option E-5 Connection Examples Figure E.6 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with -pin MS style connector POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board BU RD BN WH BK PK 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK A B C D E F G H I J ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS N/C SHIELD Figure E.7 Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with 8-pin Berg style connector POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board BU 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS Figure E.8 Stegmann pre-attached shielded twisted-pair cable POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS SHIELD SHIELD N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) Hi-Res Feedback Option Board BU 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS
E-6 PowerFlex 7S Stegmann Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option Notes:
Appendix F PowerFlex 7S Resolver Feedback Option Card Chapter Objectives For Information on See Page... Chapter Objectives F- Specifications F- Specifications Resolver Feedback Option Card Specifications Consideration Excitation Frequency Excitation Voltage Resolver Feedback Voltage Customer-I/O plug (P) Description 4 Hz 6 Vrms Vrms +/- 3 mv Allen-Bradley PN: S94698 Weidmuller PN: BL3.5/9/8BK Compatible Resolvers Table G specifies which resolvers are supported by the 7S Resolver Feedback Option module. Table G Compatible Resolvers. Manufacturer Manufacturer Catalog Number Notes Tamagawa TS-4N8E3 x, flange-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-4N8E3 x, flange-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-4N85E3 x 5, flange-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-87NE9 x, HD foot-mounted enclosure, double shaft Tamagawa TS-87NE9 x, HD foot-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-87NE9 x, HD foot-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-87N5E9 x 5, HD foot-mounted enclosure Tamagawa TS-87NE9 x, HD foot-mounted enclosure, double shaft Advanced Micro Controls Inc. (AMCI) RX-C/7 Allen-Bradley servo motors may be ordered with factory installed resolvers. Table H specifies which factory installed resolvers are supported by the 7S Resolver Feedback Option module.
F- PowerFlex 7S Resolver Feedback Option Card Table H Compatibility with Resolvers on Allen-Bradley Motors Motor / Resolver Type Compatible Notes 36 AB 3V Primary Resolver No Receiver type - not supported 36 AB 3V Secondary Resolver Yes Transmitter type - supported Secondary resolver is geared to motor - not intended for motor speed / position feedback 36 AB 46V Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type - supported 36 AB 46V Secondary Resolver Yes Transmitter type - supported Secondary resolver is geared to motor - not intended for motor speed / position feedback 36AD 3V Rare Earth No Receiver type - not supported 36AH 46V Explosion Proof Motor Primary Resolver Yes Transmitter type - supported 36AH 46V Explosion Proof Motor Secondary Resolver Yes Transmitter type - supported Secondary resolver is geared to motor - not intended for motor speed / position feedback 36AS 46V Rare Earth Yes Transmitter type - supported MPL 46V Yes Transmitter type - supported Wiring the Resolver Feedback Option Card to a Resolver 3 4 5 6 7 8 Terminal Signal Description 8 REF HIGH Positive Reference signal 7 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable shield 6 REF LOW Negative Reference signal 5 SIN HIGH Positive Sine signal 4 SHIELD Connection point for resolver cable shield 3 SIN LOW Negative Sine signal COS HIGH Positive Cosine signal COS LOW Negative Cosine signal
PowerFlex 7S Resolver Feedback Option Card F-3 Connection Examples Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Up REF HIGH 8 SHIELD 7 REF LOW 6 SIN HIGH 5 SHIELD 4 + - + - + - + - + - + REF SIN COS - + - SIN LOW 3 COS HIGH COS LOW + - + - Resolver Interface - Clockwise Rotation = Count Down (Reverse Polarity of Sine or Cosine Signals) REF HIGH 8 SHIELD 7 REF LOW 6 SIN HIGH 5 SHIELD 4 + - - + + - + - + - + REF SIN COS - + - SIN LOW 3 COS HIGH COS LOW + - + - REF HIGH 8 SHIELD 7 REF LOW 6 SIN HIGH 5 SHIELD 4 + - + - + - + - + - + REF SIN COS - + - SIN LOW 3 COS HIGH COS LOW - + + -
F-4 PowerFlex 7S Resolver Feedback Option Card Notes
S.M.A.R.T. Exit Lang Auto / Man Remove Exp Param # Appendix G Access Procedures Using this Appendix For information about: See page Removing Cover(s) G- Replacing Cover(s) G- Removing Cover(s) Task A B C D E Description Loosen captive screw Push down on front cover Pull front cover away from assembly Pull side cover forward Lift side cover off of control assembly B E DRIVE ENABLE SYNCHLINK Esc Sel 7 8 9 4 5 6 Jog 3 Alt. +/- C A D
G- Access Procedures Replacing Cover(s) Task Description A Align tabs on side cover with slots on drive B Push side cover down onto control assembly Push side cover back onto control assembly C B C A
Access Procedures G-3 Task D E F G H Description Locate tabs on inside of front cover Align tabs on front cover with slots on flanges Push front cover onto drive Push front cover up into slots Tighten captive screw D E G F H
G-4 Access Procedures Notes
Appendix H PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card For information about: See page Specifications H- Wiring the MDI Option Card H-3 Specifications MDI Option Card Specifications Consideration Description Rotary Encoder Voltage Supply.5V dc @ 3 ma Rotary Encoder Hi-Resolution Sine/Cosine V P-P Offset.5 Feedback Rotary Encoder Maximum Cable 8m (6 ft.) Length Rotary Encoder RS-485 Interface The MDI Option card obtains the following information via the Hiperface RS-485 interface shortly after power-up: Address Command Number Mode Number of turns Number of Sine/Cos cycles Checksum Registration Inputs high speed -4V dc sinking digital inputs Customer-I/O plug (P) Allen-Bradley PN: S947497 Weidmuller PN: 67678 Supported Linear Sensors Temposonics III Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in SG work with the MDI Option. Part Number Character Characteristic Input Voltage = +4Vdc S SSI output Data Length = 4 Bits G Output Format = Gray Code Resolution =.5 mm Performance = Standard Scale Orientation = Forward-acting Synchronized Temposonics is a registered trademark of MTS Systems Corporation.
H- PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card Supported Rotary Encoders Table H.A specifies which encoders work with the MDI Option. Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered as "Single Ended". This will ensure that the RS-485 channel has the proper termination network installed at the factory. Table H.A Supported Stegmann Rotary Encoders Model Resolution Comment SINCOS SCS-6, SCS-7, 5 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-6 and SCM-7 have built-in SCM-6, and SCM-7 mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SCS-KIT- and SCM-KIT- 4 sine cycles per revolution. SCM-6 and SCM-7 have built-in mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SRS-5, SRS-6, 4 sine cycles per revolution. SRM-5 and SRM-6 have built-in SRM-5, and SRM-6 mechanical turns counter. SINCOS SRS/M 5 4 sine cycles per revolution SRS5 and SRM5 have built-in mechanical turns counter. IP65 Protection Class. Size 5 square flange mounting. SINCOS SRS66 4 sine cycles per revolution Hollow-shaft up to 4 mm diameter SINCOS SHS-7 5 sine cycles per revolution. While the software supports this encoder, the SHS-7 draws excessive current and should only be used with an external power supply. SINCOS, SINCODER and LINCODER are registered trademarks of Stegmann Inc. Recommended Cables If you are using this motor and feedback device: Temposonics III Linear sensors with MTS part numbers ending in SG Allen-Bradley 36AB-BXXXX-ML, and -MKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Allen-Bradley 36AB-BXXXX-ML, -MKXL, -SL, and -SKXL motors with embedded Stegmann rotary encoder Any other motor with external Stegmann SRS/SRM5 rotary encoder Any other motor with other external Stegmann rotary encoders Use this cable: Mating MTS molded extension cable for RG connector or integral P cable Allen-Bradley 36-CECU-XXL-XXX Allen-Bradley 9-CDNFDMP-SXX Stegmann 6-456-XX cables with -Pin MS connector assembly 6-438- Stegmann 6-468-XX cables with C FUR connectors Important: Please note that encoders must be ordered with the C FUR connectors to accommodate these cables.
PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card H-3 Wiring the MDI Option Card 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 Terminal Signal Description 7 Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Power supply for Rotary Encoder interface 6 Rotary Encoder POWER 5 Rotary Encoder REFSIN Positive Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 4 Rotary Encoder +SIN Negative Sine signal for Rotary Encoder interface 3 Rotary Encoder REFCOS Negative Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Rotary Encoder +COS Positive Cosine signal for Rotary Encoder interface Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Positive DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Negative DH485 terminal for Rotary Encoder interface 9 Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Positive Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 8 Linear Sensor CLOCK- Negative Clock terminal for Linear Sensor interface 7 Linear Sensor DATA+ Positive SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 6 Linear Sensor DATA- Negative SSI terminal for Linear Sensor interface 5 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Positive terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 4 Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Negative terminal for Rotary Encoder registration strobe 3 Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Positive terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- Negative terminal for Linear Sensor registration strobe CHASSIS GND Connection point for cable shields
H-4 PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card Connection Examples Linear Sensor Connections with MDI RG Connector or P Integral Cable EXTERNAL 4 Vdc POWER SUPPLY Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND POWER RD or BN COMMON WH MDI Feedback Option Board 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 YE GN GY PK Rotary Encoder Connections with Allen-Bradley 36-CECU-XXL-XXX Cable Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board WH BK BK RD BK BU BK GN WH RD or BN GN YE GY PK BK WH BK RD BK BU BK GN 7 6 5 4 3 A B C D E F G H I J LINEAR SENSOR No Connection DC Ground +4 Vdc (-) CLOCK (+) CLOCK (+) DATA (-) DATA ROTARY ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS-485) SHIELD OVERALL SHIELD Rotary Encoder Connections for 46V MP Series Motor with 9-CDNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable; or 36AB-BXXXX-ML, -MKXL, -SL, and -SKXL motor with 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board OR WH/OR BK/WH BK WH/RD RD GN WH/GN BU WH/BU BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN OR WH/OR BU WH/BU A B C D E F N P R S ROTARY ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS-
PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card H-5 Connection Examples Rotary Encoder Connections for 3V MP Series Motor with 9-UXNFDMP-SXX or 9-XXNFMP-SXX cable Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board WH/GY GY BK/WH BK WH/RD RD GN WH/GN WH/BN WH/VT BK BK/WH RD WH/RD GN WH/GN GY WH/GY BU WH/BU A B C D E F K L R S ROTARY ENCODER +SIN REFSIN +COS REFCOS DATA+ (RS-485) DATA- (RS 485) POWER COMMON TS+ TS- Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable with -pin MS style connector Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN BU RD PK GN BN WH GY BK 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 ROTARY ENCODER POWER N/C POWER COMMON SHIELD +COS DATA- (RS 485) REFSIN +SIN N/C N/C DATA+ (RS 485) REFCOS Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and -pin MS style connector Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK A B C D E F G H I J ROTARY ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS N/C SHIELD
H-6 PowerFlex 7S Multi-Device Interface Option Card Connection Examples Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann shielded twisted-pair cable and 8-pin Berg style connector Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 MDI Feedback Option Board BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN RD BU BN BK GY GN WH PK 3 4 5 6 7 8 ROTARY ENCODER POWER POWER COMMON REFSIN REFCOS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) +SIN +COS Rotary Encoder Connections with Stegmann pre-attached shielded twisted-pair cable Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Registration Sensor Connection MDI Feedback Option Board BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN BU RD BN WH BK PK GY GN ROTARY ENCODER POWER COMMON POWER REFSIN +SIN REFCOS +COS DATA+ (RS 485) DATA- (RS 485) EXTERNAL or 4 Vdc POWER SUPPLY Rotary Encoder POWER COMMON Rotary Encoder POWER Rotary Encoder REFSIN Rotary Encoder +SIN Rotary Encoder REFCOS Rotary Encoder +COS Rotary Encoder DATA+ (RS485) Rotary Encoder DATA- (RS485) Linear Sensor CLOCK+ Linear Sensor CLOCK- Linear Sensor DATA+ Linear Sensor DATA- Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION+ Rotary Encoder REGISTRATION- Linear Sensor REGISTRATION+ Linear Sensor REGISTRATION- CHASSIS GND POWER COMMON MDI Feedback Option Board 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Rotary Registration Sensor + Power Common Linear Registration Sensor + Power Common
Appendix I PowerFlex 7S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications Compatible Permanent Magnet Motors The following table contains a list of specifications for the permanent magnet motors compatible with PowerFlex 7S drives. Note that you must have a high resolution Stegmann or compatible resolver. Model Number Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA (A (line to line V rms) rms) Table I.A Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications Motor NP Frequency (Hz) Motor NP RPM (oper. rpm) Motor NP Power (KW) Motor Poles Current peak (A rms) System Cont. Stall Torque (N-m) Parameter # 3 4 5 7 MPL-A3P 3 3.4 94. 44.73 8 9.9,.58 5 MPL-A3F 3. 85.3 78.46 8 6.6.58 3 MPL-A3P 3 6.4 7.3 47.3 8.9 3.5 5 MPL-A3H 3 4.6 8.7 33. 8 3.6 3.5 35 MPL-A33P 3 8.5 8.7 4.8 8 6.9 4.8 5 MPL-A4P 3 9. 68.7 43. 8 3.5 4.74 5 MPL-A43P 3.9 34. 35. 8 47.4 5.99 5 MPL-A43H 3 8.6 84.7 77.8 8 3.8 6. 35 MPL-A45P 3.4 34. 35. 8 35.4 5.99 5 MPL-A45K 3.6 3.3 335. 8 3.4 5.99 4 MPL-A453F 3 9.5 44.7 7.9 8 9.7 8.36 8 MPL-A453K 3 4.4 96. 94.5 8 43.8 8.3 4 MPL-A454C 3 6.6 93.3 4.5 8.5. 5 MPL-A454F 3 3. 6. 43.6 8 38.. 3 MPL-A5K 3 6.3 8. 3 3.5 8 46..7 4 MPL-A54K 3 9.3 8.7 7 5.5 8 84.9 9.4 4 MPL-A56F 3 9.3 5.3 88 5.5 8 84.9 7.9 3 MPL-B3P 46.7 3. 465.77 8 3..58 5 MPL-B3P 46 3. 33.3 47.5 8 5. 3.5 5 MPL-B33P 46 4.3 74. 4.8 8 7. 4.8 5 MPL-B4P 46 4.5 55.3 383.9 8 9. 4.74 5 MPL-B43P 46 6.5 4. 3. 8. 6.55 5 MPL-B45P 46 6. 36.7 355. 8 7. 5.65 5 MPL-B453F 46 5. 6. 43. 8 3.4 8.5 3 MPL-B453K 46 7.8.7 3.6 8 9. 8.5 4 MPL-B454F 46 6.4 6. 43.6 8 6.3. 3 MPL-B456F 46 8.3 44.7 7 3. 8 5.5 4. 3 MPL-B5K 46 8. 8. 3 3.5 8 3.3.7 4 MPL-B54K 46 4.5 77.3 66 5.4 8 4.4 9.4 4 MPL-B56F 46 4.5 3.7 96 5.5 8 4.4 6.8 3 MPL-B58F 46 8.4 3.7 99 7. 8 66.5 34. 3 MPL-B58J 46.6 48. 7.9 8 66.5 34. 38 MPL-B64F 46.7 6. 59 6. 8 46. 36.7 3 MPL-B66F 46 7. 8.3 6.5 8 67.9 48. 3 MPL-B68D 46 4. 94. 4 9.3 8 66.5 6.8 MPL-B68F 46 33.9 79.3 9 7.5 8 67.9 6. 3 MPL-B86D 46 33.6 96. 44.5 8 67.5 83. MPL-B88C 46 33.6 7.7 9.6 8 69.. 5 MPL-B88D 46 4.3 86.7 3 5. 8 3.. MPL-B96B 46 9.7 6. 93.7 8 63.6 3. MPL-B96C 46 38.9 76. 4 4.8 8 88.4 4.3 5 MPL-B96D 46 5. 76.7 5 5. 8.5 4.3 MPL-B98B 46 3.8 59.3 89 5. 8 7.7 6.7 MPL-B98C 46 48. 67.3 6.8 8 99. 58. 5 MPL-B98D 46 63.6 74.7 8.6 8 4.4 58. Motor Max RPM (rpm)
I- PowerFlex 7S Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications Model Number Motor NP Volts Motor NP FLA (A (line to line V rms) rms) Motor NP Frequency (Hz) Motor NP RPM (oper. rpm) Motor NP Power (KW) Motor Poles Current peak (A rms) System Cont. Stall Torque (N-m) Motor Max RPM (rpm) MPG-A4-3 3.8.7 334. 8 4..6 6 MPG-A-3 3. 89.3 84.36 8 6.. 4875 MPG-A-9 3.9 95.3 443.9 8.3.4 59 MPG-A5-3 3 9.9 8. 8.88 9.8 4.65 5 MPG-A5-9 3 3. 68. 68.5 8.5.95 565 MPG-A5-3 3 4.7..5 53..9 5 MPG-A5-9 3 5. 75. 75.75 5.6.6 3775 MPG-A-3 3... 53. 7. 875 MPG-A-9 3 7. 84. 84.6 33. 8.3 35 MPG-B-3 46.6 6.7 44.34 8 4.4.33 645 MPG-B-9 46.7 357.3 536.3 8.5.4 645 MPG-B5-3 46 4. 9. 9.9.3 4. 4838 MPG-B5-9 46.9 75. 75.54 5..95 59 MPG-B5-3 46 6.3 9. 9. 3.5.4 5 MPG-B5-9 46 3.4 9. 9.79 9.9.6 456 MPG-B-3 46.9.. 3. 7. 4 MPG-B-9 46.6 84. 84.6.5 8.3 35 36AB-B4G 46.5 8. 354. 4 7.4.7 5 36AB-B4J 46 3.5 65. 495.4 4.4.7 75 36AB-B4E 46.8 7.. 4 8.5 5. 3 36AB-B4H 46 5.5 37.3 4. 4 5.6 5. 6 36AB-B43E 46 3.9 67.7 3.4 4.7 6.6 3 36AB-B43G 46 5.6 4.3 343.3 4 6.8 6.4 5 36AB-B55E 46 6. 7.3.3 4 8.3.4 3 36AB-B55G 46 9.5 88.7 66.9 4 8.5.4 5 36AB-B5E 46 6.7 7. 3.9 4. 3. 3 36AB-B5F 46 8.8 7.3.9 4 6.4 3. 35 36AB-B53E 46 9.5 74.3 3 4. 4 8.5 8. 3 36AB-B7E 46 7.5 7. 6.8 4 5.5 3.9 35 36AB-B7F 46 7.5 7. 35.7 4 66.5 3.8 5 36AB-B73E 46.8 78.3 35 9.6 4 66.5 39. 335 36AB-B74C 46.9 5.3 57 8.7 4 6.7 53. 36AB-B74E 46 3. 79.7 39.7 4 66.5 5.8 34. 36AS-B3H 46.8 4.5 49.3 6.4.7 6 36AS-B33H 46. 4.5 49.9 6 6.. 65 36AS-B4G 46.6 79. 358. 6 7.8 3. 55 36AS-B44G 46 5.4 49. 98. 6 6. 6.4 55 36AS-B46F 46 6. 48.5 97.8 6 8.6 9. 43 36AS-B63F 46 7.8 4.7 4.4 8 8.5.7 45 36AS-B66E 46.8.7 5 3.4 8 9.8.5 3 36AS-B69E 46 9. 87.3 3 5. 8 4.3 36.4 3 36AS-B84E 46. 79.3 9 4.7 8 39.5 37.6 3 36AS-B86C 46 7.6 77.3 6 6. 8 44.4 49.3 36AH-B33F 46.. 3.75 9. 3 36AH-B44F 46 3.3. 5. 3.8 5 36AH-B54F 46.. 5.6 47. 5 35R-7 39 66. 5. 5 3. 3. 5 5R-7 39 8. 5. 5. 436. 5
Index A AC Supply Source -3 Unbalanced -3 Ungrounded -3 AC Supply Source Consideration -3 Access -8 Transformer Tap - Access Panel -8 Access Panel Removal -8 Ambient Operating Temperatures -3 Ambient Temperature -3 Armored Cable -6 Assisted Start-Up -3 Auxiliary Power Supply - B Before Applying Power - Bipolar Inputs -9 Bottom Plate Removal -8 Bottom View Dimensions A-7 Brake Resistor -4 C Cable -8 Cable Entry Plate Removal -8 SHLD Terminal -5 Cable Length Motor -8 Cable Trays -7 Cables, Power Armored -6 Insulation -6 Separation -6 Shielded -6 Type -6 Unshielded -6 Catalog Number Explanation P-5, P-6 CE Conformity -35 Checklist, Start-Up - Circuit Breaker Ratings A-6 Circuitry - Clear Faults Manually 4-4 Common Bus DC Input - Common Mode Capacitors -6 Common Mode Interference -9 Communications Programmable Controller Configurations A-4 Compatible Motors Thermistor A-7 Conduit -7 Control Assembly - Control Block Diagrams B- Control Block Diagrams - Overview B- Control Logic B- Control Wire -9 Conventions P-3 Cooling Fan Voltage -9 cover removing G- replacing G- D Dimensions A-9 Dimensions Frame -3 A- Dimensions Frame 4 A- Dimensions Frame 5 A- Dimensions Frame 6 A-3 Distribution Systems Unbalanced -3 Ungrounded -3 Documentation P- DPI Communication Configurations A-4 Drive Frame Sizes P-3 Drive Ratings A-8, A-9 Drive Status 4- Dynamic Brake Resistor -4 E EMC Directive -35 EMC Instructions -35 EMI/RFI Filter Grounding, RFI Filter -5
Index- Enclosure Rating -3 F Fan Voltage -9 Fault Descriptions 4-4 Faults Manually Clear 4-4 Faults and Alarms 4- Filter, RFI -5 Frame Sizes P-3 Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings A-6 Fuse Ratings A-8, A-9 Fuse Size A-6 Fuse Type A-7 Fuses -5 G General Precautions P-4 Grounding Filter -5 Shields -5 Grounding Requirements -4 H Hard Enable Circuitry - High Resolution (Stegmann) Specifications E- High Resolution Encoder Interface Board A-8 HIM D- ALT Functions D- External and Internal Connections D- External Connections D- Internal Connections D- LCD Display Elements D- Removing the HIM D-3 HIM Indication 4-4 Hi-Resolution Encoder Feedback Option PowerFlex 7S E- I I/O Wiring -9 Input Phase Selection -9 Input Power Conditioning -4 Input/Output Contactors Using -5 Inputs & Outputs - Analog B- Inputs & Outputs - Digital B- Installation - Installation/Wiring Chapter - installing cover G- Inverter Overload IT B- J Jumper Removal -6 L LED Indications 4- Logic Command Word A-5 Logic Status Word A-6 M Main Control Board A-8 I/O Terminal Locations - Main Control Board I/O Configuration Settings -3 Manual Conventions P-3 Manually Clearing Faults 4-4 Motor -8 Motor Cable Lengths -8 Motor Control Mode Field Oriented Control C- Permanent Magnet Control C-3 Motor Control Technology C- Motor Ratings A-7 Mounting Clearances - MOVs -6 N Non-Resettable 4- O Opening Cover - Opening the Cover -
Index-3 Operating Temperature -3 Output Devices A-6 Overspeed C-4 P Parameter By Name 3-96 Data 3-6 Linear List Format 3-6 Parameters 3- About 3- Cross Reference 3-96 Organization 3-3 Programming 3- Parameters, Groups Communication 3-4 Dynamic Control 3-3 Inputs & Outputs 3-4 Monitor 3-3 Motor Control 3-3 Position Control 3-4 Process Control 3-3 Speed Control 3-3 Speed/Posit Fdbk 3-4 SynchLink 3-4 Torque Control 3-3 Utility 3-4 Peak Detector B- Permanent Magnet Motor Specifications I- Permanent Magnet Motors Compatible Motors I- Motor Name Plate and Rating Specifications I- Position Control - Auxiliary B- Position Control - Interpolated/Direct B- Position Control - Point to Point B- Power -8 Power Conditioning, Input -4 Power Supply Auxiliary - Power Terminal Block -8 Power Wiring -6 Access Panel -8 General -8 Powering Up the Drive - Process Control B- Programmable Controller Configurations A-4 R Recommended -9, E-3 Recommended Cables Cables E-3 Recommended Documentation P- Removal -8 Access Panel -8 removing cover G- replacing cover G- Resolver Interface Board A-8 S Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage -9 Shielded Cables Power -6 SHLD Terminal -5 Signal Wire -9 Spare Connectors A-8, F- Specifications A- Speed Control - Reference B- Speed Control - Regulator B- Speed/Position Feedback B- Start-Up - Assisted -3 Checklist - Stegmann High Resolution E- Support Encoders E- Stegmann Hi-Resolution Connection Examples E-3 Stegmann Hi-Resolution Specifications E- Supplemental Information A- Supply Source -3 SynchLink -33 SynchLink Cables and Connector Parts A-9 T TB - Row B (Bottom) Terminals -4 TB - Row T (Top) Terminals - TB - Row B (Bottom) Terminals -3 TB - Row T (Top) Terminals -6 Terminal Block -8 Wire Size
Index-4 Power - Thermistor Ratings A-7 Torque Control B- Transformer Tap Access - U Unbalanced/Ungrounded Supply -3 Ungrounded Distribution Systems -6 Unshielded Power Cables -6 W Web Sites, see WWW, World Wide Web Wire Signal -9 Wiring Access Panel Removal -8 Cable Entry Plate Removal -8 Power -6 Wiring Examples TB - Row B (Bottom) -5 TB - Row T (Top) - TB - Row R (Top) -7 WWW, World Wide Web P-
Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates. In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone. Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 4 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running. United States or Canada.44.646.3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative. New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures. United States Outside United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process. Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure. Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete this form, publication RA-DU, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 3475 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +9 (6) 56984 Publication D-UMG-EN-P - August 3 Supersedes Publication D-UMF-EN-P - October 5 Copyright 3 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.